Mxl Iq Manual.pdf 6u2l1

Cerberus Division Table of Contents

Version 1.0

This CD-Rom contains the information necessary to install, operate and maintain the Siemens, Cerberus Division MXL/MXLV and MXL-IQ Fire Protection Control s Contents

MXL/MXLV Control P/N 315-092036CD-8

Personalize/ Printout Cover

MXL-IQ Control P/N 315-093624CD-9

Personalize/ Printout Cover

Navigation There are three ways to navigate: 1) Use the left hand index column (which appears as you proceed) 2) Use the green buttons above to get to the corresponding manual 3) Use the arrows in the menu bar above There are 2 ways to enlarge or reduce: 1) Use the magnifying glass in the menu bar above 2) Use the three different page views in the menu bar.

Cerberus Division

CERBERUS PYROTRONICS™

MXL-IQ CONTROL Operation, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 8 Fernwood Road Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 P/N 315-093624CD-9

Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd. 50 East Pearce Street Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 1B7 CN

CAUTION ALL WIRING MUST BE DONE AS DESCRIBED BELOW TO OBTAIN SAFE AND PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 1. Earth ground the MXL-IQ enclosure properly; see the latest edition of the National Electrical Code for approved methods. Conduit ground is NOT adequate. 2. Separate all wiring for initiating devices (i.e., detectors, manual stations, TRI modules, etc.) from all other wiring in the MXL-IQ enclosure. To wire the System in compliance with UL 864, refer to the Installation and Power Limited Wiring Instructions for the MSE-3L Enclosure, P/N 315-095445. 3. INSULATE ALL CABLE DRAIN WIRES from any conduit or earth grounded electrical box, including those in the MXL-IQ enclosure. 4. Connect shield cable drain wire ONLY inside the MXL-IQ enclosure. 5. No wiring used for any of the following can run outside the building: • an ALD loop • a RS-485 network • an NAC circuit used for audibles • a CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 initiating device loop For additional wiring information, refer to this manual or call Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Technical Department at 1-800-248-7976.

Table of Contents

Description ______________________________ 1 - 1

Chapter 1

Introduction ___________________________________________________ 1 - 1 Software ______________________________________________________ 1 - 1 Minimum MXL-IQ Control Configuration ________________________ 1 - 3

Components Of The Basic System __________________________________ 1 - 4 SMB-2 Main Board _____________________________________________ 1 - 4 MPS-6 Power Supply ___________________________________________ 1 - 5 MPS-12 Power Supply __________________________________________ 1 - 5 MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator _______________________________ 1 - 5 PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module _________________________________ 1 - 6 PIM-2 Peripheral Interface Module _________________________________ 1 - 6 PAL-1 _______________________________________________________ 1 - 6 TSW-2 Tamper Switch __________________________________________ 1 - 6 BP-61 Batteries ________________________________________________ 1 - 7 BTX Batteries _________________________________________________ 1 - 7

Optional Modules _______________________________________________ 1 - 7 MOM-2 Card Cage _____________________________________________ 1 - 8 MOM-4 Card Cage _____________________________________________ 1 - 8 CSM-4 Signal Module ___________________________________________ 1 - 8 CMI-300 Interface Module________________________________________ 1 - 9 CRM-4 Relay Module ___________________________________________ 1 - 9 CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module _________________________________ 1 - 9 ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver ______________________________________ 1 - 10 MOI-7 Voice and Annunciator Driver_______________________________ 1 - 10 MOD-16 Output Driver _________________________________________ 1 - 10 MID-16 Input Driver ____________________________________________ 1 - 11 NIM-1R Network Interface Module ________________________________ 1 - 11

i

Table of Contents

Intelligent/Analog Devices _______________________________________ 1 - 12 FP Intelligent Detector Series ____________________________________ 1 - 12 I Intelligent Control Point _____________________________________ 1 - 12 I-B6 Intelligent Control Point __________________________________ 1 - 12 ID Intelligent/Analog Detector Series ______________________________ 1 - 12 IL Intelligent/Analog Detector Series _______________________________ 1 - 13 LIM-1 Loop Isolator Module _____________________________________ 1 - 14 MSI Intelligent Manual Station Series ______________________________ 1 - 14 TRI Intelligent Interface Module Series _____________________________ 1 - 14 CZM-1B6 Remote Conventional Zone Module _______________________ 1 - 14

Conventional Devices ___________________________________________ 1 - 15 DI Ionization Detector Series ____________________________________ 1 - 15 DT-11 Thermal Detector ________________________________________ 1 - 15 PE Photoelectric Detector Series _________________________________ 1 - 15 PBA-1191 Linear Beam Smoke Detector ___________________________ 1 - 15

Chapter 2

Installation ______________________________ 2 - 1 General Guidelines For Installing The MXL-IQ ________________________ 2 - 1

Installation Instructions For The MXL-IQ Control __________________ 2 - 2 Install the MSE-3L Enclosure _____________________________________ 2 - 2 Install The TSW-2 Tamper Switch _________________________________ 2 - 2 Pull All Field Wiring Into The Backbox ______________________________ 2 - 3 Install the SMB-2 _______________________________________________ 2 - 3 Install the MPS-6/12 ____________________________________________ 2 - 3 Install the MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator ____________________________ 2 - 4 Install the PIM-1, PIM-2, and PAL-1 ________________________________ 2 - 5 Install the MOM-2 or MOM-4 ______________________________________ 2 - 6 Install the MOI-7, MOD-16, and MID-16 ____________________________ 2 - 9 Install Field Wiring _____________________________________________ 2 - 10 Check Field Wiring ____________________________________________ 2 - 10

ii

Table of Contents

Start Up Procedure ____________________________________________ 2 - 10 System Function Checkout ______________________________________ 2 - 16

Operation _______________________________ 3 - 1

Chapter 3

Introduction ___________________________________________________ 3 - 1 Addresses ____________________________________________________ 3 - 1 System Modules _______________________________________________ 3 - 2 Remote System Modules ________________________________________ 3 - 2

Using The MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator In Local Mode ____________ 3 - 3 The Display ___________________________________________________ 3 - 3 Internal Audible Alarm ___________________________________________ 3 - 4 Modes Of Operation ____________________________________________ 3 - 5

Alarm ________________________________________________________ 3 - 6 How The System Annunciates Fire Alarms __________________________ 3 - 6 Viewing the List of Alarms ________________________________________ 3 - 7 How to Block Acknowledge A Fire Alarm ____________________________ 3 - 7 How to Individually Acknowledge A Fire Alarm ________________________ 3 - 7 Silencing The System ___________________________________________ 3 - 7

Supervisories __________________________________________________ 3 - 8 How The System Annunciates Supervisories _________________________ 3 - 8 Viewing the List of Supervisories __________________________________ 3 - 8 How to Block Acknowledge a Supervisory ___________________________ 3 - 8 How to Individually Acknowledge a Supervisory _______________________ 3 - 9

Troubles ______________________________________________________ 3 - 9 How The System Annunciates Troubles _____________________________ 3 - 9 Viewing The List of Troubles ______________________________________ 3 - 9 How to Block Acknowledge a Trouble______________________________ 3 - 10 How to Individually Acknowledge a Trouble _________________________ 3 - 10

iii

Table of Contents

Security Conditions_____________________________________________ 3 - 10 How The System Annunciates Security Conditions ___________________ 3 - 10 Viewing the List of Security Conditions _____________________________ 3 - 11 How to Individually Acknowledge a Security Condition _________________ 3 - 11

Reset Procedures ______________________________________________ 3 - 11 Hard Reset __________________________________________________ 3 - 11 Soft Reset ___________________________________________________ 3 - 11

Using The MKB Keyboard/Annunciator in Global Mode ____________ 3 - 12 Limitations/Restrictions _________________________________________ 3 - 12 Global MKB Display Format _____________________________________ 3 - 12 Global Keypad Operation _______________________________________ 3 - 13

Using The Menu _______________________________________________ 3 - 14 Operation of the Keys on the MXL-IQ Annunciator ______________ 3 - 14 Numeric Keypad ______________________________________________ 3 - 14 The Command Keypad _________________________________________ 3 - 14 Overview of the Menu’s Structure _________________________________ 3 - 15 Beginning a Menu Session ______________________________________ 3 - 16 Introduction to the Acknowledge Menu _____________________________ 3 - 16 Introduction to the List Menu _____________________________________ 3 - 16 Introduction to the Control Menu __________________________________ 3 - 16 Introduction to the Test Menu ____________________________________ 3 - 16 Entering Your ________________________________________ 3 - 17 Entering a Module Number and Device Number _____________________ 3 - 17 Entering a Device Number with the Module Number __________________ 3 - 17

ACKNOWLEDGE Menu __________________________________________ 3 - 18 Entering the Acknowledge Menu _________________________________ 3 - 18 Acknowledge Alarm ___________________________________________ 3 - 18 Acknowledge Supervisory _______________________________________ 3 - 19 Acknowledge Trouble __________________________________________ 3 - 20 Acknowledge Security __________________________________________ 3 - 21

iv

Table of Contents

LIST Menu ____________________________________________________ 3 - 22 Entering the List Menu _________________________________________ 3 - 22 List Status ___________________________________________________ 3 - 23 List Alarm ___________________________________________________ 3 - 23 List Supervisory _______________________________________________ 3 - 24 List Trouble __________________________________________________ 3 - 24 List Security Conditions _________________________________________ 3 - 25 List Sensitivity Settings _________________________________________ 3 - 26 List Voltages _________________________________________________ 3 - 26 List Temp ____________________________________________________ 3 - 28 List Module Type ______________________________________________ 3 - 28 List Device Type ______________________________________________ 3 - 29 List Message _________________________________________________ 3 - 29 List Software Version __________________________________________ 3 - 30 List Output States _____________________________________________ 3 - 31 List Device Usages ____________________________________________ 3 - 31 List Node Address _____________________________________________ 3 - 32 List ANALASER ______________________________________________ 3 - 32 List ANALASER – SMOKE_LEV __________________________________ 3 - 32 List ANALASER – FLOW_LEV ___________________________________ 3 - 33 List ANALASER – TRIP_PTS ____________________________________ 3 - 33 List Percent/ft ________________________________________________ 3 - 34 List Percent/ft – Senstvty _______________________________________ 3 - 35 List Percent/ft – Pre-alarm ______________________________________ 3 - 35 List Percent/ft – Analog _________________________________________ 3 - 35 List ASD_apps _______________________________________________ 3 - 35

CONTROL Menu _______________________________________________ 3 - 36 Entering the Control Menu ______________________________________ 3 - 37 Control Reset ________________________________________________ 3 - 37 Control Sensitivity _____________________________________________ 3 - 37 Control Arm/dis _______________________________________________ 3 - 38

v

Table of Contents

Control Output on/off ___________________________________________ 3 - 38 Control Loop Arm _____________________________________________ 3 - 39 Control Loop Disarm ___________________________________________ 3 - 39 Control Net Link Request _______________________________________ 3 - 40 Control ANALASER ___________________________________________ 3 - 40 Control Percent/ft _____________________________________________ 3 - 41 Control Percent/ft - Senstvty _____________________________________ 3 - 41 Control Percent/ft - Pre-alarm ____________________________________ 3 - 41 Control Change Apps __________________________________________ 3 - 42

TEST Menu ___________________________________________________ 3 - 42 Entering the Test Menu _________________________________________ 3 - 43 Test Set Time ________________________________________________ 3 - 43 Test Ground Fault _____________________________________________ 3 - 44 Test Power __________________________________________________ 3 - 44 Lamp Test ___________________________________________________ 3 - 45 Test Device LED ______________________________________________ 3 - 45 Test MOI Lamp Test ___________________________________________ 3 - 46 Test Network (X-Network, M-Network) _____________________________ 3 - 46 Test Override _________________________________________________ 3 - 46 Detector Cleaning _____________________________________________ 3 - 47 Event Log ___________________________________________________ 3 - 47 Test Pre-alarm ________________________________________________ 3 - 47 Test ASD Devices _____________________________________________ 3 - 48 Test Summarize ______________________________________________ 3 - 48 Test Manual Activate ___________________________________________ 3 - 49

Chapter 4

Testing and Troubleshooting _________________ 4 - 1 System Test ____________________________________________________ 4 - 1 Every Six Months ______________________________________________ 4 - 1 Every Year ____________________________________________________ 4 - 1 Fuse Replacement _____________________________________________ 4 - 1 Troubleshooting _______________________________________________ 4 - 2

vi

Table of Contents

Walktest Operating Instructions______________ 5 - 1

Chapter 5

Introduction ___________________________________________________ 5 - 1 System w/AUD ________________________________________________ 5 - 2 System SIL ___________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Loop w/AUD __________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Loop SIL _____________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Zone wAUD ___________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Zone SIL _____________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Cancel _______________________________________________________ 5 - 2 Extend _______________________________________________________ 5 - 2

Suggested Walktest Proedure _____________________________________ 5 - 2 Walktest the System ____________________________________________ 5 - 3 Walktest Ending Sequence _______________________________________ 5 - 4 Walktest Entire ALD Loop, MOI-7 (MID-16), or CZM-4 Module ___________ 5 - 4 Walktest Ending Sequence _______________________________________ 5 - 5 Walktest Individual CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 Zone ________________________ 5 - 5

History Log ______________________________ 6 - 1

Chapter 6

CSG-M History Options__________________________________________ 6 - 1

Logging Methods _______________________________________________ 6 - 2 Enabling the History Option in CSG-M ______________________________ 6 - 4 From the MKB Menu ____________________________________________ 6 - 4 Local History Log Query _________________________________________ 6 - 5 Query Selection ________________________________________________ 6 - 5 Query Filters __________________________________________________ 6 - 5 Navigating The History Display ____________________________________ 6 - 6 History Display Formats _________________________________________ 6 - 6 Device Event __________________________________________________ 6 - 6 Reset Event ___________________________________________________ 6 - 6 Set Time Event ________________________________________________ 6 - 7 Block Acknowledge Event ________________________________________ 6 - 7

vii

Table of Contents

Audible Silenced Event __________________________________________ 6 - 8 Override Event ________________________________________________ 6 - 8 Audible Unsilenced Event ________________________________________ 6 - 8 Event _______________________________________________ 6 - 8 Configuration Changed Event _____________________________________ 6 - 9 Manual Sensitivity Set Event ______________________________________ 6 - 9 Auto Sensitivity Set Event ________________________________________ 6 - 9 Logic Sensitivity Set Event ______________________________________ 6 - 10 History Print Formats At The MXL-IQ _________________________ 6 - 10 MXL-IQ To CSG-M Formats _____________________________ 6 - 13 History Sequence _____________________________________ 6 - 14

Chapter 7

Connections and Ratings ___________________ 7 - 1 ALD-2I ________________________________________________________ 7 - 1 CMI-300 _______________________________________________________ 7 - 3 CRM-4 ________________________________________________________ 7 - 5 CSM-4 ________________________________________________________ 7 - 7 CZM-1B6 _____________________________________________________ 7 - 13 CZM-4 _______________________________________________________ 7 - 17 MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 __________________________________________ 7 - 19 MOM-2 ______________________________________________________ 7 - 25 MOM-4 ______________________________________________________ 7 - 27 NIM-1R ______________________________________________________ 7 - 29 Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 ____________________________________ 7 - 33 SMB-2 _______________________________________________________ 7 - 35

viii

Table of Contents

Compatible Devices _____________________________________________ A - 1

Appendix

Device Analog Voltages __________________________________________ B - 1 MXL-IQ Battery Calculations _______________________________________ C - 1 MXL-IQ Power Supply Load Calculations _____________________________ D - 1 Alarm Verification _______________________________________________ E - 1 Envirolink _____________________________________________________ F - 1 Latching/Non-Latching Troubles ____________________________________ G - 1 Installing A Security Point ________________________________________ H - 1 Application Specific Detection (ASD) ________________________________I - 1 MXL-IQ Trouble Messages _________________________________________ J - 1 Power Limited Wiring ____________________________________________ K - 1 New Two Stage Alarm ___________________________________________ L - 1 Pre-alarm, Dual Criteria Logic Functions, and Percent Per Foot Obscuration Features ___________________________________________ M - 1 MXL-IQ Spare Parts List __________________________________________ N - 1 New Features for MXL-IQ Revision 6.0 and Higher ______________________ O - 1

ix

Table of Contents

x

+D=FJAH

1

Description The CERBERUS PYROTRONICS™ MXL-IQ Control is an advanced fire protection and alarm control that provides superior fire protection and multiplexed alarm reporting. The MXL-IQ Control can monitor up to 4 analog loops, each containing up to 60 CERBERUS PYROTRONICS™ intelligent devices. The MXL-IQ Control can control a wide variety of System outputs, such as: • Conventional Form C relay s • Solid State outputs • Supervised outputs to control Alarm Notification Appliances • Municipal Tie outputs • Leased Line outputs The MXL-IQ Control can process logical decisions based on the status of initiating devices. The System can respond with customer-specified sequences of output circuit operation. The System continuously checks all software and hardware for proper operation. It continuously checks all System memory components, control electronic hardware, and the System program. A hardwire watchdog circuit is provided to ensure that System programs are functioning properly. If a problem develops with the program or processor, the watchdog circuit places the System into a trouble condition and resets it.

To ensure reliable operation, the MXL-IQ System is composed of independent modules, each with its own microprocessor. If the main ’s central processing unit stops, these modules, operating in default, still annunciate any alarm or trouble through common lines called Any Alarm and Any Trouble. All of the modules communicate with the MXL-IQ through a serial communications System.

INTRODUCTION

All modules are continuously supervised for their presence and for proper operation. Problems are shown on the display to aid in servicing and troubleshooting (See Using the Menu in the OPERATIONS section). The MXL-IQ System is designed so that fire alarm operation has first priority over all other modes of operation. If the System loses battery and commercial power, it automatically goes through an initialization routine when power returns.

The MXL-IQ software was written in a highlevel language for ease of maintenance. The software incorporates a multitasking operating system that allows the microprocessor to handle many tasks almost simultaneously. This enables the MXL-IQ System to handle communications to all initiating and output option boards and to the annunciator. This also enables the MXL-IQ System to check that everything is running.

SOFTWARE

1-1

Description

ALARM

POWER

AUDIBLE SILENCE

PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE

SUPERVISORY

DISPLAY

TROUBLE

NEXT

HOLD

SECURITY

CERBERUS PYROTRONICS

MXL-IQ Exterior View

Interior View

Figure 1 The MXL-IQ Control

1-2

Description When the MXL-IQ Control receives power, the System runs a start-up procedure that sets up all initial conditions. The System then starts the operating system and the initialization routines for all of the tasks, most of which concern handling System modules. When the display task is finished initializing, it displays the default time and date at power-up. Initialization of other modules may take several seconds, but this takes place in the background and so does not affect System operation.

fied modules. Any modules or devices that do not agree with the programmed data are reported as troubles on the annunciator.

Minimum MXL-IQ Control Configuration To Meet NFPA 72 Local, Municipal Tie, Remote Station, Proprietary, And Central Station, UL 1076, And NFPA 12A, 13, And 2001

Table 1 presents the minimum configuration necessary to meet NFPA 72 Local, Municipal Tie, Remote Station, Proprietary, and Central Station, UL 1076, and NFPA 12A, NFPA 13 and NFPA 2001.

The MXL-IQ System polls all network addresses to see that all specified modules are present and that there are no unspeci-

NFPA Minimum Quantity Module

Description

72 Local

72 Auxiliary

72 Remote Station

72 Proprietary

72 Central Station(a)

UL 1076(b,d)

12A, 13, or 20 01

SMB-2(c)

MXL-IQ Main Unit

1*

1

1*

1

1*

1

1

MPS-6/12

Power Supply

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

MKB-4

Keyboard/Annunciator

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

MOM-2

Optional Module Card Cage

X

1

1

X

X

X

1

MOM-4

Optional Module Card Cage

X

1

1

X

X

X

1

X

1

1 or 2**

X

X

X

1(h)

***

***

***

***

***

X

***

CSM-4

Signal Module

CZM-4

Conventional Zone Module

ALD-2I

Analog Loop Driver

***

***

***

***

***

****

***

CZM-1B6

Remote Conventional Zone Module

***

***

***

***

***

X

***

-----------

Batteries(e,f)

1(e)

1(e)

1(e)

1(e)

1

1(d)

1(e)

TSW-2

Tamper Switch

X

X

X

X

X

1(d)

X

PIM-1

Peripheral Interface Module

X

X

X

1

X

1

X

PIM-2

Peripheral Interface Module

X

X

X

1

X

1

X

PAL-1

Logging Printer

X

X

X

1

X

1

X

NET-7

Communication Interface

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MOI-7

Voice and Annunciator Driver

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MOD-16

Output Driver

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

MID-16

Input Module

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CRM-4

Relay Module

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

CMI-30 0

MXL/CXL Interface

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X = not required * **

Use Silent Knight listed models 5128/5129 and 5230. One CSM-4 circuit must be configured for alarm transmission. In addition, depending on the local authority having jurisdiction, additional circuits may be required for Supervisory or Trouble transmission. *** Any one of these modules is sufficient as an initiating device. **** Only TRI-60/B6, TRI-60R/B6R, and TRI-60D/B6D can be used as security devices.

NOTES: a. See pages 7-33 to 7-34 for NFPA 72 Central Station. b. Refer to the MXL-IQ Wiring Diagram, P/N 575-293638 at the end of the manual. c. The SMB-2 must be programmed by CSG-M for all System configurations (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381). d. UL 1076 requires a Model TSW-2 tamper switch and a PAL-1 printer. e. The batteries available are: BP-61, BTX-1, and BTX-2. The BP-61 is a module consisting of four 6V, 15 AH batteries. The BTX-1 batteries are a pair of 12V, 31 AH batteries. The BTX-2 batteries are a pair of 12V, 55 AH batteries. Actual battery size depends on System configuration. f. See Appendix C for Battery Calculations. g. The CMI-300 is not listed for UL 1076 application. h. Refer to the CSM-4 Installation Instructions (P/N 315-090854) for programming.

TABLE 1 Minimum MXL-IQ Configuration to Meet NFPA 72 Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, Proprietary, and Central Station Connections, UL 1076, and NFPA 12A, NFPA 13, and NFPA 2001

1-3

Description

Components Of The Basic System The basic MXL-IQ Control consists of the following components: • SMB-2 Main Board • MPS-6 or MPS-12 Power Supply • MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator • PAL-1 Logging Printer (NFPA Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations) • PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module (NFPA Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations) • PIM-2 Peripheral Interface Module (NFPA Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations) • MSE-3L Enclosure • TSW-2 Tamper Switch (UL 1076 configuration only) • BP-61, BTX-1, or BTX-2 Batteries P1

BATTERY

F2 20A

P14

MPS-6

CB1 NAC1 CB2 NAC2

MPS-12

P2 BATTERY

F3 F4 MOM-4 15 AMP

P3 POWER TO MOM-4 2 AMP MAX.

F1 MPS-6 8 AMP P8

NAC 2

5

P13

3

NAC 1

• 16-bit central processing unit (U) NOT USED

• System read-only memories (EPROMs) • System random-access memory (RAM) • FLASH memory for CSG-M

3 2 1

• Watchdog circuitry • Network interface circuitry

DO NOT USE

2

MNET

1

6

TB1 S7 S4 1

D2300

PROGRAMMER P4 PRINTER

1

P6

1 P5

1

I C 1 1 4

I C 1 1 3

I C 1 1 2

I C 1 1 1

I C 1 1 0

P15

P10

TO ANN-1

GND FAULT DISCONNECT

12A TO MOM-4

4

6 4

LOOP 1

1

7 5

TB2

2

10 8

4 3

11 9

SMB-2

LOOP 2

1

CZM-1B6 POWER

1

TB3

2

The SMB-2 Main Board contains:

12

4 3

SMB-2 Main Board

CZM-1B6 POWER 2 AMP

1

1

TRBL

4 OFF 1

3

ON P17

ALR

1

• 24V regulator

2 1

MOM-4

• Battery charger

5

• AC transfer relay • CZM-1B6 auxiliary power

Figure 2 SMB-2 Main Board

• 24 VDC unregulated supply • Two analog loops (initiating/control) • Two notification appliance circuits (audible circuits) • Two dry- relays (Form C)

1-4

Description

MPS-6 Power Supply The MPS-6 is a supervised power supply that converts 120 VAC, 60 Hz to unregulated 24 VDC at 6A.

MPS-12 Power Supply The MPS-12 is a high current power supply that provides the MXL-IQ System with primary 24 VDC power. It is rated at 12 amps and is unfiltered and unregulated. The MPS-12 supplies the SMB-2 with the power required for normal operation. The module incorporates a 5 amp resettable circuit breaker on the primary input, a 15 amp fuse on the 24V output, and a built-in AC line filter for surge and noise suppression.

Figure 3A MPS-6 Power Supply

Figure 3B MPS-12 Power Supply

MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator The MKB-4 Annunciator communicates with the SMB-2 Main Control Board through the System network link. This module provides the MXL-IQ with its primary control and annunciation. The MKB-4 module has an 80-character, backlit LCD alphanumeric display that continuously updates information about the System status and -defined device messages. If there are multiple alarms, and/or troubles, including supervisories and security conditions, the MKB-4 displays the highest priority event that occurred. The can see additional alarm and trouble data by pressing the NEXT key. Press the HOLD key at any time to stop the display from scrolling. The Control contains the following indicators:

Figure 4 MKB-4 Keyboard The MKB-4 has switches for the following functions:

• Alarm

• Acknowledging fire alarms (ALARM ACK)

• Power

• Silencing audibles (AUD SIL)

• Audible Silence

• Acknowledging supervisories (SUPV ACK)

• Partial System Disable

• Acknowledging System troubles (TRBL ACK)

• Supervisory

• Acknowledging security conditions (SEC ACK)

• Trouble

• Resetting the Control (RESET)

• Security

In addition the module has display keys (NEXT and HOLD), a numerical keypad, PRINT, HELP, and CLEAR keys, and -configurable function keys.

1-5

Description

PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module The PIM-1 module is an interface for an MXL-IQ System to remote peripheral devices such as printers. It connects an RS-232C device to an MXL-IQ System without the peripheral device's protective ground causing a ground fault. The interface operates at up to 9600 baud without losing any characters.

PIM-2 Peripheral Interface Module Figure 5 PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module

The PIM-2 module is an interface that allows the connection of UL listed EDP Centronics parallel printers to the MXL-IQ System. It converts the RS-232C (serial) printer output to a Centronics parallel interface. When used with the PAL-1, the PIM-2 provides a supervised parallel printer (NFPA 72 Proprietary or UL 1076) for the MXL-IQ System. However, this configuration is not supervised for data integrity.

PAL-1 The PAL-1 Logging Printer provides a paper record of the activity of the MXL-IQ System.

Figure 6 PAL-1 Parallel Printer

TSW-2 Tamper Switch The TSW-2 Tamper Switch is a 3-position switch that monitors the opening of the MXL-IQ enclosure and reports a security alarm. Closing the door automatically returns the switch to its normal operating position. The switch can be pulled out to indicate a closed position for maintenance purposes.

Figure 7 TSW-2 Tamper Switch

1-6

Description

BP-61 Batteries The BP-61 is a module consisting of four 6V, 15 AH batteries. The BP-61 is recommended for the NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary, and the UL 1076 Systems. Actual battery size depends on System configuration. See Appendix C for battery calculations.

Figure 8 BP-61 Batteries

BTX Batteries The BTX-1 batteries are a pair of 12V, 31 AH batteries. The BTX-2 batteries are a pair of 12V, 55 AH batteries. Actual battery size depends on System configuration. See Appendix C for battery calculations.

Figure 9 BTX Batteries

The following modules are available as options to the MXL-IQ Control : • MOM-2 Card Cage • MOM-4 Card Cage • CSM-4 Signal Module

• ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver • MOI-7 Voice and Annunciator Driver*

OPTIONAL MODULES

• MOD-16 Output Driver* • MID-16 Input Module* • NIM-1R Network Interface Module

• CMI-300 Interface Module • CRM-4 Relay Module • CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module

* This module does not mount in the MSE-3L enclosure.

1-7

Description

MOM-2 Card Cage The MOM-2 Card Cage contains 2 slots for optional module cards; it can handle 2 halfwidth cards or 1 full-width card. The MOM-2 provides 2 power-connector receptacles and 2 data-connector receptacles. A 24 VDC cable that provides the main power used by the optional modules, and an 8-wire ribbon cable for connection of 5 VDC and data, are provided with the MOM-2 installation kit.

Figure 10 MOM-2 Card Cage

MOM-4 Card Cage The MOM-4 Card Cage contains 4 slots for optional module cards; it can handle 4 halfwidth cards or 2 full-width cards. The MOM-4 provides 2 power-connector receptacles and 2 data-connector receptacles. A 24 VDC cable that provides the main power used by the optional modules, and an 8-wire ribbon cable for connection of 5 VDC and data, are provided with the MOM-4 installation kit.

Figure 11 MOM-4 Card Cage

CSM-4 Signal Module S1

S3

G1

S2

G2

Figure 12 CSM-4 Signal Module

1-8

The CSM-4 Signal module controls 2 supervised notification appliance circuits. Each circuit is capable of either Style Z (Class A) or Style Y (Class B) operation. Each circuit can be individually configured for notification appliances, municipal tie, leased line, or releasing service per NFPA 12A, NFPA 13, and NFPA 2001. S4

Description

CMI-300 Interface Module The CMI-300 provides modem communications between an MXL-IQ System and a CXL System. The CMI-300 module is located on the MOM-2/4 board in the MXL-IQ enclosure. The CMI-300 plugs into a half slot in the MOM-2/4. It translates signals from the MXL-IQ communication lines of the SMB-2 to CXL modem signals. This signal is then transmitted along suitable cable to the CXM-1 module in the CXL enclosure.

Figure 13 CMI-300 Interface Module

CRM-4 Relay Module The CRM-4 Relay module is an output control module that contains 4 relay outputs. Form C s are rated at 2A, 30 VDC/120 VAC resistive. The CRM-4 has 4 LEDs. Two of the LEDs are programmable.

Figure 14 CRM-4 Relay Module

CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module The CZM-4 Conventional Zone module provides four initiating device circuits capable of Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) operation. Each zone has its own address. You can use CSG-M to write a custom message for each zone (See CSGM Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381).

Figure 15 CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module

1-9

Description

ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver The ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver provides two initiating device circuits capable of Class A or Class B operation for monitoring analog devices. Each loop is capable of monitoring up to 60 analog devices. Each device has its own address. You can use CSG-M to write a custom message for each device (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381).

Figure 16 ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver

MOI-7 Voice and Annunciator Driver The MOI-7 module is an MXL-IQ network module that connects to a graphic annunciator using MOD-16s or MID-16s.

The MOI-7 has two LEDs to indicate the status of the MXL-IQ network interface:

S1

• the TRANSMIT LED blinks when the MXL-IQ/MOI-7 communication is working • the TROUBLE LED goes to steady when MOI cannot communicate

Figure 17 MOI-7 Voice and Annunciator Driver

MOD-16 Output Driver The MOD-16 Output Driver module is an annunciator driver controlled by the MOI-7 module. Up to 8 MOD-16s can be used with an MOI-7. Each MOD-16 can activate up to 16 outputs for a total of 128 outputs.

Figure 18 MOD-16 Output Driver

1-10

Description

MID-16 Input Driver The MID-16 module provides 16 general purpose inputs for -defined operations for the MXL-IQ. The MID-16 is controlled by the MOI-7 module. Up to 8 MID-16s can be used with an MOI-7. The function of each individual input is defined by the use assigned to it in CSG-M.

Figure 19 MID-16 Input Driver

NIM-1R Network Interface Module The NIM-1R provides a communication path for the following uses: • as an MXL-IQ networking interface • as a connection to Foreign Systems • as a connection to AnaLASER detectors When used as a networking interface the NIM-1R s the connection of up to 63 MXL-IQ Systems. This network also s a Network Command Center (NCC) that monitors all the MXL-IQs in the networked group. Output logic between MXL-IQ s is made using CSG-M programming. CSG-M versions 6.01 and higher include options for networked MXL-IQ systems. Each MXL-IQ System is assigned a number. This number allows interactive programming between s using CSG-M. The NIM-1R s Style 4/7 connection. In the event of an NIM-1R communication failure, each MXL-IQ System continues to operate as a stand-alone .

Figure 20 NIM-1R Network Interface Module

The NIM-1R can also be configured as an RS-232 or RS-485 two-wire interface to foreign systems. This operation is called FSI (Foreign System Interface). The FSI responds to a protocol and gathers information about the MXL-IQ status. The interface s both single MXL-IQ Systems and networked systems. Typical use of this interface is between the MXL-IQ and building management systems.

1-11

Description The intelligent/analog devices described below are available for use with the MXL-IQ Control (SMB-2). The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model names specified below.

INTELLIGENT/ ANALOG DEVICES

FP-11 Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector The FP-11 is an intelligent/analog photoelectric detector that can be used as an area or duct detector [FP-11(d)]. It uses either a DB-11 low profile mounting base or DB-3S mounting base with the DB-ADPT adapter, a DB-X11RS mounting base with relay or DB-X3RS mounting base with relay with the DB-ADPT adapter, an ADBI-60 audible base with the DB-ADPT adapter, or an AD-11P or AD-11XPR air duct housing. The FP-11 requires MXL-IQ Rev. 6.0 or higher firmware.

FPT-11 Intelligent Thermal Detector The FPT-11 is an intelligent/analog ratecompensated/fixed-temperature type thermal and photoelectric detector. It can only be used as an area detector. It uses either a DB-11 low profile mounting base or DB-3S mounting base with the DB-ADPT adapter, a DB-X11RS mounting base with relay or DB-X3RS mounting base with relay with the DB-ADPT adapter, or an ADBI-60 audible base with the DB-ADPT adapter. The FPT-11 requires MXL-IQ Rev. 6.0 or higher firmware.

I Intelligent Control Point The I is an intelligent control point that can be used as an independent, remotely located notification appliance circuit (NAC). It communicates through the analog loop of the MXL-IQ System.

I-B6 Intelligent Control Point The I-B6 is an intelligent control point that can be used as an independent, remotely located notification appliance circuit (NAC). It communicates through the analog loop of the MXL-IQ System.

ID-60P Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector The ID-60P is an intelligent/analog photoelectric detector that can be used as an area or

1-12

duct detector [ID-6OP(d)]. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, an AD-3P duct housing, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ID-60PT Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector with Heat Sensor The ID-60PT is an intelligent/analog ratecompensated/fixed-temperature type thermal and photoelectric detector. It can only be used as an area detector. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ID-60I Intelligent/Analog Ionization Detector The ID-60I is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ID-60IH Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Altitude Detector The ID-60IH is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ID-60IA Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Air-Velocity Detector The ID-60IA is an intelligent/analog ionization high air-velocity detector for use in open areas, computer facilities, and air ducts at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ID-60IAH Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Air-Velocity, High Altitude Detector The ID-60IAH is an intelligent/analog ionization high air-velocity, high altitude detector for use in open areas, computer facilities, and air ducts at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

Description

ID-60IB Intelligent/Analog Ionization Air-Duct Detector

ILI-1B Intelligent/Analog Ionization AirDuct Detector

The ID-60IB is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in air duct applications at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either the AD-3I housing or the AD-3XRI housing.

The ILI-1B is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in air duct applications at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either the AD-3I housing or the AD-3XRI housing.

ID-60IBH Intelligent/Analog Ionization Air-Duct High Altitude Detector

ILI-1BH Intelligent/Analog Ionization Air-Duct High Altitude Detector

The ID-60IBH is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in air duct applications at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either the AD-3I housing or the AD-3XRI housing.

The ILI-1BH is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in air duct applications at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either the AD-3I housing or the AD-3XRI housing.

ILI-1 Intelligent/Analog Ionization Detector

ILP-1 Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector

The ILI-1 is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

The ILP-1 is an intelligent/analog photoelectric detector that can be used as an area or duct detector [ILP-1(d)]. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, an AD-3ILP or AD-3XRILP duct housing, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ILI-1H Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Altitude Detector The ILI-1H is an intelligent/analog ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ILI-1A Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Air-Velocity Detector The ILI-1A is an intelligent/analog ionization high air-velocity detector for use in open areas, computer facilities, and air ducts at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ILI-1AH Intelligent/Analog Ionization High Air-Velocity, High Altitude Detector The ILI-1AH is an intelligent/analog ionization high air-velocity, high altitude detector for use in open areas, computer facilities, and air ducts at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ILPT-1 Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector with Heat Sensor The ILPT-1 is an intelligent/analog ratecompensated/fixed-temperature type thermal and photoelectric detector. It can only be used as an area detector. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

ILP-2 Intelligent/Analog Photoelectric Detector The ILP-2 is an intelligent/analog photoelectric detector that can be used as an area or duct detector [ILP-2(d)]. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, an AD-3ILP or AD-3XRILP duct housing, or an ADBI-60 audible base. The ILP-2 requires MXL-IQ Rev. 3.0 or higher firmware.

ILT-1 Intelligent Thermal Detector The ILT-1 is an intelligent rate-compensated/fixed-temperature type thermal detector. It uses either a DB-3S low profile mounting base, a DB-X3RS mounting base with relay, or an ADBI-60 audible base.

1-13

Description

LIM-1 Loop Isolator Module The LIM-1 is a loop isolator module that isolates short circuits on MXL-IQ analog loops. The LIM-1 operates in both Class A and Class B circuits.

MSI-10/20 Intelligent Manual Station The MSI-10/20 is an intelligent manual station designed to interface with an analog loop. The MSI can be flush mounted or surface mounted using the SB-5R mounting box.

MSI-10B/20B Intelligent Manual Station The MSI-10B/20B is an intelligent manual station designed to interface with an analog loop. The MSI-10B/20B can be flush mounted or surface mounted using the SB-5R mounting box.

MSI-B6F Intelligent Manual Station The MSI-B6F is an intelligent manual station designed to interface with an analog loop. The MSI-B6F is a single-action station; when used with the MS-FD adapter, the MSI-B6F is a double-action station. The MSI-B6F can be flush mounted or surface mounted using the MS-FB backbox.

MSI-MB6 Intelligent Manual Station The MSI-MB6 is an intelligent manual station designed to interface with an analog loop. The MSI-MB6 is a single-action station; when used with the MS-DA plate, the MSI-MB6 is a double-action station. The MSI-MB6 can be flush mounted or surface mounted using the MS-SB backbox.

MS-MI Intelligent Manual Station The MS-MI is an intelligent manual station designed to interface with an analog loop. The MS-MI is a single-action station; when used with the MS-DA plate, the MS-MI is a double-action station. The MS-MI can be flush mounted or surface mounted using the MS-SB backbox.

1-14

TRI-60, TRI-60R, and TRI-60D Intelligent Interface Modules The TRI-60 series modules are intelligent interface modules that interface direct shorting devices with the analog loops. The TRI-60 is a single-input module; the TRI-60R is a single-input module with an independently controllable Form C relay; the TRI-60D is a dual-input module.

TRI-B6, TRI-B6R, and TRI-B6D Intelligent Interface Modules The TRI-B6 series modules are intelligent interface modules that interface direct shorting devices with the analog loops. The TRI-B6 is a single-input module; the TRI-B6R is a single-input module with an independently controllable Form C relay; the TRI-B6D is a dual-input module.

TRI-B6M Addressable Interface Module The TRI-B6M addressable interface module interfaces direct shorting devices with the analog loops. The TRI-B6M can monitor a normally open or closed dry and it can report the status of the

TRI-S, TRI-R, and TRI-D Intelligent Interface Modules The TRI-S/R/D series modules are intelligent interface modules that interface direct shorting devices with the analog loops. The TRI-S is a single-input module; the TRI-R is a single-input module with an independently controllable Form C relay; the TRI-D is a dual-input module.

CZM-1B6 Remote Conventional Zone Module The CZM-1B6 Remote Conventional Zone Module s one zone of non-addressable initiating devices in either Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) configuration, for a maximum of 15 compatible 2-wire smoke detectors and an unlimited number of shorting devices.

Description The conventional devices described below are available for use with the MXL-IQ Control . The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model numbers.

DI-3 Ionization Detector The DI-3 is an ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It uses the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base.

DI-3H Ionization High Altitude Detector The DI-3H is an ionization detector for use in open areas at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It uses the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base.

DI-A3 Ionization High Air-Velocity Detector The DI-A3 is an ionization high air velocity detector for use in open areas, computer facilities, and air ducts at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet and at air velocities of 0 to 1200 feet per minute. It uses the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base.

DI-A3H Ionization High Air-Velocity, High Altitude Detector The DI-A3H is an ionization high air velocity, high altitude detector for use in air ducts only at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet and at air velocities of 300 to 1200 feet per minute. It uses the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base.

DI-B3 Ionization Air Duct Detector The DI-B3 is an ionization detector for use only in air ducts at altitudes of 0 to 4000 feet. It must be used with a Series 3 air duct housing (AD-3I or AD-3RI).

DI-B3H Ionization Air Duct High Altitude Detector The DI-B3H is an ionization detector for use only in air ducts at altitudes of 3000 to 8000 feet. It must be used with a Series 3 air duct housing (AD-3I or AD-3RI).

DT-11 Thermal Detector The DT-11 is a thermal detector for use in open areas. It uses the DB-11 low profile surface mounting base or the DB-3S mounting base with the DB-ADPT adapter.

PE-3 Photoelectric Detector The PE-3 is a photoelectric detector that responds to a wide range of both flaming and smoldering fire conditions. It uses either the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base or the AD-3ILP or AD-3XRILP air duct housing.

CONVENTIONAL DEVICES

PE-3T Photoelectric Detector with Heat Sensor The PE-3T is a photoelectric detector with heat sensor that responds to a wide range of both flaming and smoldering fire conditions. It uses the DB-3S low profile surface mounting base.

PE-11 Photoelectric Detector The PE-11 is a photoelectric detector that responds to a wide range of both flaming and smoldering fire conditions. It uses the DB-11 low profile surface mounting base, the DB-3S mounting base with the DB-ADPT adapter, or the AD-11P/11PR air duct housing.

PE-11T Photoelectric Detector with Heat Sensor The PE-11T is a photoelectric detector with heat sensor that responds to a wide range of both flaming and smoldering fire conditions. It uses the DB-11 low profile surface mounting base or the DB-3S mounting base with the DB-ADPT adapter.

PBA-1191 Linear Beam Smoke Detector The PBA-1191 can detect light or dark smoke buildup at distances between the transmitter (X) and receiver (R) of 17 feet to 280 feet. The PBA-1191 can be used in a variety of areas, including large, narrow, or high rooms, and rooms with high air turbulence. The PBA-1191 requires the PBB-1191 base. NOTE: Only one PBA-1191, and no additional devices, can be connected to a CZM-4 initiating zone.

1-15

Description

1-16

+D=FJAH

2

Installation Remove all system power before installation, first battery and then AC.

General Guidelines For Installing The MXL-IQ

This section provides general installation instructions for mounting, wiring, and checkout of the CERBERUS PYROTRONICSTM MXL-IQ Control System.

NOTE:

Read this section before installing the equipment to ensure proper installation. If you are not familiar with the MXL-IQ, also read the first section of the manual. Be sure to ask Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Technical or an authorized Representative if you have any questions. Install and use the MXL-IQ System in accordance with the appropriate Local, NFPA, and NEC Code requirements.

INTRODUCTION

Always remove power (battery and AC) and wait at least 10 seconds to allow the supply voltages to decay before installing or removing any module, cable, or wiring. If available, use a printer during the installation procedure as a debugging tool.

Follow Steps 1 through 13 for installation. Each step is thoroughly explained in the following pages. 1. Install the enclosure (page 2-2). 2. Install the TSW-2 Tamper Switch where required (page 2-2). 3. Pull the field wiring into the backbox and dress it to approximately where it will go (page 2-3). 4. Install the SMB-2 (page 2-3). 5. Install the MPS-6 (page 2-3). 6. Install the MKB-4 (page 2-4).

WARNING! Refer to the last page of the manual for a Warning Note required by the FCC for all commercial Class A computing equipment producing a clock frequency of 10K Hz or greater.

7. Install the PIM-1, PIM-2, and PAL-1 (If applicable) (page 2-5). 8. Install the MOM-2 or MOM-4 card (page 2-6). 9. Install the MOI-7, MOD-16, and MID-16 (If applicable) (page 2-9). 10. Install Field Wiring (page 2-10). 11. Check Field Wiring (page 2-10). 12. Start-up Procedure (page 2-10). 13. System Function Checkout (page 2-16).

2-1

Installation

1. Install the MSE-3L Enclosure The MSE-3L is the enclosure for the MXL-IQ. Consider the following when mounting the backbox:

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE MXL-IQ CONTROL

• Mounting height for visual and manual access to the MKB-4 Keyboard/annunciator • Weight and size of enclosure • Local Mounting codes Fasten the backbox securely to a clean, dry, shock-free, and vibration-free surface. Position the backbox clear of obstructions so that the door opens freely and so that

the indicators and controls are easily accessible. NOTE: When the backbox is mounted semi-flush using the MET-3L kit, be sure that the position of the backbox permits the door to swing fully open. (See MET-3L Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095447.) When deadfront construction is required, use the IQ-DFL (See IQ-DFL Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095446.) When the MSE-3L is used for remote applications, use the IQ-Blank where there is no MKB-4 installed (See IQ-Blank Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095482.) To install the backbox: (Refer to Figure 21) a. Slip the door off the hinges of the box and put it to one side temporarily. b. Remove the knockouts in the backbox where field wiring is required (Refer to MSE-3L Power Limited Wiring Instructions, P/N 315-095445, for location of knockouts). c. Hold the empty enclosure against the wall at a height that provides easy access. d. Mark drill points on the wall in the center of the two slots on the upper rear of the MSE-3L. e. Drill the two holes and screw in the top screws, leaving a small gap between the wall and each top screw. f. Mount the MSE-3L on the 2 bolts and then install the bottom bolts.

Figure 21 Mounting the MSE-3L Enclosure

g. Slip the door back on the hinges of the enclosure.

2. Install The TSW-2 Tamper Switch

(Refer to Figure 22) If your configuration (UL 1076) requires the TSW-2 Tamper Switch, install it now. The TSW-2 mounts into the rectangular slot located in the lower right side of the MKB-4 . 1. Place the cable/connector and the switch terminals through the opening and press firmly into place.

Figure 22 TSW-2 Tamper Switch

2-2

2. Plug the cable on the TSW-2 into P9 on the SMB-2 after installing the SMB-2.

Installation

3. Pull All Field Wiring Into The Backbox Pull all field wiring into the backbox and dress the wiring to the approximate location to which it will go. Refer to the MSE-3L Power Limited Wiring Instructions, P/N 315095445.

4. Install the SMB-2

(Refer to Figure 23) Unpack the SMB-2. Inspect the module, looking for such things as integrated circuits (ICs) not firmly seated in their sockets, bent IC pins, connectors not properly installed, dirt, packing material on the board, etc. The installation kit consists of the following items: Two #6 nuts Four #6 screws Six #6 washers Six #6 lockwashers Two resistors Battery cable with a wire a. Place the SMB-2 over the two studs in the upper right-hand portion of the backbox (See Figure 23).

Figure 23 Installing the SMB-2

b. Secure in place using the hardware provided. Be sure the screws and nuts are tight, as they provide the earth ground connection for the SMB-2

5. Install the MPS-6/12

(See Figure 24) The MXL-IQ is designed to operate from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power source. Use a separate or dedicated circuit-breaker. Wire in accordance with local codes and Article 760 of the NEC, NFPA 70, latest edition. Run the earth ground from a suitable source to the MPS-6/12. Check local requirements. Conduit is not an acceptable conductor. Make sure that the dedicated circuit-breaker for the MXL-IQ is turned off at the mains. Place the mounting bracket for the MPS-6/ 12 over the two studs provided in the enclosure as shown in Figure 24. Secure the MPS-6/12 to the MSE-3L by slipping the flat washers, then the

Figure 24 Installing the MPS-6

2-3

Installation lockwashers, and finally the nuts over the two studs. Tighten them securely. Connect the AC mains to MPS-6/12 as follows: Terminal Black (hot) White (neutral) Green (earth ground)

1 2 3

Install the 14 gauge green ground strap spade lug side to Terminal 3 (green, earth ground) of the MPS-6 or MPS-12. Secure the ring lug side of the ground strap to the nearest available stud in the enclosure. The stud size may vary depending on the actual system modules and enclosure used. Because the stud may be either a #10 thread of ¼" thread, nuts for both have been provided. The ground strap provided is long enough for all applications and the ring lug is good for both #10 and ¼" studs. If possible, install the ring lug under one of the lockwashers and nuts which secure the MPS-6 or MPS-12 itself. Connect the 3-wire cable coming from the MPS-6 to the SMB-2, P1, or connect the 8wire cable coming from the MPS-12 to the SMB-2, P14.250

6. Install the MKB-4 Keyboard/ Annunciator

Remove all system power before installation, first battery and then AC.

Unpack the MKB-4. Inspect the module for such things as integrated circuits (ICs) not firmly seated in their sockets, bent IC pins, connectors not properly installed, dirt, and packing material on the board. NOTE: The MKB-4 is supplied with the keyboard/annunciator mounted to the hinged . Setting the Network Address (See Figure 25) a. Before installing the MKB-4 , set its network address on S1, the switch on the ANN-1 board located on the back of the MKB-4. Use dipswitches SW1 and SW2 on switch S1 to set the network address of the MKB-4. Refer to Table 2 for switch settings. b. The MKB-4 module address is always set within network addresses 248 through 251. c. One supervised MKB-4 must be installed at network address 251. Other supervised MKBs may be at the other addresses.

TABLE 2 SWITCH SETTINGS ON THE ANN-1 ADDRESS SETTINGS FOR: SWITCH

248

249

250

251

S1-SW1

OpenOFF

ClosedON

OpenOFF

ClosedON

S1-SW2

OpenOFF

OpenOFF

ClosedON

ClosedON

S1-SW3

ClosedON

ClosedON

ClosedON

ClosedON

S1-SW4

ClosedON

ClosedON

ClosedON

ClosedON

S1-SW5

See Setting Supervision

NOTE: Switches S1-SW3 and S1-SW4 are for future use. Switch S1-SW5 is used to select suptervision.

Figure 25 Setting S1 on the ANN-1 Board

2-4

Setting Supervision: Use switch S1-SW5 on the ANN-1 to select or deselect supervision. If your ANN-1 has a switch with position 1 indicated on the left-hand side, ignore the printing on the switch. SW1 on S1 is at the extreme righthand side of S1, regardless of any other marking.

Installation NOTE: When you select non-supervision for an annunciator, there must also be one and only one supervised annunciator at the same address. The supervisory mode is independent of the network address. To set for supervision S1-SW5 = Closed (ON) To set for non-supervision S1-SW5 = Open (OFF) Mounting the MKB-4 (Refer to Figure 26) 1. Install three screws in the first group of three tapped holes in the right flange. Leave a 1/8-inch gap between the head of the screw and the flange. Slide the slots of the MKB-4 hinge under the head of the screws and tighten. 2. After the MKB-4 is mounted to the enclosure, connect the cable (P/N 555192238) between P1 on the ANN-1 (on the back of the MKB-4) and P8 on the SMB-2.

Figure 26 Installing the MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator

MSE-3L

CAUTION: Be sure the black tracer wire on the edge of the cable is close to the 1 on position 1 of connector P1 on the ANN-1 and the 1 on position 1 of P8 on the SMB-2.

d Cable supplie with PIM-1 2) 24 92 (P/N 555-1

1

P1

P1 P2 TB1

7. Install the PIM-1, PIM-2, and PAL-1

4

Back of MKB-

PIM-1

ANN-1

To P8 o (Cable n the SMB -2 suppli ed wit h MK

B-4)

PIM-1 1. Install the PIM-1 on the back of the MKB-4 as shown in Figure 27. Position the PIM-1 so the TB1 is on the left side of the board. 2. Mount the PIM-1 module on the raised studs with the hardware provided. 3. Using the cable supplied with the PIM-1, connect PIM-1, P-1 to ANN-1, P1 (See Figure 27). 4. Using the cable supplied with the MKB-4, connect PIM-1, P2 to SMB-2, P8 (See Figure 27).

Figure 27 Installing a PIM-1 on the Back of an MKB-4

2-5

Installation PIM-2/PAL-1 The PIM-2 and printer require a standby power source in the event of a loss of primary input power (AC mains). Refer to Figure 28 for the connection of a UPS to meet this requirement.

5. Set the dipswitches on the back of the PIM-2 to agree with the communications parameters configured in the CSG-M. Refer to Table 4 for the dipswitch definitions.

1. Before installing a PIM-2 in the MXL-IQ system, a PIM-1 must be already installed.

8. Install the MOM-2 or MOM-4

2. Wiring from the PIM-1 to the PIM-2 must be within 25 feet in rigid conduit (Refer to Table 3). TABLE 3 PIM-1 TO PIM-2 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS (Supplied by installer) PIM-1, TB 4 (Rx) 5 (Tx) 7 3 (BUSY) 2 (COMMON)

TO

PIM-2 Inpt Pin No. 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 4, 5 (RTS, CTS) 20 (DTR) 7 (GRD)

Use 18 AWG wire minimum.

3. Figure 29 shows the proper installation of the PIM-2 with the MXL-IQ system. 4. Programming the CSG-M is required when using a PIM-2 and parallel printer. Configure one of the following four printer types on the MKB-4: Supervised PIM-2

80 column color

Supervised PIM-2

132 column color

Supervised PIM-2

80 column

Supervised PIM-2 132 column (for PAL-1 and NFPA 72 Proprietary) NOTES: 1. All wires 14 AWG min, 600V insulation. 2. Wiring to the printer and PIM-2 must be 14 AWG min, 600V insulation in conduit. 3. Use the UPS ICS Lifeline Model 9300057. 4. Standby Power requirements: 120 VAC, 0.6A for 24 hours. 5. Standby Power requirements: 120 VAC, 0.15A for 24 hours.

Figure 28 UPS Wiring Diagram

2-6

If a system requires the MOM-2 or MOM-4 optional card cage (Figures 10 and 11, page 20), now is the time to install it. Unpack the card cage and its attached backplate and inspect it, looking for such things as connectors not properly installed, dirt, and packing material on the board. The MOM-2/4 installation kits include the following items

MOM-2

MOM-4

3 #10 nut s

4 #10 nut s

3 #10 flat washers

4 #10 flat washers

3 #10 lockwashers

4 #10 lockwashers

4 #6 x 7/16 screws

1 8-conductor ribbon cable

2 #6-32 x 5/16 screws

2 2-wire cables

1 8-conductor ribbon cable

4 card guides

2 2-wire cables 2 card guides

Installation TABLE 4 SERIAL INTERFACE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Dipswitch Position (SW1) -Located at rear of PIM-2

BAUD RATE 960 0 480 0 240 0 120 0 30 0

1

2

3

OFF ON OFF ON ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON ON

4

DATA BITS 8 7

5

6

7

8

OFF ON

PARITY Even Odd

OFF ON

PARITY Disable Enable

OFF ON

FLOW CONTROL Hardware Software

OFF ON

PORT TYPE

OFF

NOTE: When setting Switch S1, OFF=UP=OPEN ON=DOWN=CLOSED ANN-1

MKB-4 PIM-1 SEE INSTL. INSTR. P/N 315-091462 TB1

CABLE NOT SUPPLIED (SEE NOTE 1) SUPERVISED

PARALLEL PRINTER (REAR VIEW)

PIM-2 (REAR VIEW) (REFER TO TABLE 4)

120 VAC 60 Hz

CENTRONICS PARALLEL

OUTPUT

CABLE SUPPLIED WITH PIM-2 (SEE NOTE 2) SUPERVISED (REFER TO NOTES 9 AND 10) THE CONNECTION IS NOT SUPERVISED FOR DATA INTEGRITY BETWEEN PIM-2 AND THE PRINTER.

Figure 29 PIM-2 to MXL-IQ Wiring Diagram

PIM-2 POWER TRANSFORMER SUPPLIED WITH PIM-2 (SEE NOTE 3)

INPUT

SW1

PWR

XFMR

INSTALL IN UL LISTED GANGBOX

PIM-2 POWER CABLE MUST BE IN CONDUIT

NOTES: 1. Maximum cable distance from PIM-1 to PIM-2 cable is 25 feet. The two modules must be in the same room. 2. The maximum distance from the PIM-2 to the parallel printer is 6 feet. The two modules must be in the same room. 3. PIM-2 power (PWR) is connected to the 5 VDC, 600mA transformer supplied with the PIM-2. The transformer requires 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5A max. 4. For NFPA 72 Local, Auxiliary, and Remote Station configurations, connect the output of the PIM-2 to any UL listed EDP Centronics parallel printer. 5. The parallel printer must the EPSON FX command set. 6. The PIM-2 input and output connectors are DB-25 female. 7. Pressing RESET on the PIM-2 causes the unit to read the SW1 settings. The status LED is lit when the unit is powered. Do not use the COPY button. 8. For NFPA Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations, use parallel printer Model PAL-1, a UL listed for fire Centronics parallel printer. 9. The parallel printer is supervised for AC, on/ off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the PIM-2. 10. The PIM-2 is supervised for power, connection to the printer, and connection to the PIM-1. 11. After loading paper in the PAL-1 printer, turn off the power and follow the steps below: • While pressing the LOAD PARK button, turn on the power to the PAL-1 printer. Continue pressing the LOAD PARK button for 5 seconds. • Release the LOAD PARK button. • The current setting will print. • When printing is completed, the ON LINE indicator will be lit. If the ON LINE indicator is not lit, press the ON LINE button.

2-7

Installation To mount the MOM-2/4 in an MSE-3L enclosure: 1. Hold the MOM-2/4 so that terminal blocks TB2 and TB4 are on the left. 2. Place the module vertically on the mounting studs near the top left of the enclosure as shown in Figure 23 on page 2-3. 3. Fasten the MOM-2/4 in position with the No. 10 flatwashers, lockwashers, and nuts provided. To install the card guides (See Figures 30 and 31): Install the card guides included in the package using the #6 x 7/16 screws provided. (The MOM-4 is shipped with the

MOM-2

mounting screws for the card guides already installed.) 1. Mount the long screws. 2. Make sure that the locating pin on the guide is seated in the hole on the MOM-2/4. 3. Tighten the screw. Repeat this process for the remaining card guide(s). The MOM-2/4 is now ready to accept the optional modules. If the system does not require the installation of any halfwidth modules, install the two #6 x 5/16 screws in the center holes where the additional card guides would be placed. Plug-in Cards for the MOM-2/4 Determine which optional plug-in modules are used in your CSG-M configuration. Next, decide where they should be installed by checking the following factors: 1. The size of each module. The CSM-4 and CRM-4 each occupy two adjacent slots. 2. How the field wiring will be installed.

Figure 30 Installing the MOM-2 Card Guides

3. The maximum load current permitted for the MOM-2/4 is 6 amps for the MPS-6 or 12 amps for the MPS-12. This current must be derated by the current drawn from SMB TB5 (CZM-1B6 power and NAC #1 and NAC #2). When the system includes an external auxiliary power supply, the maximum load current permitted depends on the application. Refer to Table 5 for the maximum current required by each module under full load conditions. MOM-2/4 Electrical Installation 1. Attach the 8-conductor ribbon cable to P6 on the SMB-2, engaging the locking rib of the cable with the locking tab on P6. 2. Attach the other end of the 8-conductor ribbon cable to P7 on the MOM-2/4, engaging the locking rib of the cable with the locking tab on P7. 3. Connect one end of the 2-wire 24 VDC cable to P3 on the SMB-2, using the locking tab to lock the cable onto P3.

Figure 31 Installing the MOM-4 Card Guides

2-8

Installation 4. Connect the other end of the 2-wire cable into P5 on the MOM-2/4. The 2-wire cable that attaches P5 on the MOM-2/4 with P3 on the SMB-2 feeds 24 VDC full-wave unfiltered DC power to the MOM-2/4. This is the main power used by the optional modules. The 8-conductor ribbon cable supplies 5 VDC and communication between the SMB-2 and the MOM-2/4.

9. Install the MOI-7, MOD-16, and   MID-16 MOI-7 1. Mount the MOI-7.

TABLE 5 MAXIMUM MODULE LOAD CURRENTS ALD-2I CMI-30 0 CRM-4 CSM-4 CZM-4 NIM-1R

90mA (120 devices in alarm) 96mA 75mA (4 relays energized) 34mA (no alarm indicating appliances connected) 720mA (maximum with 4 zones in alarm) 0mA

The following example assumes that no power is drawn from SMB-2 TB5 (CZM-1B6 power and NAC #1, NAC #2).

Example: With 1 CZM-4 + 1 CRM-4 + 1 CSM-4, the total load current = 0.72 + 0.075 + 0.034 = 0.83A The remaining available current = 12.0 (MPS-12) or 6.0 (MPS-6) - 0.83 = 11.83 (MPS-12) or 5.83 (MPS-6).

The MOI-7 mounts on a System 3 rail in two module spaces. Mount the MOI-7 using the four screws provided.

The remaining current may be used for NAC power.

2. Set the network address on S1. Set the address according to Table 16 at the end of this chapter so that it agrees with the address assigned in CSG-M. 3. Use P6 to set the mode for common alarm relay K1. (See Figure 17, page 1-10, for the location of P6.) K1 is a common alarm relay that can be programmed to transfer back to normal when the MXL-IQ is silenced. Use jumper P6 on the MOI-7 to select the desired mode according to the table below. P6 Position

Mode

A

Alarm Relay Silenceable

B

Alarm Relay Non-silenceable

3. If a connection to a MOD-16 module on another rail is required, use the optional cable P/N 555-190941. MID-16 (See Figure 19, page 1-11) 1. Mount the MID-16 in one System 3 type module space using the four screws provided. 2. Connect the MID-16 to the module to its left with the 10-position ribbon cable P/N 555-190940 provided. This module may be either an MOI-7, MOD-16, or MID-16. 3. If a connection to a module on another rail is required, use the optional cable P/N 555-190941.

MOD-16 (See Figure 18, page 1-10) 1. Mount the MOD-16 in one System 3 type module space using the four screws provided. 2. Connect the MOD-16 to the MOI-7 with the 10-position ribbon cable P/N 555190940 provided with the MOI-7.

2-9

Installation

10. Install Field Wiring

TABLE 6 WIRING TO THE SMB-2 Screw Terminal

Application

TB5 12-9 TB5 8-5 TB5 4-1

CZM-1B6 Power Notification Appliance Circuit 2 Notification Appliance Circuit 1

TB4 TB4

6-4 3-1

Trouble Relay Alarm Relay

TB3 TB2

4-1 4-1

Analog Loop 2 Analog Loop 1

TB1 TB1 TB1

1-2 3 4-5

MXL-IQ Network for MOI-7 and RCC-1/1F Do Not Use MPS-6/12 and MOM-2/4

NOTE: See SMB-2 Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals.

Wiring to the SMB-2 Refer to Table 6. Dress the field wiring that will be going to the SMB-2. Strip the insulation from the wiring, but do not connect the wires to the screw terminals. Wiring to the MOM-2/4 Optional Modules (if Required) Refer to Table 7. Dress the field wiring that will be going to the MOM-2/4 modules. Strip the insulation from the wiring and connect the wires to the appropriate screw terminals.

11. Check Field Wiring TABLE 7 WIRING TO THE MOM-2/4 OPTIONAL MODULES Module CSM-4

Screw Terminal 1-4 9-12

Application Notification Appliance Circuit 1 Notification Appliance Circuit 2

NOTE: See CSM-4 Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals.

CRM-4

1-3 4-6 11-13 14-16

Dry 1 Dry 2 Dry 3 Dry 4

NOTE: See CRM-4 Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals.

CZM-4

1-4 5-8 9-12 13-16

Conventional Conventional Conventional Conventional

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

NOTE: See CZM-4 Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals. CMI-30 0

1-4

CXL Modem Connection

NOTE: See CMI-30 0 Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals. NIM-1R

1-2 3-4 12-16

XNET Network Pair A / FSI / AnaLASER XNET Network Pair B NCC XNET Interface

NOTE: See NIM-1R Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals. ALD-2I

1-4 5-8

Initiating Devices Install all initiating device bases and end-ofline devices where applicable. Install all initiating devices. Refer to the specific installation instructions provided with each device. Notification Appliances Install all notification appliances (bells, strobes, etc.) Refer to the specific installation instructions provided with each device. Check Resistance Between Wiring Circuits Start with the wire that goes to TB5-12 on the SMB-2. Check the resistance between that wire and all other field wires that will be connected to the SMB-2. Also, check the resistance between that wire and all wires connected to the screw terminals on the MOM-2/4. Refer to Table 8 for acceptable resistance readings. If the readings are good, connect the wire to TB5-12. Repeat the above procedure for the next wire on the SMB-2. When the SMB-2 is complete, continue with the MOM-2/4 (if it is installed).

Analog Loop 1 Analog Loop 2

NOTE: See ALD-2I Connections and Ratings for a more detailed description of the screw terminals.

12. Start Up Procedure NOTE: Throughout this section, refer to the TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE as an aid to resolving trouble conditions.

2-10

Installation 1. System Status When beginning the start-up procedure, the condition of the system is as follows: • All field wiring is connected to all screw terminals, except for the analog loops— they should be disconnected. All field devices are installed.

TABLE 8 FIELD WIRING CHECKOUT SMB-2 EXTERNAL WIRING AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE TB-5

Resistance Between Wires

1.

Chassis to 1-12

2.

Desired Results

Probable Cause Of Problem

>1 Meg

Short in wiring.

11 to 12

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

3.

9 to 10

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

4.

7 to 8

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

5.

5 to 6

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

6.

3 to 4

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

7.

1 to 2

<1.5 ohms

Line open; Line too long.

8.

9 to 12

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

9.

5 to 8

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

3. SMB-2 Checkout Minus the Analog Loops Turn on the AC power to the system.

10.

1 to 4

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

11.

9-12 to 1-8

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

• The power light on the MKB-4 turns on

12.

5-8 to 1-4

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

• No modules are installed in the MOM-2/4 cage. 2. Create a Test Configuration Create a test configuration on your CSG-M that includes every module that will be on your final system. Do not include any initiating devices. You will use this test configuration in checking out the System.

• the System displays the default message: 13.

8 (+) to 5 (-)

2.2K± 10%

Line shorted; Line open; Wrong EOL device; No EOL device; Device wired backward; Device not polarized.

14.

4(+) to 1 (-)

2.2K ± 10%

Line shorted; Line open; Wrong EOL device; No EOL device; Device wired backward; Device not polarized.

15.

>1 Meg >1 Meg >1 Meg

Line shorted.

After the transfer process is complete, MXL-IQ resets itself; after 5 minutes, the state of the system should be as follows:

12 to 1-8 12 to TB2/3 1-4 12 to all MOM-2/4

16.

>1 Meg >1 Meg >1 Meg

Line shorted.

• No trouble condition for the signaling circuits on the main board.

8 to 1-4 8 to TB2/3 1-4 8 to all MOM-2/4

17.

4 to TB2/3 1-4 4 to all MOM-2/4

>1 Meg >1 Meg

Line shorted.

TB-2 and TB-3

Resistance Between Wires

1.

Chassis to all terminals

2.

CERBERUS PYROTRONICS MXL

Transfer the test configuration from your computer to the MXL-IQ. Refer to the CSGM Manual (P/N 315-090381) for the correct procedure.

• A battery trouble condition if the battery option was selected. • All optional modules configured on the system are in trouble since they are not yet installed. 4. SMB-2 Analog Loop Checkout Modify your test configuration by adding to it the analog devices that are connected to analog loop 1. • Turn off the power and connect the field wiring to analog loop 1 on the SMB-2. • Turn on the power. Wait for the System to initialize (approximately 3 minutes).

Desired Results

Probable Cause Of Problem

>1 Meg

Short in wiring.

1 to 2

<50 ohms

Open in wiring; Line too long.

3.

3 to 4

<50 ohms

Open in wiring; Line too long.

4.

1 to 4

<.4µF

Too much wire.

5.

1 (+) to 4 (-)

>10K ohms

Line shorted.

6.

TB-2 (1-4) TB-3 (1-4)

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

7.

TB-2 (1-4) TB-5 (1-12)

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

8.

TB-3 (1-4) TB-5 (1-12)

>1 Meg

Line shorted.

(+) and (-) indicate meter lead polarity. > = greater than; < = less than

2-11

Installation • Check the trouble list on the MKB for troubles on the devices that were just added. The troubles will be from among the following (See Appendix J for a complete list of Trouble Messages): Device multiple response Input device not responding Incorrect device ID Unspecified device responding • Identify the addresses of the devices with troubles and eliminate them, reset the system, and that the troubles have cleared before proceeding. Modify your test configuration by adding to it the analog devices that are connected to analog loop 2.

To install the card guide that comes with the CRM-4 and the CSM-4 module: a Loosen the appropriate screw in the center of the MOM-2/4 and set the card guide in place. Make sure that the locating pin on the bottom of the card guide is in the hole on the MOM-2/4. b. Tighten the screw on the MOM-2/4 to secure the card guide.

• Turn off the power and connect the field wiring to analog loop 2 on the SMB-2.

6. ALD-2I Checkout

• Turn on the power. Wait for the System to initialize (approximately 3 minutes).

Installing the ALD-2I

• Check the trouble list on the MKB for troubles on the devices that were just added. The troubles will be from among the following (See Appendix J for a complete list of Trouble Messages):

Set the address of each ALD-2I. Refer to the CSG-M printout of the final configuration for the address to which each ALD-2I should be set. Refer to the ALD-2I Installation Instructions (P/N 315-091464) to set the address dipswitch.

Device multiple response Input device not responding Incorrect device ID Unspecified device responding • Identify the addresses of the devices with troubles and eliminate them, reset the system, and that the troubles have cleared.

5. MOM-2/4 Optional Modules Checkout

Remove all system power before installing any optional module (ALD-2I, CMI-300, CRM-4, CSM-4, CZM-4, NIM-1R).

2-12

Unpack each module just before installation. Inspect the module, looking for such things as integrated circuits (ICs) not firmly seated in their sockets, bent IC pins, connectors not properly installed, dirt, and packing material on the board.

Install the ALD-2Is one at a time by inserting them in the appropriate card guides on the MOM-2/4. Make sure that the card is firmly seated in the card edge connector. Eliminate all troubles from each module before installing the next one. Modify your test configuration by adding to it any initiating devices that are connected to the first analog loop on the ALD-2I. Turn off the power; connect the field wiring to analog loop 1 on the ALD-2I. Turn on the power. • Turn off the power and connect the field wiring to analog loop 1 on the SMB-2. • Turn on the power. Wait for the System to initialize (approximately 3 minutes). • Check the trouble list on the MKB for troubles on the devices that were just added. The troubles will be from among

Installation • Check the trouble list on the MKB for troubles on the devices that were just added. The troubles will be from among the following (See Appendix J for a complete list of Trouble Messages):

the following (See Appendix J for a complete list of Trouble Messages): Device multiple response Input device not responding Incorrect device ID

Device multiple response

Unspecified device responding

Input device not responding Incorrect device ID

• Identify the addresses of the devices with troubles and eliminate them, reset the system, and that the troubles have cleared before proceeding.

Unspecified device responding • Identify the addresses of the devices with troubles and eliminate them, reset the system, and that the troubles have cleared before proceeding.

Modify your test configuration by adding to it any initiating devices that are connected to the second analog loop on the ALD-2I. Turn off the power; connect the field wiring to analog loop 2 on the ALD-2I. Turn on the power. • Turn off the power and connect the field wiring to analog loop 1 on the SMB-2. • Turn on the power. Wait for the System to initialize (approximately 3 minutes).

Installing the CMI-300 Interface Module Before installing the CMI-300 in the MOM-2/4, you must do the following: 1. Check that there is a jumper installed for jumper J2, pins 1 and 2 on the CMI-300 module.

TABLE 9 Number Programming (SW2) ADDR

87654321

ADDR

000 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 010 011 012 013 014 015 ---

FSI SOOOOOOX SOOOOOXO SOOOOOXX SOOOOXOO SOOOOXOX SOOOOXXO SOOOOXXX SOOOXOOO SOOOXOOX SOOOXOXO SOOOXOXX SOOOXXOO SOOOXXOX SOOOXXXO SOOOXXXX ------------

016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 ---

87654321 SOOXOOOO SOOXOOOX SOOXOOXO SOOXOOXX SOOXOXOO SOOXOXOX SOOXOXXO SOOXOXXX SOOXXOOO SOOXXOOX SOOXXOXO SOOXXOXX SOOXXXOO SOOXXXOX SOOXXXXO SOOXXXXX ------------

ADDR

87654321

ADDR

87654321

032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 ---

SOXOOOOO SOXOOOOX SOXOOOXO SOXOOOXX SOXOOXOO SOXOOXOX SOXOOXXO SOXOOXXX SOXOXOOO SOXOXOOX SOXOXOXO SOXOXOXX SOXOXXOO SOXOXXOX SOXOXXXO SOXOXXXX ------------

048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064

SOXXOOOO SOXXOOOX SOXXOOXO SOXXOOXX SOXXOXOO SOXXOXOX SOXXOXXO SOXXOXXX SOXXXOOO SOXXXOOX SOXXXOXO SOXXXOXX SOXXXXOO SOXXXXOX SOXXXXXO SOXXXXXX SXOOOOOO

S = Closed selects Style 7 S = Open selects Style 4

O = Open or OFF X = Closed or ON

NOTE: To open a dipswitch, press down on the side of the dipswitch marked OPEN. To close a dipswitch, press down on the side of the dipswitch opposite the side marked OPEN. To open a slide switch, push the slide to the side opposite the side marked ON. To close a slide switch, push the slide to the side marked ON.

2-13

Installation 2. Set the CMI-300 network address by using the dipswitch settings on switch SW1. Use Table 16 at the end of this chapter to set the network address. Plug the CMI-300 module in the MOM-2/4 card cage and connect the wiring as shown in CMI-300 Connections and Ratings. Eliminate all troubles from each module prior to installing the next one. Installing CRM-4 and CZM-4 Modules Set the address of each module. Refer to the CSG-M printout of the final configuration for each module address setting. Refer to the installation instructions for each module to set the address dipswitch. Install the optional modules one at a time by inserting them in the appropriate card guides on the MOM-2/4. Eliminate all troubles from each module prior to installing the next one. Installing the NIM-1R Network Interface Module The NIM-1R installs into the MOM-2/4 card cage where it occupies one full width slot. The wiring is connected to TB4 of the MOM-2 or TB3 of the MOM-4. The NIM-1R has two configuration dipswitches. Set the dipswitches before installing the NIM-1R into the MOM-2/4. Use switch SW1 to set the MXL-IQ network address. Set this switch according to the address where the NIM-1R is installed in the MXL-IQ’s network map. Refer to the CSG-M configuration printout for the address of the module. See Table 16 at the end of this chapter for settings. Use switch SW2 to set either the number for networked systems or to select FSI or AnaLASER operation. Refer to Table 9 for settings, Table 10 for FSI settings, or Table 11 for AnaLASER settings. 1. When installing the NIM-1R in a networked system, set the number to agree with the number for the NIM-1R assigned to the MXL-IQ System in CSG-M. 2. Switch position 8 selects Style 4 or 7 operation for the NIM-1R network.

2-14

3. When installing the NIM-1R for FSI operation, set the switch to all open (or OFF). TABLE 10 FSI Programming ADDR

87654321

000

OOOOOOOO O = Open or OFF

4. When installing the NIM-1R for AnaLASER connection, set the switch as follows: TABLE 11 AnaLASER Programming ADDR

87654321

AnaL ASER

XOOOOOOO

O = Open or OF F X = Closed or ON

After setting the switches, install the NIM-1R into the MOM-2/4 card cage. Make sure that the module is in the card guides and the card edge is firmly seated in the connectors on the MOM-2/4.

Installing the CSM-4 Signal Module Before installing the CSM-4 in the MOM-2/4, you must set the network address, configure each circuit according to the CSG-M program [as Local (NACs), Municipal Tie, Leased Line, or Releasing Service], and set the default modes (trouble and alarm) as follows. Refer to Table 12 for the Modes of Operation. a. Set the Network Address The network address is set on dipswitch S1 (See Figure 12, page 1-8). See the CSG-M printout for the proper address. Use Table 16 at the end of this chapter to set the switches.

Installation

TABLE 12 Modes of Operation

b. Set the Mode of Operation for Each Circuit The CSM-4 has one programming slide switch and one jumper for each of its two circuits. (See slide switches S3 and S4 and jumpers G1 and G2 on the CSM-4 board, Figure 12, page 1-8.) Setting these slide switches and jumpers allows the selection of four possible modes of operation. These modes correspond with NFPA standards 72 Local, Municipal Tie, Leased Line, and NFPA 12A, 13, and 2001 Releasing Service. Each circuit on the CSM-4 can be set independently for the type of operation desired. Table 12 shows how to set the switches and jumpers for circuits 1 and 2. The CSG-M printout shows the mode for each circuit.

c. Set the Degrade Modes of Operation There are two sources of degrade activation, the degrade alarm bus and the degrade trouble bus. These two buses become active ONLY when the MXL-IQ communication network fails. Dipswitch S2 on the CSM-4 sets the degrade mode of operation for each circuit.

TABLE 13 Setting the Mode of Operation for the CSM-4 (Using S3, S4 and G1, G2) For Circuit 1 Local (NAC) Municipal Tie Leased Li ne Rel eas i ng Ser v i c e Illegal (Results in a trouble on t he CSM - 4) For Circuit 2 Local (NAC) Municipal Tie Leased Li ne Rel eas i ng Ser v i c e Illegal (Results in a trouble on t he CSM - 4)

S3 Position

G1

1 1 2 1 2

No t C u t Cut No t C u t Cut Cut

S4 Position

G2

1 1 2 1 2

No t C u t Cut No t C u t Cut Cut

Each circuit operates independently in the degrade mode. Dipswitch S2, positions SW1 and SW2, determines the degrade mode of operation when the trouble bus activates. Dipswitch S2, positions SW3SW6, determines the degrade mode of operation when the alarm bus activates.

2-15

Installation d. Degrade Trouble Activation The degrade trouble bus may ONLY be used when the circuit is used as a Leased Line trouble indicating circuit. (See Table 12.) When enabled, this trouble degrade mode ensures that a trouble will be transmitted to the receiving station even when the MXL-IQ communication network fails.

Determine which type of degrade mode you want for each circuit and set dipswitch S2 (SW3-SW6) as shown in Table 15.

Using the CSG-M printout, determine if either of the circuits is configured as a Leased Line trouble. Table 14 shows how to set dipswitch S2 (SW1 and SW2) to enable the degrade trouble activation for the desired circuit.

The status of the MXL-IQ before checkout must be as listed below:

TABLE 14 Setting the Degrade Trouble Modes for the CSM-4 on S2 SW1 G1

For Circuit 1 Leased Line Trouble No Trouble Activation

On (Closed) Off (Open) SW2 G2

For Circuit 2 Leased Line Trouble No Trouble Activation

On (Closed) Off (Open)

No t e : If Circuit 1 or Circuit 2 is not used for Leased Line trouble, switches SW1 or SW2 must be off (open).

e. Degrade Alarm Activation Each circuit on the CSM-4 can be set with dipswitch S2, positions SW3-SW6, to determine when the degrade alarm bus activates (See Table 12). There are three degrade alarm modes. Each circuit can be set independently from the other.

TABLE 15 Setting the Degrade Alarm Modes for the CSM-4 on S2 For Circuit 1 OFF (no degrade activation) CONTINUOUS (active on degrade alam) 1 SEC ON, 1 SEC OFF (infinite repeat) DO NOT USE For Circuit 2 OFF (no degrade activation) CONTINUOUS (active on degrade alam) 1 SEC ON, 1 SEC OFF (infinite repeat) DO NOT USE

SW4

SW3

OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed)

OFF (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

SW4

SW3

OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed)

OFF (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

NOT E : When circuits are used for leased line supervisory, the alarm degrade modes must be OFF (Open).

2-16

13. System Function Checkout

1. AC and battery power connected and turned on. 2. All modules installed and all field wiring connected. 3. All initiating devices installed and addressed. 4. All field wiring checked out. 5. The start-up procedure completed. 6. An CSG-M printout of the summary of the System Configuration available. 7. For documentation purposes, set the MXL-IQ time before proceeding. 8. Transfer the final version of the System Configuration to MXL-IQ. Follow the steps listed in System Operation Checkout.

System Operation Checkout

WARNING! Prior to activating any initiating device, take steps to prevent output circuits from being activated. Failure to do so may result in building EVAC (bells), notification of fire department, elevator recall, etc. Test these operations in accordance with local codes and follow the direction of the authority having jurisdiction. Observe all safety precautions.

Installation

Test 1. Observe the display on the MKB-4.

Response • The POWER LED should be on steady. • The TROUBLE LED should be off. • The following message should appear on the alphanumeric display: (Time and Date) (System Custom Message)

SYSTEM NORMAL

(It may take a few minutes after power-up before the message System Normal appears.)

2. Activate every alarm causing initiating device on the System in groups of 100 or fewer. Reset the System prior to activating each group of 100.

• Every device alarms and there are no troubles annunciated. • Device LEDs should come on when the device is in alarm. • As each device is alarmed, the custom message appears on the display, is recorded on the printer (if installed), and corresponds to the CSG-M printout for that device. • The messages listed on the printer are in the order in which the devices were alarmed. • Pressing the NEXT key on the MKB-4 displays the devices in reverse order. • Check that all appropriate responses are activated.

3. Activate all supervisory devices on the System.

• Each device should cause a supervisory. • As each device changes state, the custom message appears on the display, is recorded on the printer (if installed), and corresponds to the CSG-M printout for that device. • The messages listed on the printer are in the order in which the devices were activated. • Pressing the NEXT key displays the devices in reverse order. • Check that all the appropriate responses are activated.

4. Activate all security devices on the System.

• Each device should cause a security condition. • As each device is activated, the custom message appears on the display, is recorded on the printer (if installed), and corresponds to the CSG-M printout for that device. • Check that all appropriate responses are activated.

2-17

Installation

Test 5. Activate all status devices on the System.

Response • None of the devices should cause an alarm or trouble condition. • If there is a printer, the System should print the status of reporting devices. • As each device is activated, the custom message recorded on the printer corresponds to the CSG-M printout for that device. • Check that all appropriate responses are activated.

6. CRM-4 relays:

• Verifies proper operation of the connected relay.

Refer to Control Output On/Off, page 3-38, and toggle each CRM-4 relay assigned to the System. Reset the System when this test is complete.

7. CSM-4 relays:

• Verifies proper operation of the connected relay.

Refer to Control Output On/Off, page 3-38, and toggle each CSM-4 relay assigned to the System. Reset the System when this test is complete.

8. System Functions: Check all functions that are defined in the customer specifications.

• Check that the correct relationships between initiating devices and output functions occur as defined by the customer specifications. • Check that the appropriate NFPA and local codes are met (Refer to the CSG-M Logical Function Summary.)

2-18

Installation TABLE 16 NETWORK ADDRESS PROGRAMMING ADDR 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063

&%$#"!



ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL OOOOOOXX OOOOOXOO OOOOOXOX OOOOOXXO OOOOOXXX OOOOXOOO OOOOXOOX OOOOXOXO OOOOXOXX OOOOXXOO OOOOXXOX OOOOXXXO OOOOXXXX OOOXOOOO OOOXOOOX OOOXOOXO OOOXOOXX OOOXOXOO OOOXOXOX OOOXOXXO OOOXOXXX OOOXXOOO OOOXXOOX OOOXXOXO OOOXXOXX OOOXXXOO OOOXXXOX OOOXXXXO OOOXXXXX OOXOOOOO OOXOOOOX OOXOOOXO OOXOOOXX OOXOOXOO OOXOOXOX OOXOOXXO OOXOOXXX OOXOXOOO OOXOXOOX OOXOXOXO OOXOXOXX OOXOXXOO OOXOXXOX OOXOXXXO OOXOXXXX OOXXOOOO OOXXOOOX OOXXOOXO OOXXOOXX OOXXOXOO OOXXOXOX OOXXOXXO OOXXOXXX OOXXXOOO OOXXXOOX OOXXXOXO OOXXXOXX OOXXXXOO OOXXXXOX OOXXXXXO OOXXXXXX

&%$#"! ADDR OXOOOOOO 064 OXOOOOOX 065 OXOOOOXO 066 OXOOOOXX 067 OXOOOXOO 068 OXOOOXOX 069 OXOOOXXO 070 OXOOOXXX 071 OXOOXOOO 072 OXOOXOOX 073 OXOOXOXO 074 OXOOXOXX 075 OXOOXXOO 076 OXOOXXOX 077 OXOOXXXO 078 OXOOXXXX 079 OXOXOOOO 080 OXOXOOOX 081 OXOXOOXO 082 OXOXOOXX 083 OXOXOXOO 084 OXOXOXOX 085 OXOXOXXO 086 OXOXOXXX 087 OXOXXOOO 088 OXOXXOOX 089 OXOXXOXO 090 OXOXXOXX 091 OXOXXXOO 092 OXOXXXOX 093 OXOXXXXO 094 OXOXXXXX 095 OXXOOOOO 096 OXXOOOOX 097 OXXOOOXO 098 OXXOOOXX 099 OXXOOXOO 100 OXXOOXOX 101 OXXOOXXO 102 OXXOOXXX 103 OXXOXOOO 104 OXXOXOOX 105 OXXOXOXO 106 OXXOXOXX 107 OXXOXXOO 108 OXXOXXOX 109 OXXOXXXO 110 OXXOXXXX 111 OXXXOOOO 112 OXXXOOOX 113 OXXXOOXO 114 OXXXOOXX 115 OXXXOXOO 116 OXXXOXOX 117 OXXXOXXO 118 OXXXOXXX 119 OXXXXOOO 120 OXXXXOOX 121 OXXXXOXO 122 OXXXXOXX 123 OXXXXXOO 124 OXXXXXOX 125 OXXXXXXO 126 OXXXXXXX 127 O = OPEN (or OFF)

&%$#"! ADDR XOOOOOOO 128 XOOOOOOX 129 XOOOOOXO 130 XOOOOOXX 131 XOOOOXOO 132 XOOOOXOX 133 XOOOOXXO 134 XOOOOXXX 135 XOOOXOOO 136 XOOOXOOX 137 XOOOXOXO 138 XOOOXOXX 139 XOOOXXOO 140 XOOOXXOX 141 XOOOXXXO 142 XOOOXXXX 143 XOOXOOOO 144 XOOXOOOX 145 XOOXOOXO 146 XOOXOOXX 147 XOOXOXOO 148 XOOXOXOX 149 XOOXOXXO 150 XOOXOXXX 151 XOOXXOOO 152 XOOXXOOX 153 XOOXXOXO 154 XOOXXOXX 155 XOOXXXOO 156 XOOXXXOX 157 XOOXXXXO 158 XOOXXXXX 159 XOXOOOOO 160 XOXOOOOX 161 XOXOOOXO 162 XOXOOOXX 163 XOXOOXOO 164 XOXOOXOX 165 XOXOOXXO 166 XOXOOXXX 167 XOXOXOOO 168 XOXOXOOX 169 XOXOXOXO 170 XOXOXOXX 171 XOXOXXOO 172 XOXOXXOX 173 XOXOXXXO 174 XOXOXXXX 175 XOXXOOOO 176 XOXXOOOX 177 XOXXOOXO 178 XOXXOOXX 179 XOXXOXOO 180 XOXXOXOX 181 XOXXOXXO 182 XOXXOXXX 183 XOXXXOOO 184 XOXXXOOX 185 XOXXXOXO 186 XOXXXOXX 187 XOXXXXOO 188 XOXXXXOX 189 XOXXXXXO 190 XOXXXXXX 191 X = CLOSED (or ON)

ADDR 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

&%$#"!



XXOOOOOO XXOOOOOX XXOOOOXO XXOOOOXX XXOOOXOO XXOOOXOX XXOOOXXO XXOOOXXX XXOOXOOO XXOOXOOX XXOOXOXO XXOOXOXX XXOOXXOO XXOOXXOX XXOOXXXO XXOOXXXX XXOXOOOO XXOXOOOX XXOXOOXO XXOXOOXX XXOXOXOO XXOXOXOX XXOXOXXO XXOXOXXX XXOXXOOO XXOXXOOX XXOXXOXO XXOXXOXX XXOXXXOO XXOXXXOX XXOXXXXO XXOXXXXX XXXOOOOO XXXOOOOX XXXOOOXO XXXOOOXX XXXOOXOO XXXOOXOX XXXOOXXO XXXOOXXX XXXOXOOO XXXOXOOX XXXOXOXO XXXOXOXX XXXOXXOO XXXOXXOX XXXOXXXO XXXOXXXX XXXXOOOO XXXXOOOX XXXXOOXO XXXXOOXX XXXXOXOO XXXXOXOX XXXXOXXO XXXXOXXX ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL ILLEGAL

2-19

Installation

2-20

+D=FJAH

3

Operation This section provides instructions for operating the MXL-IQ Control . Please review the introduction to the MXL-IQ Control at the beginning of this manual.

ules and leaving gaps in the numbering, provided you do not use the fixed addresses.

INTRODUCTION

The specific addresses of the System modules are described in Table 17.

NOTE: See the Table of Contents pages at the beginning of this manual for the order of this chapter. Use it to find the answers to specific questions when you are working with the System. TABLE 17 Fixed Module Addresses

Addresses All modules and devices annunciated on the MXL-IQ are identified by an address (MMMDDD). Each address is in two parts—a module address (MMM) and a device address (DDD). The number identifying the module may be as high as 254, and the number identifying the device may be as high as 248. Thus a device on a module may be identified by any number between 001-001 and 253-250. (See Table 17.) Fixed Addresses A module may be assigned to any address on the System, except for some fixed addresses that have already been assigned (See Table 17). The modules communicate to the MXL-IQ Control through a serial communications network. The System continuously supervises all of the modules for presence and proper operation.

Module Address

0 1 2 3 * * * 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

Module

Do not use Analog loop 1 (SMB-2) Analog loop 2 (SMB-2)

MKB-4 MKB-4 MKB-4 MKB-4, No. 1 Reserved SMB-2 Programmer CSG-M Global (reserved)

Device Address (Range)

0 01-060 0 01-060

0 01 to 250

You may assign a module to any address on the System, and assign addresses in any order, mixing different types of mod-

3-1

Operation

System Modules ALD-2I Analog Loop Module The ALD-2I takes two ading module addresses. Loop 1 of the ALD-2I is at any module address and loop 2 at the next address. The analog loops on the SMB-2 are at module addresses 1 and 2 (See Table 17, page 3-1) and cannot be moved. The table below illustrates ALD-2I module addresses: ALD at Module Addresses 3 and 4 Loop 1 Loop 2

Devices 003-001 to 003-060 004-001 to 004-060

ALD at Module Addresses 15 and 16 Devices Loop 1 015-001 to 015-060 Loop 2 016-001 to 016-060 CSM-4 Signal Module The CSM-4 module contains two circuits and two programmable LEDs. Their device addresses on the module are as follows: Circuit 1

001

Circuit 2

002

LED 1

005

LED 2

006

For example, the address of circuit 2 on the CSM-4 at module address 3 is 003-002. CRM-4 Relay Module The CRM-4 Relay module contains four relays and two controllable LEDs. Their device addresses on the module are as follows: Relay 1

001

Relay 2

002

Relay 3

003

Relay 4

004

LED 1

005

LED 2

006

For example, the address of relay 4 on the CRM-4 at module address 20 is 020-004.

3-2

CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module The CZM-4 Conventional Zone module contains four conventional initiating device zones and two programmable LEDs. Their device addresses on the module are as follows: Zone 1

001

Zone 2

002

Zone 3

003

Zone 4

004

LED 1

005

LED 2

006

For example, the address of zone 1 on the CZM-4, at module address 105, is 105-001. MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator The MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator occupies the fixed module address 251 (See Table 17, page 3-1). SMB-2 Main Board The SMB-2 occupies module addresses 1, 2, and 253. The module addresses 1 and 2 are analog loops. Module address 253 contains two notification appliance circuits (NACs) and two relays. The device addresses at module 253 are as follows: Common alarm relay Common trouble relay NAC 1 NAC 2

001 002 004 005

For example, the address of the common alarm relay at module address 253 is 253-001.

Remote System Modules MOI-7 Voice and Annunciator Driver The MOI-7 occupies one network address and one network node in the MXL-IQ System. Set the address on S1 (See Figure 17, page 1-10) according to Table 16, page 2-19, so that it agrees with the address assigned in CSG-M. The MOI-7 has a set of 128 subaddresses reserved for the MOD-16 open collector

Operation outputs and MID-16 general purpose inputs. This gives a maximum of 8 MOD-16 boards and 8 MID-16 boards. The MOI-7 subaddress map is as follows. 001-016 MOD-16/MID-16 #1 017-032 MOD-16/MID-16 #2 033-048 MOD-16/MID-16 #3 049-064 MOD-16/MID-16 #4 065-080 MOD-16/MID-16 #5 081-096 MOD-16/MID-16 #6 097-112 MOD-16/MID-16 #7 113-128 MOD-16/MID-16 #8 The MOI-7 has two status LEDs: The TRANSMIT LED indicates that the MOI-7 is sending information to the SMB-2. During normal operation this LED flashes periodically when the SMB-2 requests the MOI-7’s status. The TROUBLE LED only lights when the MOI-7 cannot communicate with the MXL-IQ. This is an indication that the network connection between the MOI-7 and SMB-2 is damaged. MOD-16 (Open Collector Output Module) The MOD-16 does not occupy a network address. The MOD-16 is at a subaddress of the MOI-7 to which it is connected. The subaddresses of any given MOD-16s are determined by their position in the string of MOD-16s. The output cable from the MOI-7 connects to the first MOD-16, which has the subaddress of 001-016 as shown above. Each additional MOD-16 in the chain has the next block of 16 addresses. You may connect a maximum of 8 MOD-16s and MID-16s to an individual MOI-7 for a total of 128 open collector outputs and 128 general purpose inputs.

Using The MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator in Local Mode

See Figure 32, page 3-4, for the location of the display keys and LEDs. When the MKB-4 Keyboard/ Annunciator is installed, only the display, LEDs, and display control keys are visible. The ACKnowledge keys and other controls are hidden behind a locked door. Unlock and open the door to gain access to those keys and controls.

The Display The display has two lines of 40 characters each. What is shown on the display depends on the state of the System. The display contains a back light which turns on automatically when any key is pressed or an event is reported. The back light turns off automatically after 5 minutes of system inactivity. The System has several displays. When the System is Normal, the display shows: [time/date] [system message]

SYSTEM NORMAL

When an event has been annunciated, the System alternates between the following three displays: [address] [custom message] [ACK STATUS or BLANK] [event number] [device type] [trouble type] [IN or 0UT]

[address] [type of device in trouble] or [BLANK] [ACK STATUS or BLANK] [event number] [time/date] [IN or 0UT] ALARMS=nnn TROUBLES=nnn

SUPERVISORIES=nnn SECURITIES=nnn

3-3

Operation The used in the displays described above are defined as follows: • ACK appears if the event has been acknowledged; otherwise, the field is blank. • IN is displayed when a condition occurs. • OUT is displayed when a normal state is restored.

• [time/date] shows the time and date the event occurred.

Internal Audible Alarm The internal audible alarm (not visible) sounds steadily when there is an unacknowledged fire alarm. It pulses if all alarms are acknowledged, but there is at least one supervisory, trouble, or security condition.

Q The Display

A 2-line display of 40 characters each that shows the state of the System. A back light turns on when any key is pressed or an event is reported.

Figure 32 MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator

3-4

R System Control Keypad

ALARM ACK - Press to acknowledge a fire alarm. AUD SIL - Press to silence or unsilence a notification appliance circuit. SUPV ACK - Press to acknowledge a supervisory. TRBL ACK - Press to acknowledge a trouble. SEC ACK - Press to acknowledge a security condition. RESET - Press to reset the System.

S Numeric Keypad

Use the numeric keypad (keys 0 through 9) when the System asks for a model number, device number, , time, date, or other information. The display shows each number as you press the key (except when you enter a ; the System shows an asterisk for each digit of the that you type).

T

Command Keypad Left arrow (|) - Press to select the item to the left of what is flashing on the display (unless entering a number). Right arrow (}) - Press to select the item to the right of what is flashing on the display (unless entering a number). Up arrow (~) - Press to go back to the previous item. ENTER - Press to select the item on which the cursor is flashing. When typing in numbers, press ENTER when finished to complete the entry. PRINT - Press to print selected lists and reports. FORM FEED - Press to advance the paper in the printer. CLEAR - Press to cancel printing begun by pressing PRINT. The System will print: This listing prematurely terminated.

HELP - Press to display a one-line help message.

U The Special (ALT and Function) Keypad

Use the four function keys alone or in combination with ALT1 or ALT2 to provide a total of 12 special functions. When using a combination, hold the ALT key down and then press the function key. F1 F2 F3 F4 ALT1-F1 ALT1-F2 ALT1-F3 ALT1-F4 Hold ALT, then press ALT2-F1 function key. ALT2-F2 ALT2-F3 ALT2-F4 The special function keys are defined using the CSG-M Custom Software Generator (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381). These definitions can be recorded in the box on the .

V Display Keys

Operation

The MXL-IQ has two display keys, NEXT and HOLD, located on the MKB-4. NEXT - Press NEXT to show the previous item in a list of Alarms, Supervisories, Troubles, or Security conditions. HOLD - Press HOLD at any time to freeze the present display. The display remains frozen until HOLD is released.

W LEDs

ALARM - This red LED flashes when there is at least one unacknowledged fire alarm; it glows steadily when all fire alarms are acknowledged. AUDIBLE SILENCE - This red LED flashes when at least one notification appliance circuit (NAC) is active; it glows steadily when all silenceable NACs are silenced. Under normal conditions, the LED is off. SUPERVISORY - This yellow LED flashes when there is at least one unacknowledged supervisory; it glows steadily when all supervisories are acknowledged. TROUBLE - This yellow LED flashes when there is at least one unacknowledged trouble; it glows steadily when all troubles are acknowledged. SECURITY - This yellow LED flashes when there is at least one unacknowledged security condition; it glows steadily when all security conditions are acknowledged. POWER - This green LED glows steadily to indicate that the AC power is on; it flashes when the System is on battery backup. PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE - This yellow LED glows steadily when any device is disabled.

Modes Of Operation

INTRODUCTION

The MXL-IQ alphanumeric display annunciator has five modes of operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Alarm Supervisory Trouble Security Normal

3-5

Operation This order ensures that fire alarms always take priority over all other conditions. In turn, supervisories always take priority over troubles and troubles always take priority over security conditions. All of the above modes take priority over Normal mode, which is the absence of any alarms, supervisories, troubles, or security conditions.

Alarm The alphanumeric display shows an alarm message when a fire alarm is received. See Alarm.

Supervisory The alphanumeric display shows a supervisory message when the system receives a supervisory and no higher priority event is present. See Supervisories, page 3-8.

Trouble The alphanumeric display shows a trouble message when a trouble is present and no higher priority event is present. See Troubles, page 3-9.

Security

0 0 0 0

ALARM SUPERV TROUBLE SECURITY

0 0 0 0

ALARM ACK SUPERV ACK TROUBLE ACK SECURITY ACK

Alarm RESPONDING TO AN ALARM 1. Follow the response plan approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. 2. When the MXL-IQ is installed, the ACKnowledge key and Audible Alarm Silence key (AUD SIL) on the MKB-4 are behind a locked door. The display, LEDs, and display control keys are visible and accessible. To acknowledge an alarm or trouble, or to silence an audible alarm, first unlock and open the door.

How The System Annunciates Fire Alarms

Normal mode is the absence of any alarms, supervisories, troubles, or security conditions.

When a fire is detected, the System causes the ALARM LED on the MKB-4 to flash, the System’s internal audible to sound, the AUD SIL LED to flash, and the alphanumeric display on the MKB-4 to alternate in a sequence among the three messages shown below. This example assumes that two fire alarms were received (Refer to the explanations below). Message 1:

In normal mode the display shows the following message:

1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type] IN ALR

11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX SYSTEM [custom system message] NORMAL

Message 2:

The alphanumeric display shows a security message when a security condition is received and no higher priority event is present. See Security Conditions, page 3-10.

Normal Mode

The POWER LED glows steadily in normal mode when the system has AC power. The ALARM, AUDIBLE SILENCE, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, and SECURITY LEDs are off and the internal audible is off. If your System has the printer option, the System prints a message in the following format every day at midnight, even when there are alarms or other conditions:

3-6

System Status at 00:00:00 Jul 02, 20XX

1-001 [custom message] 002 [time/date] IN ALR

Message 3: ALARMS=002 SUPERVISORIES=000 TROUBLES=000 SECURITIES=000

In addition, the System responds to alarms with programmed output functions such as other audible signals.

Operation In the messages above, 1-001 represents the address of the device reporting the alarm. NOTE:

On the display, not all leading zeros are shown. If your System includes a printer, note that the leading zeros are not shown.

002 in the first message tells you that this is the second (and the most recent) of two alarms received. The status information in the third message reports the total of alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions. If your System includes a printer, it prints a message from two to four lines long similar to the following: ALARM 1-1 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX #1 [custom message], [device type]

In the preceding printed message, ALARM indicates that the type of occurrence is a fire alarm; 1-1 is the device address; #1 is the number of the alarm in the list of fire alarms; [custom message] is a custom message entered using the CSG-M Custom Software Generator (See the CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381); [device type] is the type of device which reported the alarm.

Viewing the List of Alarms To see the alarm list when there is more than one alarm, press NEXT on the MKB-4 (the System displays the most recent alarm first).

How to Block Acknowledge a Fire Alarm (NFPA 72 Local, Municipal Tie, and Remote Station) 1. Note the specific location of the alarm(s) by using the procedures described above. 2. Unlock and open the door. 3. Press ALARM ACK to acknowledge all alarms. The System displays the following message: ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED.

4. If your System includes the printer option, it prints the following message: ACK ALARM 11:59:59 DEC 31,20XX ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED

5. If you press ALARM ACK again, the System displays ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED. The ALARM LED glows steadily to indicate that all alarms are acknowledged. If there are no supervisories, troubles, or security conditions in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any of those conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses.

How to Individually Acknowledge a Fire Alarm (NFPA 72 Proprietary, UL 1076) 1. Press ALARM ACK. The System acknowledges the alarm displayed and then displays the next unacknowledged alarm. If your System has the printer option, it prints an alarm acknowledgment message similar to the following: ACK ALARM 1-5 12:01:28 DEC 31,20XX #2 [custom message], [device type]

Note that the acknowledgments message includes the term ACK to indicate this alarm was acknowledged. 2. Continue acknowledging alarms as explained above until the System displays the following message: ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED. The ALARM LED glows steadily to indicate that all alarms are acknowledged. If there are no supervisories, troubles, or security conditions still in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any of those conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses. 3. If your System includes a printer, it prints a message similar to the following: ACK ALARM 12:05:44 DEC 31,20XX ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED

Silencing The System Press AUD SIL after all alarms are acknowledged. The System displays the following message: AUDIBLES SILENCED. (Pressing AUD SIL a second time causes the internal audible and the System to unsilence and the message AUDIBLES UNSILENCED to appear on the display;

3-7

Operation thus, pressing AUD SIL alternately silences and unsilences the System.) If your System has a printer, it prints a message similar to the following: AUD SILENCED/UNSIL. 11:01:00 DEC 31, 20XX AUDIBLES SILENCED

Supervisories How The System Annunciates Supervisories When a supervisory is detected, the System causes the SUPERVISORY LED on the MKB-4 to flash, the System’s internal audible to sound, and the alphanumeric display on the MKB-4 to alternate in a sequence among the three messages shown below. This example assumes that two supervisories were received (See the explanations below). Message 1: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type] IN SUP

Message 2: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [time/date] IN SUP

Message 3: ALARMS=000 SUPERVISORIES=002 TROUBLES=000 SECURITIES=000

In addition, the System responds to supervisories with programmed output functions such as other audible signals. In the messages above, 1-001 represents the address of the device reporting the supervisory. 002 in the first message tells you that this is the second (and the most recent) of two supervisories received. The status information in the third message reports the total of alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions.

3-8

If your System includes a printer, it prints a message from two to four lines long similar to the following: SUPERV 1-1 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX #1 [custom message], [device type]

In the preceding message, SUPERV indicates that the type of occurrence is a supervisory; 1-1 is the device address; #1 is the number of the supervisory in the list of supervisories; [custom message] is a custom message entered using the CSG-M Custom Software Generator (See the CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381); [device type] is the type of device which reported the supervisory.

Viewing the List of Supervisories To see the supervisory list when there is more than one supervisory, press NEXT on the MKB-4 (the System displays the most recent supervisory first).

How to Block Acknowledge a Supervisory (NFPA 72 Local, Municipal Tie, and Remote Station) 1. Note the specific location of the supervisories by using the procedures described above. 2. Unlock and open the door. 3. Press SUPV ACK to acknowledge all supervisories. The System displays the following message: ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED.

4. If your System includes a printer, it prints the following message: ACK SUPERVISORY 11:59:59 DEC 31,20XX ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED

5. If you press SUPV ACK again, the System displays ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED. The SUPERVISORY LED glows steadily to indicate that all supervisories are acknowledged. If there are no troubles or security conditions in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any of those conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses.

Operation

How to Individually Acknowledge a Supervisory (NFPA 72 Proprietary, UL 1076) 1. Press SUPV ACK. The System acknowledges the supervisory displayed and then displays the next unacknowledged supervisory. If your system has a printer, it prints an acknowledgment message similar to the following: ACK SUPERV 1-5 12:01:28 DEC 3,20XX #2 [custom message], [device type]

Note that the acknowledgment message includes the term ACK to indicate this supervisory was acknowledged. 2. Continue acknowledging supervisories as explained above until the System displays the following message: ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED. The SUPERVISORY LED glows steadily to indicate that all supervisories are acknowledged. If there are no troubles or security conditions still in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any of those conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses. 3. If your System includes a printer, it prints the following message: ACK SUPERVISORY 12:05:44 DEC 3,20XX ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED

Troubles How The System Annunciates Troubles When a trouble is detected, the System causes the TROUBLE LED on the MKB-4 to flash, the System’s internal audible to sound, and the alphanumeric display on the MKB-4 to alternate in a sequence among the three messages shown below. This example assumes that two troubles were received (See the explanations below).

Message 2: 1-001 [device type] 002 [time/date] IN TBL

Message 3: ALARMS=000 SUPERVISORIES=000 TROUBLES=002 SECURITIES=000

In addition, the System responds to troubles with programmed output functions. In the messages above, 1-001 represents the address of the device reporting the trouble. 002 in the first message tells you that this is the second (and the most recent) of two troubles received. The status information in the third message reports the total of alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions. If your System includes a printer, it prints a message from two to four lines long similar to the following: TROUBLE IN 1-1 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX #1 [custom message] [trouble type], [device type]

In the above printed message, TROUBLE indicates that the type of occurrence is a trouble; 1-1 is the device address; and #1 is the number of troubles in the list of troubles; [custom message] is a custom message entered using the CSG-M Custom Software Generator (See the CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315- 090381); [trouble type] is the type of trouble which reported; [device type] is the type of device in trouble.

Viewing The List of Troubles To see the trouble list when there is more than one trouble, press NEXT on the MKB-4 (the System displays the most recent trouble first).

Message 1: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [trouble type] IN TBL

3-9

Operation

How to Block Acknowledge a Trouble (NFPA 72 Local, Municipal Tie, and Remote Station) 1. Note the specific location of the trouble(s) by using the procedures described above. 2. Unlock and open the door. 3. Press TRBL ACK to acknowledge all troubles. The System displays the following message: ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED. 4. If your System includes a printer, it prints the following message: ACK TROUBLE 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED

5. If you press TRBL ACK again, the System displays ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED.

The TROUBLE LED glows steadily to indicate that all troubles are acknowledged. If there are no security conditions in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any security conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses.

The TROUBLE LED glows steadily to indicate that all troubles are acknowledged. If there are no security conditions still in the System, the internal audible goes silent; if any of those conditions still exist, the internal audible pulses. 3. If your System includes a printer, it prints the following message: ACK TROUBLE 12:05:44 DEC 31, 20XX ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED

Security How The System Annunciates Security Conditions When a security condition is detected, the System causes the SECURITY LED on the MKB-4 to flash, the System’s internal audible to sound, and the alphanumeric display on the MKB-4 to alternate in a sequence among the three messages shown below. This example assumes that two security conditions were received (See the explanations below the messages). Message 1: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type] IN SEC

How to Individually Acknowledge a Trouble (NFPA 72 Proprietary, UL 1076) 1. Press TRBL ACK. The System acknowledges the trouble displayed and then displays the next unacknowledged trouble. If your System has a printer, it prints an acknowledgment message similar to the following: ACK TROUBLE 1-5 12:01:28 DEC 31,20XX #2 [custom message], [trouble type], [device type]

Note that the acknowledgment message includes the term ACK to indicate this trouble was acknowledged. 2. Continue acknowledging troubles as explained above until the System displays the following message: ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED.

3-10

Message 2: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [time/date] IN SEC

Message 3: ALARMS=000 TROUBLES=000

SUPERVISORIES=000 SECURITIES=002

In addition, the System responds to security conditions with programmed output functions. In the messages above, 1-001 represents the address of the device reporting the security condition. 002 in the first message tells you that this is the second (and the most recent) of two security conditions received.

Operation The status information in the third message reports the total number of alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions. If your System includes a printer, it prints a message from two to four lines long similar to the following: SECURITY IN 1-1 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX #1 [custom message], [device type]

In the preceding printed message, SECURITY indicates that the type of occurrence is a security condition; 1-1 is the device address; #1 is the number of the security condition in the list of security conditions; [custom message] is a custom message entered using the CSG-M Custom Software Generator (See the CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381); [device type] is the type of device which reported the security condition.

3. If your System includes a printer, it prints the following message: ACK SECURITY 12:05:44 DEC 31, 20XX ALL SECURITY CONDITIONS ACKNOWLEDGED

Reset Procedures Hard Reset Other for Hard Reset are Power-up, Initialization, and Cold Reset. Applying power to the System performs a Hard Reset which initializes (starts) the entire system. What Is Lost: • Alarms, supervisories, troubles, security conditions • Any entries such as time and date

Viewing the List of Security Conditions

• Arm/disarm

To see the security condition list when there is more than one security condition, press NEXT on the MKB-4 (the System displays the most recent security condition first).

• Manual sensitivity adjustment

How to Individually Acknowledge a Security Condition (UL 1076) 1. Press SEC ACK. The System acknowledges the security condition displayed and then displays the next unacknowledged security condition. If your System has a printer, it prints an acknowledgment message similar to the following: ACK SECURITY 1-5 12:01:28 DEC 3,20XX #2 [custom message], [device type]

Note that the acknowledgment message includes the term ACK to indicate this security condition was acknowledged. 2. Continue acknowledging security conditions as explained above until the System displays the following message: ALL SECURITY CONDITIONS ACKNOWLEDGED. The SECURITY LED glows steadily to indicate that all security conditions are acknowledged, and the internal audible goes silent.

• Time-based control until time is reset What Is Not Lost: • CSG-M program

Soft Reset To perform a Soft Reset, press RESET on the MKB-4 (Refer to Figure 32, page 3-4). Soft reset does not work until you acknowledge all alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions and silence the System. What Is Lost: • Alarms, supervisories, troubles, security conditions • Arm/disarm (unless option disabled by CSG-M) What Is Not Lost: • Any entries such as time and date. • Arm/disarm (when enabled by CSG-M) • CSG-M program • Manual sensitivity adjustment • Time-based control

3-11

Operation If you press RESET before acknowledging all conditions and silencing the audible alarms, the display shows a message similar to the following: ALARMS NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

(or) SUPERVISORY NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

(or) TROUBLES NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

(or) SECURITY NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

(or) AUDIBLES NOT ALL SILENCED YET

If your System has a printer, it prints a message similar to the following and adds SYSTEM NOT RESET on the bottom line: RESET 0:1 1:58 Jul 03,20XX Not All Acknowledged Yet. System Not Reset.

When the System performs a Soft Reset, the display shows the following message: SYSTEM RESET

The System then returns to Normal mode and the display shows the following: 11:59:59 DEC 31, 20XX [custom System message]

SYSTEM NORMAL

If your System has a printer, it prints the following message: SYSTEM RESET

If the System is already in Normal mode when you press RESET, it displays SYSTEM ALREADY NORMAL

and does not reset.

3-12

Using The MKB Keyboard/Annunciator in Global Mode The Global MKB Keyboard/Annunciator operates the same as described in Using The MKB Keyboard/Annunciator Local Mode, except as noted below.

Limitations/Restrictions • As in all networked MXL Systems, the self-restoring trouble option is not allowed in any MXL. • An MXL still may only contain a maximum of 4 supervised MKBs. This can be a mix of local and global MKBs. • BLOCK ACK must be enabled in the CSG-M. • The maximum number of supervised Global MKBs is 10. • The maximum number of Global Printers is 2 (not TSP-40s).

Global MKB Display Format In order to insert the XNET node information and provide an indication of the number of events in the System, some of the characters in the first and second lines have been lost. NN = NODE # (1 - 64) MMM = MODULE # (1 - 253) DDD = DEVICE # (1 - 254) ALARM The 3 event displays are formatted as follows for an alarm condition: NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 1 [time/date] IN ALR NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 1 [device type] IN ALR ALARMS=1 TROUBLES=0

SUPERVISORY=0 SECURITY=0

Operation SUPERVISORY The 3 event displays are formatted as follows for a supervisory condition: NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 1 [time/date] IN SUP NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 1 [device type] IN SUP ALARMS=0 TROUBLES=0

SUPERVISORY=1 SECURITY=0

TROUBLE The 3 event displays are formatted as follows for a trouble condition: NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 23 [trouble type] IN TRB NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 23 [time/date] IN TRB ALARMS=0 TROUBLES=23

SUPERVISORY=0 SECURITY=0

Global Keypad Operation BLOCK ACK Global block acknowledgment operates as in a standalone MXL, but with global scope. Events for the queue acknowledge System wide (all nodes). Pressing a global BLOCK ACK key results in a broadcast XNET message to all nodes to acknowledge all events in that queue. s process the event just as if the key press had occurred at one of its MKBs. A success code (or error code) is sent to the NODE that initiated the global acknowledge. An acknowledgment message is displayed and printed (and the appropriate LED is updated) when the MXL determines all events at that level have been acknowledged (System wide). The time/date stamp of an event is used to determine the true state of the System.

SECURITY The 3 event displays are formatted as follows for a security condition:

LEDs are not updated unless all nodes confirm the acknowledgment has been successfully executed.

NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 2 [time/date] IN SEC

AUD SILENCE This key is NOT a toggle as in a local mode. If silenceable audibles are active anywhere in the System, the LED flashes.

NN:MMM-DDD [custom message] ACK 2 [device type] IN SEC ALARMS=0 TROUBLES=0

SUPERVISORY=0 SECURITY=2

Leading zeros are not included in addresses and counts. Additional data causes a three character shift right, resulting in the loss of three characters from the displayed message. Additional data also causes a two character shift to the right, resulting in the loss of two characters of the device or trouble type. The System queue totals are over 10,000 events. This expands the event number fields to 5 digits from 3. The order of these events is as follows: • Queue priority (Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Security). • Time and date of event (newest first). • If the two previous items are identical, the lower node number takes priority.

When the global AUD SILENCE key is pressed with any/all audibles in the System unsilenced, a global silence command is issued. The command is processed in the nodes as if a local audible silence had been requested. Command preprocessing is in place to prevent silenceable audibles from getting out of sync (some systems on, some systems off) on a System basis. No audibles will be silenced unless all can be silenced. However, in cases where local control is enabled, this may be unavoidable. An error code (or success via a silence event message) allows the global MKB to keep up to date as to true System status. If any reports an error, the display status remains unchanged. When the global AUD SILENCE key is pressed with all audibles in the System silenced, a global unsilence command is issued. The command is processed in the

3-13

Operation nodes as if a local audible unsilence had been requested. An error code (or success via a silence event message) allows the global MKB to keep up to date as to true System status. If any reports an error, the display status changes since some audibles have been unsilenced. RESET When the global reset key is pressed, each node is tested. If all nodes meet the conditions required for reset, the reset command is sent and executed. Otherwise, the corresponding error message is displayed.

Using The Menu

The menu gives you wide control of the MXL-IQ System. You may use the menu no matter what mode the System is in. The discussion in this section is in the following order: • Operation of the keys on the MKB-4 Keyboard/Annunciator • Overview of the menu’s structure • Beginning a menu session • Introduction to each of the four menus: - Acknowledge menu - List menu

NEXT This key operates the same as in the local mode. However, it moves the through the System events globally in the priority order established earlier.

- Control menu - Test menu - Entering your - Entering module and device numbers

HOLD This key operates the same as in the local mode.

• Using the Acknowledge menu

Function Keys These keys operates the same as in the local MKB.

• Using the Test menu

Numeric Keypad These keys operates the same as in the local MKB.

• Using the List menu • Using the Control menu

Operation of the Keys on the MXL-IQ Annunciator Use the numeric keypad and the directional and command keypad when working with the menu.

Numeric Keypad Use the numeric keypad (keys 0 through 9) when the System asks for a module number, device number, , time, date, or other information. The display shows each number as you press the key. However, when you enter a , the System shows asterisks in place of the digits entered.

The Command Keypad The Command Keypad has both directional and command keys that are used to move through the menu and perform specific functions. Refer to Table 18 for a description of the Command Keypad.

3-14

Operation

Overview of the Menu’s Structure Press ENTER to enter the menu. The menu then uses the first 32 spaces of the second line of the display to communicate with you. When you use the Acknowledge or List menu, the menu uses both lines of the display.

Acknowledge

Alarm Supervisory (Supervsry) Trouble Security

TABLE 18 COMMAND KEYPAD Key Purpose

| on the display (unless entering a number).

Select the item to the left of what is flashing Select the item to the right of what is

} flashing on the display (unless entering a number).

~ ENTER

Go back to the previous item. Press to select the item on which the cursor is flashing. After typing in numbers, press

If you are in the menu and do not depress a numeric or arrow key at any time during a 1 minute period, the System returns to the previous item. The five Main Menu items and their subitems for Revision 6.0 and higher follow; the shortened used in the menu itself are in parentheses: List1

Status Alarm Supervisory (Supervsry) Trouble Security Sensitivity (Senstvty) Voltages - Analog - Threshold - Sensitivity Temp Module type (Mod type) Device type (Dev type) Message Software version (SW version) Output States Device Usages Node Address Analaser - Smoke-lev - Flow-lev - Trip-pts Percent/ft - Senstvty - Pre-alarm - Analog ASD apps 1

You can generate a printed report or listing for every item in the List menu except Node Address; see the discussion under LIST Menu.

Control

Reset Sensitivity (Senstvty) - Hi_3 - Hi_2 - Hi_1 - Norm - Low_1 - Low_2 - Low_3 Arm/disarm (Arm/dis) - Arm - Disarm Output on/off - Arm - Disarm - Energize - De-Energize Loop Arm Loop Disarm Netlink Request Analaser - Alarm_Trip - Flow_Trip Percent/Ft - Sensitivity (Senstvty) - Pre_alarm Change_Apps

Test

Set time Ground fault (Gnd_flt) - Main Power2 - Main - Voltage - Current Lamp test - LEDs - Display Device LED MOI_Lamp_Test X-Network M-Network Override Det_cleaned Event_log - Alrm_only - Trbl_only - Superv_only - Security_only - All_events - Hist_Ctrl - Hist_Erase Pyro_diags Pre_alarm ASD_Devices Summarize Manual_Activate 2

You can generate a printed report for this item; see the discussion under TEST Menu.

ENTER to complete the entry.

HELP

Press to display a one-line message.

PRINT

Press to begin printing various lists and

FORM FEED

Press to advance the paper in the printer.

CLEAR

reports.

Press to cancel printouts begun by pressing PRINT. The System will print: This listing prematurely terminated.

Walktest

System_wAUD Loop_wAUD Zone_wAUD System_SIL Loop_SIL Zone_SIL Cancel Extend

3-15

Operation

Beginning a Menu Session When you first press ENTER to begin a menu session, the second line of the display shows the four Main Menu items: ACKNOWLEDGE TEST

LIST

CONTROL

The A in Acknowledge is blinking. Select Acknowledge by pressing ENTER while the A is blinking. Use the Left and Right arrow keys to move around in this four-item menu.

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

For help in understanding what the List function does, press HELP when the L in LIST is blinking. The System displays: TO LIST SYSTEM, DEVICE, CSGM INFO

Use this function to list information on the System and its devices. To return to the Main Menu display, press HELP again: ACKNOWLEDGE

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.

We discuss the List menu in detail beginning on page 3-22.

Introduction to the Acknowledge Menu

Introduction to the Control Menu

The Main Menu, displayed when you press ENTER to begin a menu session, lists the four main items in the menu: ACKNOWLEDGE TEST

LIST

CONTROL

For help in understanding what the Acknowledge function does, press HELP when the A in ACKNOWLEDGE is blinking. The System displays: TO ACKNOWLEDGE INDIVIDUALLY

Use this menu function to acknowledge alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions individually. To return to the Main Menu display, press HELP again: ACKNOWLEDGE TEST

LIST

CONTROL

We discuss the Acknowledge menu in detail beginning on page 3-18.

Introduction to the List Menu To move to LIST on the Main Menu, press the Right arrow key once; the L in LIST begins blinking:

3-16

ACKNOWLEDGE

To move to CONTROL on the Main Menu, press the Right arrow key twice from ACKNOWLEDGE; the C in CONTROL begins blinking: ACKNOWLEDGE

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

For help in understanding what the Control function does, press HELP while the C in CONTROL is blinking. The System displays: TO MODIFY DATA FOR OPERATION

Use the Control function to reset the System and to change the settings of various devices. To return to the Main Menu display, press HELP again: ACKNOWLEDGE

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

We discuss the Control menu in detail beginning on page 3-36.

Introduction to the Test Menu To move to TEST, press the Right arrow key three times from ACKNOWLEDGE; the T in TEST begins blinking: ACKNOWLEDGE

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

For help in understanding what the Test function does, press HELP while the T in TEST is blinking. The System displays:

Operation TO TEST SYSTEM, LOOP & DEVICE

Use this function to test the System, its loops, and its devices, including ground fault, battery voltage and current, and the LEDs. To return to the Main Menu display, press HELP again: ACKNOWLEDGE

LIST

CONTROL

TEST

We discuss the Test menu in detail beginning on page 3-42.

Entering Your If you select CONTROL, TEST, or WALKTEST, the System asks for your : ENTER YOUR :

The System gives you three chances to enter an acceptable before it returns you to the Main Menu. If the System accepts your , it displays the Control, Test, or Walktest menu. We discuss those menus later in this section.

Entering a Module Number and Device Number The System asks you to supply a module number or device number, or both, during certain functions described in the pages that follow. Below is a summary of the procedures involved. NOTE:

The module number and module address are used interchangeably in this manual.

Entering a Module Number The System displays

If you press HELP, the System explains this function; press HELP again to return to the previous display.

TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type your (1-5 digit) , using the numeric keypad. The System shows an asterisk for each digit that you type. (Use the Left arrow key to erase an error.)

If you press HELP at this point, the System displays the following explanation:

When you have typed the entire , press ENTER. If your does not match a stored in the System, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the first display: ACCESS DENIED

If your level is not high enough to use the Test functions, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the first display:

3 DIGIT MODULE NO., PRESS <ENTER>

Press HELP again to return to the previous display. Type all three digits, including leading zeros, and press ENTER. When you type the module number, use the Left arrow key as a backspace key to erase errors.

Entering a Device Number with the Module Number The System displays TYPE IN THE DEVICE NUMBER:

LEVEL NOT HIGH ENOUGH

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays the following explanation: LEVELS Rev 5.0 and Above Highest Test Z Control Lowest Walktest Below Rev 5.0 Highest

Y Lowest

Walktest Test Control

3 DIGIT MODULE 3 DIGIT DEVICE

Press HELP again to return to the previous display. Type all of the digits, including leading zeros, and press ENTER.)

3-17

Operation When you type the module number and the device number, use the Left arrow key as a backspace key to erase errors.

If All Alarms Are Acknowledged: If all the alarms are acknowledged, the System displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu.

ACKNOWLEDGE Menu

ALL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGED

The Acknowledge menu has four items from which to choose; the shortened used in the menu itself are in parentheses: ALARM SUPERVISORY (SUPERVSRY) TROUBLE SECURITY

If There Is an Unacknowledged Alarm: If there is at least one unacknowledged alarm, the menu shows the most recent unacknowledged alarm on both lines of the display, as in the following display:

Use this menu to individually acknowledge fire alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions.

29-041 [custom message] 007 [device type] IN ALR

Entering the Acknowledge Menu

In the above display, 29 is the module number, 041 is the device number, the message on the first line is the custom message for the device at that location, 007 indicates that this is the seventh alarm, [device type] indicates the type of device in alarm, and IN ALR indicates that this is a fire alarm.

Select ACKNOWLEDGE from the Main Menu by pressing ENTER while the A in ACKNOWLEDGE is blinking. The System displays the first Acknowledge menu (the A in ALARM is blinking): ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

NOTE:

To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.

Acknowledge: Alarm Use this function to individually acknowledge fire alarms. Press ENTER when the A in ALARM is blinking to select ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM: ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

If There Is No Alarm: If there is no current alarm, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: NO ALARM EXISTS

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

3-18

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

(Press HELP if you want information on what to do. The System displays: PRESS ENTER TO ACK. PRESS NEXT TO SKIP.

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.) Press ENTER to acknowledge the alarm shown. The System prints a message similar to the following and removes that alarm from the unacknowledged alarm list: ACK ALARM 29-041 16:11:41 Aug 28,20XX #7 [custom message], [device type]

In the above message, the time and date are the time and date that the alarm was acknowledged and 29-041 is the address. The System then displays the next alarm to acknowledge. To skip an alarm shown, press NEXT. The System displays the next alarm in the series. When the System has displayed all

Operation of the unacknowledged alarms, it returns to the first Acknowledge menu: ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

If There Is An Unacknowledged Supervisory: The System does not let you acknowledge supervisory conditions if there are any unacknowledged alarms. If there is at least one unacknowledged alarm, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: ALARM NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

Acknowledge: Supervsry Use this function to individually acknowledge supervisories.

Select ALARM and follow the instructions in ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM above.

Select ACKNOWLEDGE from the Main Menu by pressing ENTER while the A in ACKNOWLEDGE is blinking. The System displays:

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

Press the Right arrow key once to cause the S in SUPERVISRY to blink. (If you press HELP at this time, the System explains the Acknowledge Supervisory function: TO ACK SUPERVISORY INDIVIDUALLY

Press HELP again to return to the ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY display.) Press ENTER while the S is blinking to select SUPERVISRY. If There Is No Supervisory: If there is no supervisory to acknowledge, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: NO SUPERVISORY EXISTS

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.) If All Supervisories Are Acknowledged: If all supervisories are acknowledged, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: ALL SUPERVISORIES ACKNOWLEDGED

After you acknowledge all alarms, the System allows you to acknowledge supervisories. If there is at least one unacknowledged supervisory, the menu shows the most recent unacknowledged supervisory on both lines of the display, as in the following display: 32-045 [custom message] 012 [device type] IN SUP

In the preceding display, 32 is the module number, 045 is the device number, the message on the first line is the custom message for the device at that location, 012 indicates that this is the twelfth supervisory, [device type] indicates the type of device causing the supervisory, and IN SUP identifies the item as an off-normal supervisory. (Press HELP if you want information on what to do. The System displays: PRESS ENTER TO ACK. PRESS NEXT TO SKIP

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.) Press ENTER to acknowledge the supervisory shown. The System prints a message similar to the following and removes that supervisory from the unacknowledged supervisory list: ACK SUPERV 32-045 16:11:44 Aug 2,20XX #12 [custom message], [device type]

In the above message, the time and date are the time and date the supervisory was acknowledged and 32-045 is the address.

3-19

Operation The System then displays the next supervisory to acknowledge. To skip a supervisory, press NEXT. The System displays the next supervisory in the series. When the System has displayed all of the unacknowledged supervisories, the System returns to the acknowledge menu on the second line of the display. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Acknowledge: Trouble Use this function to individually acknowledge troubles. Select ACKNOWLEDGE from the Main Menu by pressing ENTER while the A in ACKNOWLEDGE is blinking. The System displays the first Acknowledge menu: ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

Press the Right arrow key twice. The System displays the Acknowledge menu with T in TROUBLE blinking: ACKNOWLEDGE: SUPERVISRY TROUBLE

(If you press HELP at this time, the System explains the Acknowledge Trouble function: TO ACK TROUBLE INDIVIDUALLY

Press HELP again to return to the acknowledge menu.) Press ENTER while the T is blinking to select Trouble.

ALL TROUBLES ACKNOWLEDGED

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.) If There Is An Unacknowledged Trouble: The System does not let you acknowledge troubles if there are any unacknowledged fire alarms or supervisories. Follow the instructions above to acknowledge them. After you acknowledge all fire alarms and supervisories, the System allows you to acknowledge troubles. If there is at least one unacknowledged trouble, the System shows the most recent unacknowledged trouble on both lines of the display, as in the following display: 36-050 [custom message] 018 [trouble type] IN TBL

In the above display, 36 is the module number, 050 is the device number, the message on the first line is the custom message for that device, 018 indicates that this is the eighteenth trouble, [trouble type] indicates the type of trouble, and IN TBL identifies the event as the occurrence of a trouble. (Press HELP if you want information on what to do. The System displays: PRESS ENTER TO ACK. PRESS NEXT TO SKIP.

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.)

If There Is No Trouble: If there is no trouble to acknowledge, the System briefly displays the following message and returns you to the acknowledge menu:

Press ENTER to acknowledge the trouble shown. The System prints a message similar to the following message and removes that trouble from the unacknowledged trouble list:

NO TROUBLE EXISTS

ACK TROUBLE 36-050 16:11:44 Aug 8, 20XX #18 [custom message], [trouble type] [device type]

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

3-20

If All Troubles Are Acknowledged: If all the troubles are acknowledged, the System displays the following message and returns you to the Acknowledge menu:

Operation In the above message, the time and date are the time and date that the condition was acknowledged and 36-050 is the address. The System then displays the next trouble to acknowledge.

If All Security Conditions Are Acknowledged: If all security conditions are acknowledged, the System displays the following message and returns you to the Acknowledge menu: ALL SECURITIES ARE ACKNOWLEDGED

When the System has displayed all of the unacknowledged troubles, it returns to the Acknowledge menu.

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

If There Is An Unacknowledged Security Condition: The System does not let you acknowledge security conditions if there are any unacknowledged alarms, supervisories, or troubles.

Acknowledge: Security Use this function to individually acknowledge security conditions. Select ACKNOWLEDGE from the Main Menu by pressing ENTER while the A in ACKNOWLEDGE is blinking. The System displays the first Acknowledge menu: ACKNOWLEDGE: ALARM SUPERVISRY

Press the Right arrow key three times. The System displays the second Acknowledge menu, with the S in SECURITY blinking: ACKNOWLEDGE: TROUBLE SECURITY

(If you press HELP at this time, the System explains the Acknowledge Security function: TO ACK SECURITY INDIVIDUALLY

Press HELP again to return to the Acknowledge menu.) Press ENTER while the S is blinking to select Security. If There Is No Security Condition to Acknowledge: If there is no Security condition to acknowledge, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: NO SECURITY EXISTS

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.)

If there is at least one unacknowledged alarm, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the Acknowledge menu: ALARMS NOT ALL ACKNOWLEDGED YET

(If your System has a printer, it prints the above message as well.) Follow the instructions above to acknowledge any unacknowledged alarms, supervisories, and troubles. After you acknowledge all fire alarms, supervisories, and troubles, the System allows you to acknowledge security conditions. If there is at least one unacknowledged security condition, the System displays the most recent unacknowledged security condition: 42-058 [custom message] 005 [device type] IN SEC

In the above display, 42 is the module number, 058 is the device number, the message on the first line is the custom message for the device at that location, 005 indicates that this is the fifth security condition, [device type] indicates the type of device causing the security condition, and IN SEC identifies this as an off-normal security condition. (Press HELP if you want information on what to do. The System displays: PRESS ENTER TO ACK. PRESS NEXT TO SKIP.

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.)

3-21

Operation Press ENTER to acknowledge the security condition shown. The System prints a message similar to the following message and removes that security condition from the unacknowledged security list:

Software version (SW version)

ACK SECURITY 42-058 16:11:44 Aug 8,20XX #5 [custom message], [device type]

Analaser

Output states Device usages Node address Percent/ft ASD_apps

In the above message, the time and date given are the time and date when the security condition was acknowledged, and 42-058 is the address. The System then displays the next security report to acknowledge. To skip a security condition, press NEXT. The System displays the next security condition in the series. When the System has displayed all of the unacknowledged security conditions, it returns to the Acknowledge menu. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

LIST Menu

The List menu has eighteen items from which to choose; the shortened used in the menu are in parentheses. You can generate a printed list or report for every item on the List menu except Node Address. See the discussion for each item that follows. Status Alarm

Use the List menu to learn the following information: • Status of the System • Alarm information • Supervisory information • Trouble information • Security information • Detector sensitivity • Detector voltage Analog Threshold (Thresh) Sensitivity (Sens) • Temperature of FP-11 or FPT-11 • Type of module • Type of device • Custom message of the given address • Version of the System software • Output states • Device usages • 's X-Network node address • Percent per foot obscuration Sensitivity Pre-alarm Analog • Device application (ASD setting)

Supervisory (Supervsry) Trouble Security Sensitivity (Senstvty) Voltages Temp Module type (Mod type)

Entering the List Menu From the Main Menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the L in List to blink. If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List function: TO LIST SYSTEM, DEVICE, CSGM INFO

Device type (Dev type) Message

3-22

Press HELP again to return to the Main Menu.

Operation Press ENTER to select LIST. The System displays the first List menu, with the S in STATUS blinking: LIST: STATUS ALARM SUPERVSRY

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

In the above printed message, there are two alarms, both of them acknowledged, no supervisory conditions, 30 trouble conditions, all acknowledged, and no security conditions. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

List: Alarm

List: Status The List Status function shows you the number of acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms, supervisories, troubles, and security conditions, in that order. From the List menu, use the Right or Left arrow keys to cause the S in STATUS to blink. (If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List Status function:

The List Alarm function shows you all the fire alarms currently in the System in the order they occurred. From the List menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the A in ALARM to begin blinking. If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List Alarm function: SHOW INDIVIDUAL ALARM STATUS

SHOW NUMBER OF ACKED & UNACKED

Press HELP again to return to the List menu. Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) When you press ENTER to select List Status, the display first shows the total number of alarms and the number of acknowledged alarms: 2 ALARM

2 ALARM ACK

Press ENTER to select ALARM and display alarm information on the MKB-4 display. If There Is No Fire Alarm: If there is no fire alarm, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the List menu: NO ALARM EXISTS

To view, in order, the status of supervisories, troubles, and security conditions, press NEXT. After the Security display, the System returns to the List menu.

If There Is a Fire Alarm: If there is at least one fire alarm, the System shows the most recent alarm, alternating between the following two displays:

To make a printed list of current status, press PRINT when the S in STATUS is blinking. The System will print a listing similar to the following:

1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type] IN ALR

System Status at 11:02:26 Jul 01, 20XX: 2 ALARM 2 ALARM ACK 0 SUPERV 0 SUPERV ACK 30 TROUBLE 30 TROUBLE ACK 0 SECURITY 0 SECURITY ACK

1-001 [custom message] 002 [time/date]

IN ALR

Press NEXT to show the two displays for the previous alarm in the sequence. (Pressing HOLD freezes a display for as long as you keep HOLD depressed.)

3-23

Operation When the System has shown all current fire alarms, it returns to the List menu.

alternating between the following two displays:

To obtain a full printed list of alarms in the following format—one item for each current alarm—press PRINT when the A in ALARM is blinking.

1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type]

IN SUP

1-001 [custom-message] 002 [time/date]

IN SUP

Listing of all Alarm at 14:35:20 Oct 09,20XX: ALARM 1-5 14:34:22 Oct 09,20XX #1 [custom message], [device type]

In the above listing, 1-5 is the address of the device in alarm, the time is the time the device went into alarm, #1 is the number of this alarm in the current list, [custom message] is the custom message for the device in alarm, and [device type] is the type of device in alarm. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

List: Supervisory The List Supervisory function shows you all the supervisories currently in the System in the order they occurred. From the List menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the S in SUPERVSRY to blink. (If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List Supervisory function: SHOW INDIVIDUAL SUPERVISORY

When the System has shown all current supervisories, it returns to the List menu. To obtain a full printed list of supervisories in the following format—one item for each current supervisory—press PRINT when the S in SUPERVISORY is blinking. Listing of all Supervsry at 14:35:20 Oct 09,20XX: SUPERV IN 32-45 14:34:22 Oct 09, 20XX #7 [custom message], [device type]

In the preceding listing, 32-45 is the address of the device in supervisory, #7 is the number of the supervisory in the current list, [custom message] is the custom message for the device in supervisory, and [device type] is the type of device in supervisory. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.)

List: Trouble

Press ENTER to select SUPERVSRY and display supervisory information on the MKB-4 display.

The List Trouble function shows you all the troubles currently in the System in the order they occurred.

If There Is No Supervisory: If there is no supervisory, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the List menu:

3-24

Press NEXT to show the two displays for the previous supervisory in the sequence. (Pressing HOLD freezes a display for as long as you keep HOLD depressed.)

From the List menu, use the left or right arrow key three times to cause the T in TROUBLE to blink. (If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List Trouble function:

NO SUPERVISORY EXISTS

SHOW INDIVIDUAL TROUBLE STATUS

If There Is a Supervisory: If there is at least one supervisory, the System shows the most recent supervisory,

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.)

Operation Press ENTER to select TROUBLE and display trouble information on the MKB-4 display.

List Security Conditions

If There Is No Trouble: If there is no trouble, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns to the List menu:

From the List menu, use the left or right arrow key to cause the S in SECURITY to blink.

NO TROUBLE EXISTS.

The List Security function shows you all the security conditions currently in the System in the order they occurred.

(If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the List Security function: SHOW INDIVIDUAL SECURITY STATUS

If There Is a Trouble: If there is at least one trouble, the System shows the most recent trouble, alternating between the following two displays: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [trouble type]

IN TBL

1-001 [device type] 002 [time/date]

IN TBL

Press NEXT to show the two displays for the previous trouble in the sequence. (Pressing HOLD freezes a display for as long as you keep HOLD depressed.) When the System has shown all current troubles, it returns to the List menu. To obtain a full printed list of troubles in the following format—one item for each current trouble—press PRINT when the T in TROUBLE is blinking. Listing of all Trouble at 14:35:20 Oct 09, 20XX: TROUBLE IN 29-41 14:34:22 Oct 09, 20XX #7 [custom message],[trouble type], [device type]

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) Press ENTER to select SECURITY and display security information on the MKB-4 display. If There Is No Security Condition: If there is no security condition, the System briefly displays the following message and then returns you to the List menu: NO SECURITY EXISTS

If There Is a Security Condition: If there is at least one security condition, the System shows the most recent security condition, alternating between the following two displays: 1-001 [custom message] 002 [device type]

IN SEC

1-001 [custom message] 002 [time/date]

IN SEC

In the above listing 29-41 is the address of the device in trouble, the time tells when the device went into trouble, #7 is the number of this trouble in the current list, [custom message] is the custom message for the device in trouble, [trouble type] is the type of trouble, and [device type] is the type of device in trouble.

Press NEXT to show the two displays for the previous security condition in the sequence. (Pressing HOLD freezes a display for as long as you keep HOLD depressed.)

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

To obtain a full printed list of security conditions in the following format— one item for each current security condition— press PRINT when the S in SECURITY is blinking.

When the System has shown all current security conditions, it returns to the List menu.

3-25

Operation Listing of all Security at 14:35:20 Oct 09,20XX: SECURTY IN 29-42 14:34:22 Oct 09,20XX #7 [custom message], [device type]

In the above listing 29-42 is the address of the device causing the security condition, the time when the device caused the security condition, #7 is the number of this security condition, [custom message] is the custom message for the device causing the security condition, and [device type] is the type of device causing the security condition.

Press NEXT to display the address and sensitivity setting of each succeeding smoke detector. When the System has shown the sensitivity settings of all smoke detectors on that analog loop, it returns to the List menu. To leave the List Sensitivity menu without going through the entire analog loop, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu.

To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.

Print the Sensitivity Setting of All Smoke Detectors Assigned to a Specified Module Press PRINT when the S in SENSTVTY is blinking. The System then asks for a module number.

List: Sensitivity Settings

TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER: [module number]

Use List Sensitivity to show sensitivity setting of individual smoke detectors on analog loops. From the List menu use the left or right arrow key to cause the S in SENSTVTY to start blinking: LIST: TROUBLE SECURITY SENSTVTY

Type the three-digit module number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints the sensitivity settings (Hi_3, Hi_2, Hi_1, Norm, Low_1, Low_2 or Low_3, or ... if there is no smoke detector) of all the devices assigned to the analog loop. Sensitivities for module 1

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: SHOW DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES

1- HI_3 6- ... 11- NORM

2- ... 3- NORM 4- ... 5- ... 7- ... 8- ... 9- ... 10- ... 12- ... 13- ... 14- ... 15- LOW1

NOTE: You cannot print the sensitivity setting of a single smoke detector. Note that List Sensitivity shows the sensitivity of smoke detectors only. Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) Display the Sensitivity Setting of One Device Press ENTER to select List Sensitivity. The System asks you for a module and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE: 001-001

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays the sensitivity setting of the device specified (Hi_3, Hi_2, Hi_1, Norm, Low_1, Low_2 or Low_3 ).

3-26

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

List: Voltages Use List Voltages to show the voltages of initiating devices on analog loops. From the List menu press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the V in VOLTAGES to start blinking: LIST: SECURITY, SENSTVTY, VOLTAGES

Operation (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

If the module number entered is not an analog loop, the System displays:

SHOW DETECTOR VOLTAGES

Not Analog Loop.

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.)

If the device address has no device assigned by CSG-M, the System displays:

Display the Voltage of One Device Press ENTER to select List Voltages. The System asks you for a module number and device number. Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System shows the following menu for that device (the A in ANALOG will be blinking):

No Device Assigned.

001-001 ANALOG THRESH SENS

Press ENTER to show the Analog voltage for that device. When you ask for any voltage, the System displays Please wait for response until it receives a reading from the device; if you have just reset the System, it alternates the above message with the message Device being initialized. The display for Analog voltage is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 001-001 ANALOG2 = 2.75 VOLTS

Press ENTER to return to the previous display. To view the Threshold or Sensitivity voltage of any device listed, use the Right and Left arrow keys to highlight the first letter of the category desired and press ENTER. The display for Threshold voltage is similar to the following: 001-001 THRESHOLD = 4.75 VOLTS

The display for Sensitivity voltage is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 001-001 SENSITIVITY = 2.62 VOLTS

When displaying sensitivities, if the device is not a smoke detector, the System displays: Not a Smoke Detector.

Print the Voltage of All Devices Assigned to a Specified Module Press PRINT when the V in Voltages is blinking. The System asks you for a module number. Type the three-digit module number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) 002-001 Analog Thresh Sens

Press ENTER to print the Analog voltage for all devices assigned to the module (ND = No Device). ANALOG VOLTAGES FOR MODULE 1 1- 2.00 2- 2.00 3- ND 4- ND 5- ND 6- ND 7- ND 8- ND 9- ND 10- ND 11- ND 12- ND 13- ND 14- ND 15- ND

To print the Threshold voltages of all the devices for the specified module, use the arrow keys to cause the T in THRESH to blink and press PRINT. The System prints those threshold voltages in a format similar to the following (ND = No Device): THRESHOLD VOLTAGES FOR MODULE 1 1- 4.75 2- 4.75 3- ND 4- ND 5- ND 6- ND 7- ND 10- ND 8- ND 9- ND 11- ND 12- ND 13- ND 14- ND 15- ND

Press the Up arrow key to return to the List: Voltage Mod_type Dev_type menu.

3-27

Operation To print the Sensitivity voltages of all the smoke detectors for the specified module, use the arrow keys to cause the S in SENS to blink and press PRINT. The System prints those sensitivity voltages in a format similar to the following (ND = No Device, or device not a smoke detector): SENSITIVITY VOLTAGES FOR 1- 2.75 2- 2.62 3- ND 6- ND 7- ND 10- ND 11- ND 12- ND 13- ND

MODULE 1 4- ND 5- ND 8- ND 9- ND 14- ND 15- ND

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

To leave the Temp menu without going through all subaddresses, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu.

List: Module Type Use the List Mod_type to show the type of a particular module. From the List menu use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the M in MOD TYPE to start blinking: LIST: VOLTAGES MOD TYPE SENSTVTY

(If you press HELP at this point, the System explains this function: SHOW THE TYPE OF MODULE

List: Temp Use List Temp to display the current temperature on the LCD display at the location where the detector is installed. From the List menu use the left or right arrow key to cause the T in Temp to start blinking: LIST: TEMP

Press ENTER to select List Temp. The System asks you for a module and device number: Type In Module & Device:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. If the device is not installed or is not an FP-11 or FPT-11, the system displays following message: Not Applicable or No Device:

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) Display the Module Type of One Module Press ENTER when the M in MOD_ TYPE is blinking. The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type the three-digit module number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter the leading zeros.) The System displays the module type for the module number specified: MOD 074 TYPE: CZM4

If you press NEXT, the System displays the module type for the next module number in the sequence: MOD 075 TYPE: ALD

If the device is an FP-11 or FPT-11, the temperature is displayed in the following format: 001-001

25 DEG C / 77 DEG F

NOTE:

If you enter a module number not assigned in CSG-M, the System displays:

NO MOD ASSIGNED

Press NEXT to display the temperature of the FP-11 or FPT-11 at the next higher address in the same loop.

3-28

With each press of NEXT, the System continues to display module types through

Operation number 255, the highest module number allowed by the System. It then returns to the List menu. Print the Module Type and Network Address of All Modules Press PRINT when the M in MOD_ TYPE is blinking to print a full list of module types and their Network addresses. The System prints a list similar to the following: Listing of Module Types: 1- V7 ALD 2- V7 ALD 3- V4 CZM-4 251- V5 MKB-4 253- V1 MXL-IQ

In the above display, the number following the V (for example, V7) is the software version number of the software installed in the module.

meric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays the device type for the address specified: 004-001 TYPE: [device type]

If you press NEXT, the System displays the device type for the next device in the sequence: 004-002 TYPE: [device type]

With each press of NEXT, the System continues to display device types until there are no more devices for that module. The System then returns to the List menu. To proceed to another module, follow the preceding instructions.

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Print a List of Devices Assigned to a Specified Module Press PRINT when the D is blinking to select LIST DEVICE. The System asks you for a module number:

List: Device Type

TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Use List Device Type to show the type of a particular device. From the List menu use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the D in DEV_TYPE to start blinking: LIST: VOLTAGES MOD TYPE DEV TYPE

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: SHOW THE TYPE OF DEVICE

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) Display the Device Type of a Specified Device Press ENTER when the D is blinking to select LIST DEV_TYPE. The System asks you for a module and device number: TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the nu-

Type only the module number and press PRINT. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints a list of all device types assigned to the specified module in a format similar to the following: Listing of Device Types Module 1 (ALD): 1-TRI-60D Dual Switch Input 2-TRI-60D Dual Switch Input 4-TRI-60D Switch input + Relay 5-TRI-60 Switch Input 7-TRI-60 Switch Input 10-ID-60T-135 Thermal Detector 11-ID-60T-135 Thermal Detector 15-ID-60I Ionization Detector 16-ID-60I Ionization Detector

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

List: Message Use List Message to show the CSG-M assigned custom message of a particular device.

3-29

Operation From the List menu use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the M in MESSAGE to start blinking: LIST: MOD TYPE DEV TYPE MESSAGE

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: SHOW MESSAGE FOR A DEVICE

Type only the module number and press PRINT. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints a list of all the custom device messages for the specified module in a format similar to the following: Listing of Messages in Module 1 (ALD): 4-Conf.Rm 5-Cafeteria 6-Exec. Off. 1 7-Cmptr Rm 8-Exec. Off. 2 9-Camera Rm 10-Exec. Off. 3 11-Conf. Rm

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.)

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Display the Device Message of a Specified Device Press ENTER when the M in MESSAGE is blinking to select List Message.

List: Software Version

The System asks you for a module and device number: TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the message for the address specified:

Use List Software Version to show: 1. System Custom Message 2. MXL-IQ Software Version 3. Version of CSG-M used to Create the System 4. CSG-M File Name Installed 5. Date and Time of Installation From the List menu use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the S in S/W_VERSION to start blinking: LIST: S/W VERSION STATUS

069-001 [custom message]

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: If you press NEXT, the System displays the message for the next device number in the sequence:

SHOW SOFTWARE VERSION

069-002 [custom message]

Press HELP again to return to the previous display.)

With each press of NEXT, the System continues to display device messages until there are no more devices for that module.

Display the Software Version of Your System Software Press ENTER when the S is blinking to select List S/W_VERSION.

To proceed to another module, follow the preceding instructions.

Print a List of System Messages for a Specified Module Press PRINT when the M in MESSAGE is blinking to select List Message. The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

3-30

The System displays the CSG-M assigned System custom message: MSG [system custom message]

Press NEXT again to display the MXL-IQ software version: MXL-IQ VERSION: [version number]

Operation Press NEXT again to display the version of CSG-M used to create this System.

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.)

CSG VERSION: [version number]

Display the Output States of One Device Press ENTER to select List Output States. The System asks you for a module and device number.

Press NEXT again to display the CSG-M file name installed.

TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE: 001-001

SOURCE: [file name]

Press NEXT again to display the date and time of CSG-M installation: LOADED: [time and date]

Print the Software Version of Your System Software Press PRINT when the S in SW_ VERSION is blinking to select List S/ W_Version. The System prints the System Custom Message, MXL-IQ Software Version, Version of CSG-M Used to Create the System, CSG-M File Name Installed, and Date and Time of Installation: Software Version Information at 11:35:30 Jul 01, 20XX Installation: [system custom message] MXL-IQ Version: 1.00 CSG Version: 6.09 Source: 05OCT00 Loaded: 16:09:35 Oct 05, 20XX

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

List: Output States Use List Output States to show the current states of individual outputs in the MXL-IQ. From the List menu use the left or right arrow key to cause the O in Output States to start blinking: LIST: OUTPUT STATES

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays the output state of the device specified. Press NEXT to display the address and output state of each succeeding device. When the System has shown the output states of all devices at that address, it returns to the List menu. To leave the List output state menu without going through all subaddresses, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu. Print the Device Output State of Devices Assigned to a Specified Module Press PRINT when the O in Output States is blinking. The System then asks for a module number. TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER: [module number]

Type the three-digit module number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints the output state of all of the devices assigned to that module. Listing of Output States for Module 1 (ALD): 1-Auxiliary Output: OFF 2-Auxiliary Output: ON 3-Auxiliary Output: ON 4-Auxiliary Output: OFF

List: Device Usages Use List Device Usages to show the uses of individual devices as programmed in CSG-M.

SHOW/PRINT OUTPUT STATES

3-31

Operation From the List menu, use the left or right arrow key to cause the D in DEV_USAGES to start blinking:

Listing of Device Usages for module 1 (ALD) 1- ALARM 2- TROUBLE 3- STATUS 4- ALARM 5- TROUBLE 6- OUTPUT ONLY

LIST: DEV USAGES

List: Node Address (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

Use List Node Address to show the 's X-Net node address.

SHOW/PRINT DEVICE USAGES

From the List menu, use the left or right arrow key to cause the N in NODE ADDRESS to start blinking:

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.)

LIST: NODE ADDRESS

Display the Usage of One Device Press ENTER to select List Dev_usages. The System asks you for a module and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE: 001-001

Display the Node Address Press ENTER to select List Node Address. The System displays the X-Net node address for that particular MXL-IQ .

List: Analaser Use List ANALASER to display operational characteristics of the AnaLASER devices.

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays the use of the device specified (i.e., Alarm, Trouble, or Status). Press NEXT to display the address and use of each succeeding device. When the System has shown the uses of all devices at that address, it returns to the List menu. To leave the List Dev_usage menu without going through all subaddresses, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu. Print the Device Usages of Devices Assigned to a Specified Module Press PRINT when the D in DEV_USAGES is blinking. The System then asks for a module number. TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER: [module number]

Type the three-digit module number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints the uses of all of the devices assigned to that module.

3-32

Press ENTER when the A in ANALASER is blinking to select List ANALASER. Use the Left or Right arrow to move to the following selections: ANALASER: Smoke Lev Trip Pts

Flow Lev

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: DISPLAY ANALASER SMOKE LEVEL

Press HELP again to return to the List menu.) List Analaser – Smoke_Lev Press ENTER when the S in SMOKE_LEV is blinking to select List ANALASER SMOKE_LEV. The System asks you for a module and device number: TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device address number using the numeric keypad

Operation and press ENTER. The system displays the smoke level for the address specified: 010-004

50%

>>ÓÓ!ÓÓ*

*<<

PRE1

The bar graph in the example above shows the following information for the AnaLASER device at address 010-004: 50% = 50% of full scale smoke level ! = active trip point at 30% * = inactive trip point at 60% and 100% PRE1 indicates the device is in PreAlarm 1 PRE2 and ALRM indicate the PreAlarm 2 and Alarm states, respectively. The bargraph continuously updates to reflect the current state of the AnaLASER zone that is being viewed. Print the AnaLASER Smoke Level Press PRINT when the S in SMOKE_LEV is blinking to print the ANALASER SMOKE_LEV.

TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device address number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the air flow level for the address specified: 010-004

50%

>>Ó!ÓÓ

* <<

NORM

The bar graph in the example above shows the following information for the AnaLASER device at address 010-004: 50% = 50% of full scale air flow level ! = low air flow trip point at 20% * = high air flow trip point at 90% NORM indicates that the current air flow level is at a normal level, HIGH indicates airflow is too high, and LOW indicates airflow is too low. The bar graph continuously updates to reflect the current state of the AnaLASER zone that is being viewed.

The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and press ENTER. The System sends smoke levels for all devices on the selected MODULE to the printer. AnaLASER Smoke Levels at 13:23:31 Jan 03, 20XX 010-001 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX 0% Scale >> . . .<< NORM, Cust Msg 1 010-002 13:23:32 Jan 03,20XX 100% Scale >>ÓÓ!ÓÓ!ÓÓ!<< ALRM, Cust Msg 010-010 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX 42% Scale >>ÓÓ!Ó . .<< PRE1, Cust Msg 10 010-011 13:23:32 Jan 03,20XX 100% Scale >>ÓÓ!ÓÓ! .<< PRE2, Cust Msg 11

For printed bar graphs, the characters shown below indicate the following: . = an inactive trip point ! = an active trip point List Analaser – Flow_Lev Press ENTER when the F in FLOW_LEV is blinking to select LIST ANALASER FLOW_LEV. The System asks you for a module and device number:

Print the AnaLASER Flow Level Press PRINT when the F in FLOW_LEV is blinking to print the ANALASER FLOW_LEV. The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and press ENTER. The System sends air flow levels for all devices on the selected MODULE to the printer. AnaLASER Air Flow Levels at 13:23:31 Jan 03, 20XX 010-001 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX 0% Scale >> . . << LOW, Cust Msg 1 010-002 13:23:32 Jan 03,20XX 100% Scale >>Ó!ÓÓÓÓ !Ó<< HIGH, Cust Msg 010-010 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX 42% Scale >>ÓÓ!Ó . << NORM, Cust Msg 10 010-011 13:23:32 Jan 03,20XX 100% Scale >>ÓÓ!ÓÓ . << NORM, Cust Msg 11

List Analaser – Trip_pts Press ENTER when the T in TRIP_PTS is blinking to select LIST ANALASER TRIP_PTS.

3-33

Operation The System prompts you to select between ALARM_TRIP and FLOW_TRIP. Press ENTER when the A in ALARM_TRIP is blinking to select LIST TRIP_PTS ALARM_TRIP. The System asks you for a module and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device address number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the current alarm trip point settings for the address specified: 010-004 P1: 20%

P2: 60%

ALM: 90%

Print the AnaLASER Alarm Trip Pts Press PRINT when the A in ALARM_TRIP is blinking to print the ANALASER ALARM_TRIP points. The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and press ENTER. The System sends alarm trip point levels for all devices on the selected MODULE to the printer.

010-004

LOW:

20%

HIGH:

80%

Print the AnaLASER Flow Trip Pts Press PRINT when the F in FLOW_TRIP is blinking to print the ANALASER FLOW_TRIP points. The System asks you for a module number: TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and press ENTER. The System sends air flow trip point levels for all devices on the selected MODULE to the printer. AnaLASER Air Flow Trip Points at 13:23:31 Jan 03, 20XX 010-001 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, LOW: 10% HIGH: 90%, Cust Msg 1 010-002 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, LOW: 20% HIGH: 80%, Cust Msg 1 010-010 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, LOW: 30% HIGH: 70%, Cust Msg 1 010-011 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, LOW: 10% HIGH: 80%, Cust Msg 1

List: Percent/ft

AnaLASER Alarm Trip Points at 13:23:31 Jan 03, 20XX 010-001 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, PRE1: 10% PRE2: 30% ALRM: 100%, Cust Msg 1 010-002 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, PRE1: 30% PRE2: 50% ALRM: 90%, Cust Msg 2 010-010 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, PRE1: 10% PRE2: 50% ALRM: 100%, Cust Msg 10 010-011 13:23:31 Jan 03,20XX, PRE1: 50% PRE2: 80% ALRM: 100%, Cust Msg 11

Use List Percent/ft to show settings in percent/ft obscuration of the ILI and ILP Series detectors.

Press ENTER when the F in FLOW_TRIP is blinking to select LIST TRIP_PTS FLOW_TRIP.

Press ENTER to select List Percent/ft. The System asks you for a module and device number.

The System asks you for a module and device number.

TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE: 001-001

TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device ad-

3-34

dress number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the current air flow trip point settings for the address specified:

From the List menu, use the left or right arrow key to cause the P in PERCENT/FT to start blinking: LIST: PERCENT/FT

Type in the three-digit module number and the three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the following menu for that device (the S in Senstvty will be blinking):

Operation 002-003 SENSTVTY

PRE-ALARM

ANALOG

List Percent/ft – Senstvty The display for Sensitivity supplies the current sensitivity as read back from the detector and is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 002-003 SENS 1.4%/FT

NORM

List Percent/ft – Pre-alarm The display for Pre-alarm supplies the current Pre-alarm setting read back from the detector and is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 002-003 PRE-ALARM 1.4%/FT

NORM

The System prints either the Sensitivity, Prealarm, or Analog of all the devices for the specified module in a format similar to the following (NA = ID-60 detector): %/ft SENSITIVITIES FOR MODULE 2 1-3.00 2-NA 3-1.4 4-3.1 5-1.4 6-1.4 7-ND 8-ND 9-ND 10-ND 11-ND 12-ND 13-ND 14-ND 15-ND 16-ND 17-ND 18-ND 19-ND 20-ND 21-ND 22-ND 23-ND 24-ND 25-ND 26-ND 27-ND 28-ND 29-ND 30-ND 31-ND 32-ND 33-ND 34-ND 35-ND 36-ND 37-ND 38-ND 39-ND 40-ND 41-ND 42-ND 43-ND 44-ND 45-ND 46-ND 47-ND 48-ND 49-ND 50-ND 51-ND 52-ND 53-ND 54-ND 55-ND 56-ND 57-ND 58-ND 59-ND 60-ND

List: ASD_apps Use List ASD_apps to display operational characteristics of the ASD devices.

List Percent/ft – Analog The display for Analog supplies the current analog2 reading read from the detector and is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 002-003 SENS 1.4%/FT

NORM

To leave the Percent/ft menu without going through all subaddresses, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu. Print the Analog Loop’s Current Readings in Percent/ft Obscuration Press PRINT when the P in Percent/ft is blinking. The System asks you for a module number.

From the List menu use the left or right arrow key to cause the A in ASD_Apps to start blinking: LIST: ASD APPS

Display the Operational Characteristics of One Device Press ENTER to select ASD_apps. The System asks you for a module and device number: TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.)

TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

The System displays the currently assigned application for the device specified. (Refer to the ASD Submenu Abbreviations on page I-1.)

Type the three-digit module number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System shows the following menu for that device (the S in Senstvty will be blinking):

Press NEXT to display the address and assigned application of each succeeding device. The System will exit the ASD_Apps menu if there are no more ASD devices in that module.

001-001 SENSTVTY

PRE-ALARM

ANALOG

To leave the List ASD_Apps menu at any time, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the List menu.

3-35

Operation To print the operational characteristics of the ASD devices assigned to an ALD Loop Press PRINT when the A in ASD_Apps is blinking. The System asks you for a module number:

Arm/Disarm (Arm/dis) Arm Disarm Output_on/off Arm

TYPE IN MODULE NUMBER:

Disarm Type the three-digit module number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System prints a list of all the applications currently assigned to all the ASD devices in that ALD loop in a format similar to the following (ND = No Device): 1-NONE 6-ND 11-ND 16-ND 21-ND 26-ND 31-ND 36-ND 41-ND 46-ND 51-ND 56-ND

2-PARK 7-ND 12-ND 17-ND 22-ND 27-ND 32-ND 37-ND 42-ND 47-ND 52-ND 57-ND

3-ND 8-ND 13-ND 18-ND 23-ND 28-ND 33-ND 38-ND 43-ND 48-ND 53-ND 58-ND

4-ND 9-ND 14-ND 19-ND 24-ND 29-ND 34-ND 39-ND 44-ND 49-ND 54-ND 59-ND

5-ND 10-ND 15-ND 20-ND 25-ND 30-ND 35-ND 40-ND 45-ND 50-ND 55-ND 60-ND

Energize De_energize Loop arm/disarm arm disarm Net_link_request Analazer Alarm-trip Flow-trip Percent/ft Sensitivity(Senstvty) Pre-alarm Change-apps Use the Control menu to perform the following functions: • Reset the System • Change the sensitivity of a smoke detector

CONTROL Menu

The Control menu has nine items from which to choose; six of the items have submenus, as follows (the shortened used in the menu are in parentheses):

• Arm an output device • Disarm and energize an output device • Disarm and de-energize an output device

Reset

• Arm and disarm a loop

Sensitivity (Senstvty)

• Send a request to the Network Command Center (NCC) to disconnect the MXL from the network

Hi_3 Hi_2 Hi_1 Norm Low_1 Low_2 Low_3

3-36

• Arm or disarm an initiating device

• Change AnaLASER Alarm Trip points and Flow Trip points • Change sensitivity and pre-alarm settings in percent/ft obscuration of the ILI and ILP detectors • Change the application of an ASD device

Operation

Entering the Control Menu From the Main Menu, use the arrow keys to cause the C in CONTROL to blink. (If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the Control function: TO MODIFY DATA FOR OPERATION

Press HELP again to return to the Main Menu.)

If the System is normal, when SYSTEM RESET is selected, the System displays the following: SYSTEM ALREADY NORMAL

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Press ENTER to select CONTROL. The System asks you for a before it allows you to use the Control functions. Enter your one- to five-digit , using the numeric keypad, and press ENTER (See the discussion under Entering Your on page 3-17). If the System accepts your , it displays the first Control menu, with the R in RESET blinking:

Control: Sensitivity Use Control Sensitivity to change the sensitivity settings of smoke detectors on analog loops. From the Control menu, press the Right or Left arrow key to cause the S in SENSTVTY to start blinking: CONTROL: RESET SENSTVTY ARM/DIS

CONTROL: RESET SENSTVTY ARM/DIS

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

CHANGE SENSITIVITY

Control: Reset

Note that Control Sensitivity allows you to change the sensitivity settings of smoke detectors only; if you attempt to change the sensitivity setting of another type of device, the System displays:

Use Control Reset to initiate a system reset at any time. From the Control menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the R in RESET to start blinking:

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.)

[001-001] NOT SMOKE DETECTOR

CONTROL: RESET SENSTVTY ARM/DIS

If you enter any address for which there is no device assigned, the System displays: (If you press HELP while the R in RESET is blinking, the System explains this function:

NO DEVICE ASSIGNED

RESET SYSTEM

Press ENTER while the S in SENSTVTY is blinking to select CONTROL SENSTVTY. Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER to reset the System and display the following message:

The System asks you for a module number and device number: TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

SYSTEM RESET

3-37

Operation Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System shows the following display: 001-001 Norm Hi 1 Hi 2 Hi 3

The current sensitivity setting is highlighted. The System offers you a choice of seven levels of sensitivity: Hi_3, Hi_2, Hi_1, Norm, Low_1, Low_2 or Low_3. Use the Right and Left arrow keys to highlight the level you wish to set for the smoke detector specified and press ENTER. The System makes the change in sensitivity setting.

001-001 ARM DISARM

Press NEXT to move through the devices until you display the ones you want to change, and follow the instructions above for making the changes.

When you disarm an input device, the System automatically annunciates the disarming as a Trouble and lights the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED.

When the System has displayed the highest numbered device for the module specified, it returns to the Control menu. You can select another address by selecting SENSTVTY and following the instructions above.

Press NEXT to move through the devices until you display the ones you want to change; follow the instructions above for making the changes.

The System offers you a choice of arming or disarming the device. Use the Right and Left arrow keys to highlight your choice and press ENTER. The System makes the change.

To leave the Control Sensitivity displays without going through the entire list, press the Up arrow key. The System displays the Control menu.

When the System has displayed the highest numbered device for the module specified, it returns to the Control menu. To arm or disarm another module device, select ARM/DIS and follow the preceding instructions.

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Control: Arm/dis

Control: Output on/off

Use Control Arm/dis to enable or disable the operation of an initiating device.

Use Control Output_On/Off to arm or disarm an output device. In addition, you can energize or de-energize disarmed output devices.

From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the A in ARM/DIS to start blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: DISARM OR ARM DEVICES

Press HELP again to return to the Control menu.) Press ENTER while the A in ARM/DIS is blinking to select Control Arm/dis.

3-38

The System asks you for the module number and device number of the detector you wish to arm or disarm. Type the threedigit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays:

From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the O in OUTPUT to start blinking: CONTROL ARM/DIS OUTPUT_ON/OFF

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: TURN OUTPUTS ON OR OFF

Operation Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER while the O in OUTPUT is blinking to select CONTROL_OUTPUT ON/ OFF. The System asks for a module number and device number of the device you wish to turn on or off (energize or de-energize). Type the three-digit module number and threedigit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.)

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Control: Loop Arm Use Control Loop Arm to enable the operation of a loop of ALD initiating devices. From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the L in LOOP_ARM to start blinking.

The System shows the following display:

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

253-005 ARM DISARM

TO ARM ALL INPUTS ON A LOOP

The System offers you a choice of arming or disarming the device.

Press HELP again to return to the Control menu.)

Use the Right and Left arrow keys to highlight your choice and press ENTER.

Press ENTER while the L in LOOP_ARM is blinking to select Control Loop_arm.

If you have armed the device, you can press NEXT to display the number of the next device in the sequence. You can also press the Up arrow key to return to the Control menu.

The System asks you for the module number of the ALD loop you wish to arm. Type the three-digit module number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.)

NOTE: You must first disarm a device if you wish to energize or de-energize it.

When you arm input devices, the System automatically annunciates the arming as a Trouble OUT, and lights the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED.

When you disarm an output device, the System automatically annunciates the disarming as a Trouble and a Partial System Disable. If you choose to disarm an output device, the System then asks if you wish to energize it or de-energize it: 253-005 ENERGIZE DE ENERGIZE

Use the Right or Left arrow key to energize or de-energize the device and press ENTER. Press NEXT to move through the outputs until you display the ones you want to change; follow the instructions above for making the change. When the System has displayed the highest numbered device for the module specified, it returns to the Control menu. To arm or disarm and energize or de-energize a device on a different module, follow the preceding instructions.

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Control: Loop Disarm Use Control Loop Disarm to disable the operation of a loop of ALD initiating devices. From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the L in LOOP_DISARM to start blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: TO DISARM ALL INPUTS ON A LOOP

Press HELP again to return to the Control menu.)

3-39

Operation Press ENTER while the L in LOOP_DISARM is blinking to select Control Loop_disarm.

Press ENTER when the A in ANALASER is blinking to select Control ANALASER.

The System asks you for the module number of the ALD loop you wish to disarm. Type the three-digit module number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.)

The System prompts you to select between ALARM_TRIP and FLOW_TRIP.

When you disarm input devices, the System automatically annunciates the disarming as a Trouble IN, and lights the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Control: Net Link Request Use Control Net_Link_Request to connect or disconnect that particular from the X-Network. When the is disconnected from the X-Network, the maintains its functions, but it does not exchange messages with other nodes in the X-Network. From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the N in NET_LINK_REQUEST to start blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: REQUEST NCC DISCONNECT/RECON NODE

Press HELP again to return to the Control menu.)

Press ENTER when the A in ALARM_TRIP is blinking to select CONTROL ALARM_TRIP. The System asks you for a module and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device address number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The system displays the current alarm trip point settings for the address specified: 010-004 P1: 20%

P2: 60%

ALM: 90%

Use the numeric keypad and the left and right arrow keys to modify the value for P1, P2, and ALM (Alarm). Note that the following provisions apply: • P1 must be less than or equal to P2 which must be less than or equal to ALM. If these values are different, the System will reject the settings. • P1, P2, and ALM must be even multiples of 10% or the System will reject the settings. Press ENTER when you are finished modifying the settings. The display should then show:

Press ENTER while the N in NET_LINK_REQUEST is blinking to disconnect the from the X-Network.

TRIP POINTS ACCEPTED

To reconnect the to the X-Network, from the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the N in NET_LINK_REQUEST to start blinking and press ENTER.

TRIP POINTS INVALID.

or

Press ENTER when the F in FLOW_TRIP is blinking to select Control FLOW_TRIP. The System asks you for a module and device number.

Control: Analaser Use Control ANALASER to display and change the operational characteristics of the AnaLASER devices.

3-40

TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE

Type the three-digit NIM-1R (ANA) module number and three-digit ACC device address number using the numeric keypad

Operation and press ENTER. The system displays the current air flow trip point settings for the address specified: 010-004

LOW: 20%

HIGH: 60%

Use the numeric keypad and the left and right arrow keys to modify the value for LOW and HIGH. Note that the following provisions apply:

Use the left and right arrow keys on the keypad to lower or raise the %/ft reading. (Refer to the Sensitivity and Pre-Alarm Settings chart that follows.)

PHOTO

ION

Pre-alarm adjust increment

.25% / ft.

.12% / ft.

• LOW must be less than HIGH, or the System will reject the settings.

Pre-alarm range

.25 - 2.0% / ft.

.25 - .75% / ft.

• The System will reject the settings if they are not even multiples of 10%.

Pre-alarm default

1.5% / ft.

.75% / ft.

Sensitivity adjust increment

~.25% / ft.

~.12% / ft.

Sensitivity range

1.25 - 3.4% / ft.

.6 - 1.6% / ft.

Sensitivity default (Norm)

3.0% / ft.

1.4% / ft.

Press ENTER when you are finished modifying the settings. The display should then show TRIP POINTS ACCEPTED.

Control: Percent/ft Use Control Percent/ft to change sensitivity and pre-alarm settings in percent/ft obscuration of the ILI and ILP series of detectors. From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the P in Percent/ft to start blinking. The System asks you for a module number and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System displays the following: 001-001 SENSTVTY

PRE-ALARM

Control Percent/ft - Senstvty The display for Sensitivity supplies the current sensitivity as read back from the detector and is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 002-003 SENS 1.4%/FT

NORM

In the previous message, 002-003 is the address. Sens is the type of response (Sensitivity or Pre-alarm). 1.4%/ft is the smoke detector reading in %/ft obscuration and Norm is the text sensitivity range corresponding to the %/ft readings.

After you change the sensitivity setting, the System prints the information for the selected device in a format similar to the following: CMD CHANGE SENS 06:38:20 JUN 2, 20XX 002-004 1.4%/FT NORM

Control Percent/ft - Pre-alarm The display for Pre-alarm supplies the current pre-alarm setting read back from the detector and is similar to the following (readings are dynamic): 002-003 PRE-ALARM .75%/FT

NORM

In the previous message, 002-003 is the address. Pre-alarm is the type of response (Sensitivity or Pre-alarm). .75%/ft is the smoke detector reading in %/ft obscuration and Norm is the text sensitivity range corresponding to the %/ft readings. Use the left and right arrow keys on the keypad to lower or raise the %/ft reading. (Refer to the Sensitivity and Pre-Alarm Settings chart.)

3-41

Operation After you change the pre-alarm setting, the System prints the information for the selected device in a format similar to the following: CMD CHANGE PRE-ALM 06:38:20 JUN 2, 20XX 002-004 1.4%/FT NORM

NOTE: Because the pre-alarm and sensitivity settings overlap, set the pre-alarm to at least an increment below the sensitivity setting.

Control: Change Apps Use Control Change_Apps to change the application of an ASD device. From the Control menu, press the Left or Right arrow key to cause the C in Change_Apps to start blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: CHANGE DEVICE'S APPLICATIONS

Press HELP again to return to the Control menu.) Press ENTER while the C in Change_Apps is blinking to select Control Change_Apps. The System asks you for the module and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

Control: Change_Apps Reset >

Type in Module & Device: 001-001 [Enter module-device number, including all leading zeros] 001-001 NONE OFFC WHSE LOBY > [Use arrow keys to select the desired application] 001-001 NONE OFFC WHSE LOBY >

COMMAND +HANGE_APPS 09:41:43 AUG 07, 20XX 001-001 NONE —> OFFC

To leave the Change_Apps menu at any time, press the Up arrow key. NOTE: If the ASD application is changed while Test ASD is on, the changes will not be effective until Test ASD is turned off.

TEST Menu

The Test menu has sixteen items from which to choose; three of those items have submenus, as follows (the shortened used in the menu itself are in parentheses): Set_time Ground fault (GND_FLT) Power* Main Voltage Current LEDs Display Device_LED MOI_Lamp_test

Use the arrow keys to cycle through the 11 ed applications described in the ASD Submenu Abbreviations on page I-1, in Appendix I, and press ENTER to select the desired application.

X_Network*

The transaction and the time that it occurs will be printed on the printer as a confirmation. The example shown below assumes that no application is currently assigned to module 001, device 001:

Event_log

M_Network* Override Det_cleaned Alrm_only Trbl_only Superv_only Security_only

3-42

[Press ENTER]

A statement will be printed out to confirm the change:

Lamp_test Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.)

[Press ENTER]

Operation All_events Hist_Ctrl Hist_Erase PYRO_Diags PRE_ALARM ASD_DEVICES SUMMARIZE MANUAL_ACTIVATE *You can print a report of the information produced by these functions. See the discussions for Test Power and Test Network.

Press ENTER to select TEST. The System asks you for a before it allows you to use the Test functions. Enter your one- to five-digit , using the numeric keypad, and press ENTER (See the discussion under Entering Your on page 3-17). If the System accepts your , it displays the first Test menu. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Use the Test menu for the following functions: • Change the time and date in the System

Test: Set Time

• Test ground fault state

Use Test Set_Time to set the time and date for the System.

• Display the System’s power condition • Test the LEDs or the display on the MKB-4 • Test the LEDs on an analog device • Perform lamp test on MOD-16 of MOI-7 • Display network performance characteristics

From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the S in SET_TIME to start blinking: TEST: DETECTOR NETWORK SET-TIME

• Alarm verification/confirmation override

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

• IEC detector cleaned function

SET SYSTEM TIME

• Event (History) log menu • Test Pre-alarm logic • Test ASD detectors

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.)

• Record one summarized trouble for an entire module

Press ENTER when the S in SET_ TIME is blinking to select TEST SET_ TIME.

• Perform testing on input points and simutale alarms

The System shows you the current System time, using a 24-hour clock, and the date: SET TIME = 12:34:56 12/23/20XX

Entering the Test Menu From the Main Menu, use the Left or Right arrow keys to cause the T in TEST to begin blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the System explains the Test function: TO TEST SYSTEM, LOOP & DEVICE

Press HELP again to return to the Main Menu.)

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: TYPE HH:MM:SS MM/DD/YYYY <ENTER>

The Help display tells you to type the time and date, using the numeric keypad, in the following format: hour: minute: seconds_month/day/year, and then to press ENTER to set the time and date. Use the Right and Left arrow keys to skip over a correct digit.

3-43

Operation Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Type the time and date as explained above and press ENTER. The System prints the current time and date on the printer and returns you to the Test menu. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Test: Power Use Test Power to test the System’s battery voltage, AC voltage, and battery charge current. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the P in POWER to start blinking: TEST: GND-FLT POWER

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

Test: Ground Fault Use Test Gnd_flt to test the present condition of the ground fault detection circuitry. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the G in GND_FLT to start blinking: TEST: NETWORK SET TIME GND FLT

DISPLAY POWER

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER when the P is blinking and the menu displays: POWER: MAIN

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: GROUND FAULT TEST

Press HELP again to return to the Test menu.) Press ENTER when the G is blinking and the menu displays: GND FLT: MAIN

From the Ground Fault menu, press ENTER when the M in MAIN is blinking. The System tests dynamically for ground fault and reports the results of the test on the display (OK, PLUS, or MINUS): GROUND FAULT IS MINUS

If the message is other than OK, locate the loop and the device responsible. The display automatically changes to OK when the ground fault problem is corrected. (During this test, the System and its devices remain operational.)

3-44

(To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Display the AC Voltage, Battery Voltage, and Charging Current of the Main System From the Power menu, press ENTER when the M in MAIN is blinking to select Main Power. The System shows the following menu: MAIN: VOLTAGE CURRENT

Press ENTER when the V in VOLTAGE is blinking to display the battery voltage: BATTERY VOLTAGE = X.X VOLTS

Press ENTER again to display the AC voltage: AC VOLTAGE = X VOLTS

Press the Up arrow key to return to the Main Power menu. Use the Right arrow key to cause the C in CURRENT to start blinking and press ENTER. The System shows the battery charge current in amps: BATT CHG CUR = XX.X AMPS

Press the Up arrow key twice to return to the Power menu.

Operation Print the AC Voltage, Battery Voltage, and Charging Current of the Main System From the Power menu, press PRINT when the M in MAIN is blinking to select MAIN POWER. The System will print information in a format similar to the following: Power Supply Statistics at 11:23:52 May 01, 20XX: Battery Voltage = 26.0 volts Charging CUR = 0.5 AMPS

AC VOLTAGE = 113 VOLTS

Test: Device LED Use Test Device_LED to test the LEDs on the System’s analog devices. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the D in DEVICE to start blinking: TEST: LAMP TEST DEVICE LED

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: TURN ON DEVICE LEDs

Test: Lamp Test Use Test Lamp_test to test the LEDs on the alphanumeric display on the MKB-4. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the L in LAMP to start blinking: TEST: GND-FLT POWER LAMP TEST

(If you press HELP at this point, the System explains this function: MKB-4 LAMP TEST

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER when the L is blinking to select TEST LAMP_TEST. The System displays the following menu: LAMP TEST: LED'S DISPLAY

Press ENTER to test the LEDs and the audible on the MKB-4. The LEDs light for 5 seconds and then return to their previous state. To test the alphanumeric display, press the Right arrow key once to cause the D in DISPLAY to start blinking and then press ENTER. The System tests the display and then returns to the Lamp Test menu. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER when the D is blinking to select TEST DEVICE_LED. The System asks you to type the module and device numbers. Type the three-digit module number and the three-digit device number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) The System displays the following menu for the device (the O in ON will be blinking): 001-001 ON OFF

To turn on the LED for that device, press ENTER. The System turns on the LED for that device. Turning on a device LED automatically causes a Trouble to be annunciated. Use the NEXT key to move through the devices until you display the ones whose LEDs you wish to test. Follow the instructions above. When the System has displayed the highest numbered device for the module specified, it returns to the Test menu. To turn on a device LED for a different module, select DEVICE_ LED from the Test menu and follow the preceding instructions. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu, or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

3-45

Operation

Test: MOI Lamp Test Use MOI_lamp_test to test the MOD-16 outputs of an MOI-7. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the M in MOI to start blinking: TEST: DEVICE LED MOI Lamp Test

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER when the O in OVERRIDE is blinking and the menu displays:

OVERRIDE: ALR ALR CONFIRM

Use the Left or Right arrow key to switch between ALR_ and ALR_CONFIRM. (If you press HELP at this point, the System displays: TO TEST MOI-7 / MOD-16 LAMPS

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.) Press ENTER when the M is blinking to select MOI_LAMP_TEST. The System asks you to type the module number. Type the three-digit module number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) If the MOI-7 module is present in CSG-M the MOD-16 outputs will be placed in a 30second lamp test mode. After 30 seconds, these outputs return to their previous state. (To end a menu session and return to the Main Menu, or to leave the menu at any time, press the Up arrow key to go backward one menu each time.)

Test: Network (X-Network, M-Network) This function is used only by Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. engineers to observe network traffic so that they can evaluate the operation of the module communication network.

Test: Override

The System shows the following menu: OVERRIDE: YES NO

A blinking Y in YES indicates that Alarm Verification Override is currently enabled. A blinking N in NO indicates that the Alarm Verification Override is currently disabled. To enable Alarm Verification Override, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the Y in YES to start blinking. Pressing ENTER when the Y in YES is blinking will cause Alarm Verification Override to be enabled. The System will display the following message: OVERRIDE ENABLED

To disable Alarm Verification Override, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the N in NO to start blinking. Pressing ENTER when the N in NO is blinking will cause Alarm Verification Override to be disabled. The System will display the following message:

Use Test Override to override the CSG-M selected options for Alarm Verification and Alarm Confirmation.

OVERRIDE DISABLED

From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the O in OVERRIDE to start blinking.

In either case, if the Alarm Verification option was not selected in CSG-M, the System will display the following message:

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

FEATURE NOT ENABLED IN CSG

OVERRIDE ALARM & CONFIRM

3-46

Override the Alarm Verification CSG-M Selection From the Override menu, press ENTER when the A in ALR_ is blinking to select Alarm Verification.

Operation Override the Alarm Confirmation CSG-M Selection From the Override menu, press ENTER when the A in ALR_CONFIRM is blinking to select Alarm Confirmation.

(If you press HELP at this point, the System displays:

The System shows the following menu:

Press HELP again to return to the above menu.)

OVERRIDE: YES NO

TO INDICATE DETECTOR CLEANED

Press ENTER when the D is blinking to select DET_CLEANED. A blinking Y in YES indicates that Alarm Confirmation Override is enabled. A blinking N in NO indicates that the Alarm Confirmation Override is disabled. To enable Alarm Confirmation Override, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the Y in YES to start blinking. Pressing ENTER when the Y in YES is blinking enables Alarm Confirmation Override. The System will display the following message: OVERRIDE ENABLED

To disable Alarm Confirmation Override, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the N in NO to start blinking. Pressing ENTER when the N in NO is blinking disables Alarm Confirmation Override. The System will display the following message: OVERRIDE DISABLED

In either case, if the Alarm Confirmation option was not selected in CSG-M, the System will display the following message: FEATURE NOT ENABLED IN CSG

The System asks you to type the module and device numbers. Type the three-digit module number and the three-digit device number and press ENTER. (Enter all leading zeros.) After entering the module-device, the MXL-IQ determines if the device is subject to IEC. If the device is not subject to IEC or if IEC is not enabled for the system, error messages display (Device not subject to IEC; IEC not enabled in CSGM). If the device is an IEC detector, the MXL-IQ will display and print the time, date, moduledevice and custom message of the cleaned device.

Test: Event Log See Section 6, MXL-IQ History Log.

Test: Pyro_diags Use Test Pyro-diags to display a series of statistics typically used by Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. to evaluate the operation of the System. A special is required for access to this function.

Test: Pre_alarm Test: Det_Cleaned Use Test Det_cleaned to indicate that a selected detector has been cleaned. This option is only operational if IEC is enabled in the CSG-M (See Appendix F). From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the D in DET_CLEANED to start blinking: TEST: OVERRIDE DET CLEANED

Use Test Pre_alarm to test pre-alarm logic. From the Test menu, use the left or right arrow key to cause the P in Pre_alarm to start blinking: TEST: PRE ALARM

The System asks you for a module number and device number. TYPE IN MODULE & DEVICE:

3-47

Operation Type the three-digit module number and the three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. The System then sends information to force this detector into pre-alarm. Once it prealarms, or after a delay, the MXL-IQ then restores the detector to its proper pre-alarm setting.

Test: ASD_Devices Use Test ASD_Devices to disable ASD parameters and allow timely response to test gas. From the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the A in ASD_Devices to start blinking. (If you press HELP at this point, the system displays: TEST: ASD DETECTORS

Press HELP again to return to the Test menu.) Press ENTER to test the ASD devices present in the system. The System displays: TESTING OF ASD DEVICE ENABLED

Press the ENTER key again and the System displays:

TROUBLE OUT 253 08:25:50 AUG 08, 20XX #9 — CERBERUS PYROTRONICS —, ASD TESTING DISABLED, MXL

If Test ASD_Devices is activated and left alone, the system will automatically disable the test (time out) after four hours.

Test ASD_Devices is inhibited while the system is initializing or resetting.

Test: Summarize Use Test Summarize to ignore known troubles, and instead view one summarized trouble for an entire module. This is typically used during installation and commissioning. Select Summarize and press ENTER. The System displays the following menu: Select Mods

ON

OFF

Test: Summarize - Select_Mods Use Test Summarize Select_Mods to scroll through all installed (CSG-M) module addresses and enable/disable the summarize feature for each module address. Choose Select_Mods and press ENTER. The System displays the following: 001

YES

NO

Press NEXT and the System displays:

TESTING OF ASD DEVICE DISABLED

002

Press the ENTER key to toggle between Testing Enabled (Trouble In) and Testing Disabled (Trouble Out). When toggling between Testing Enabled and Testing Disabled, there is a three minute time period that separates the two states.

The System flashes the currently active summarize selection for the module address. The operator may then press the right or left arrow keys to highlight either YES or NO and then press the ENTER key to accept and program the selection. When ENTER is pressed, the System scrolls to the next installed module address. The Up arrow key terminates the Select_Mods mode.

Activating the ASD_Devices command will post a Trouble into the system which will be printed out as: TROUBLE IN 253 08:24:53 AUG 08, 20XX #8 — CERBERUS PYROTRONICS —, ASD TESTING ENABLED, MXL

3-48

Pressing ENTER a second time will cause the following message to be printed out:

YES

NO

All Select_Mods selections remain intact until the System is turned off, even if summarize mode is toggled.

Operation • One trouble is posted per module address, regardless of how many troubles are detected at that module address.

and turns on the Partial System Disable LED. The System displays one summarized trouble for the total system.

• A trouble is not posted unless at least one trouble is detected at that module address.

Test: Manual_Activate

• The trouble report is consistent with existing MXL-IQ trouble messages and the text reads Troubles summarized. • The MXL-IQ only reports TRBL-INs when summary mode is enabled at an address. • Alarm, supervisory, security, and status event reporting are not effected. Modules which are NOT selected for summary report their troubles as usual, even if summary mode is turned on for other module addresses. When a module address is summarized, individually occurring troubles are not broadcast to XNET; the single Troubles summarized trouble is broadcast to XNET. The Troubles summarized trouble is implemented as any other system trouble, being logged to history, taking up one of the 300 trouble slots, and appearing in List Troubles requests. All summarize selections are unaffected through RESET and default to CSG-M setting at power up. Test: Summarize - OFF When Summarize OFF is selected, the System annunciates the following trouble: System Commissioning Mode TRBL OUT

and turns off the Partial System Disable LED. Preexisting Troubles summarized events remain and the System reverts to normal trouble reporting and processing for all new troubles. Test: Summarize - ON When Summarize ON is selected, the System annunciates the following trouble: System Commissioning Mode TRBL IN

Use Test Manual_Activate to: • Perform testing on input points and the associated output logic expected when the point is activated. • Generate alarms and associated output activations. Select Manual_Activate and press ENTER. The System asks you for a module number and device number. Type In Module & Device:

-

Type the three-digit module number and three-digit device number using the numeric keypad and press ENTER. Upon entering the device address, the System performs as follows based on the point type: MANUAL INPUT POINT ACTIVATION No Input Point Error message. Analog Smoke System issues command to place device into the alarm state via Detectors sensitivity adjustment. Device then reports alarm as if an actual alarm occurred. Associated outputs follow. All Other Inputs

System will not issue any command to device, but will synthesize the reporting of alarm in by the device. Associated outputs follow.

Test: Manual_Activate - Test This provides a remote switch that upon activation/deactivation of the TRI, the MXL-IQ reads the module-device address provided and performs the operations outlined above. This use is primarily for, but not limited to, testing intelligent duct detectors.

3-49

Operation

3-50

+D=FJAH

4

Testing and Troubleshooting SYSTEM TEST Important: If the System is connected to the Fire Department, or activates an external System (for example, a leased line connection), disarm the related outputs before servicing to prevent activation. Notify persons in the facility that you are conducting a System test so that they can ignore any alarms that sound during testing. Be sure to reset the System at the end of the inspection.

To ensure maximum safety, follow the procedure described below. To ensure proper and reliable operation, we recommend the following inspection and testing schedule:

Every Six Months 1. Check the sensitivity of each detector, using the List Sensitivity menu (See page 3-26). Refer to Appendix B for a list of acceptable detector sensitivity ranges. 2. If the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED is lit, check that all appropriate detectors are armed, using the Control Arm/dis menu (See page 3-38). 3. Activate a detector or alarm-initiating device. To test for GoNo Go operation,

use CERBERUS PYROTRONICSTM Test Gas P/N 315-282747, following the instructions on the label. Check that the detector LED lights and that the proper indication is given at the Control . 4. that an alarm can be acknowledged and that the System can be silenced and reset (See Acknowledge Alarms on page 3-18). 5. the time and date setting of the System clock (See Test Set_Time on page 3-43).

Every Year 1. Check that the System operates as programmed by CSG-M and in accordance with specifications. 2. Perform any other applicable tests required by national or local fire codes.

Fuse Replacement Fuse ratings are as follows:

Fuse F1 F2 F3 F4

For Main Power Battery CZM-1B6 Power 24V Output

Rating 8A, 3 AG, Normal Blow 15A, 3 AG, Normal Blow 2A, 3 AG, Normal Blow 15A, 3AG, Normal Blow

The fuses are located on the upper portion of the SMB-2 (See Figure 2, page 1-4).

4-1

Testing and Troubleshooting

TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting both the external wiring and the MXL-IQ System wiring follows the steps in System Function Checkout on page 2-16. If a fault occurs, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide. Locate the type of fault or any trouble message displayed and follow the directions in the Corrective Action column.

Sometimes you can locate a fault quickly using the Troubleshooting Guide. When this is not possible, continue with the checkout procedure on page 2-16 and then the Troubleshooting Guide until all faults and troubles are corrected. Then repeat the checkout procedure to ensure that no additional problems were introduced and that the original problem was corrected.

TABLE 19 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE This guide assumes that all modules, devices, and wiring are installed. Note:

Do NOT change modules or wiring unless power is OFF. If available, use your printer during troubleshooting operations.

SYMPTOM 1. POWER LED is not lit; display on MKB-4 is blank.

PROBABLE CAUSE

CORRECTIVE ACTION

No AC Battery

Check AC and battery. Check fuses F1 and F2 on the SMB-2 and the circuitbreaker on the MPS-6. Check AC and battery wiring. If power connections are OK, check the cable between the SMB-2 and MKB-4 for proper installation.

2. POWER LED is on, MKB-4 display is blank.

Problem on the MKB-4.

Adjust contrast control R14 on the ANN-1 board. Remove the MKB-4 and check cable from ANN-1 to the display. If MKB-4 is defective, replace it.

3. MKB-4 display shows the following default message: CERBERUS PYROTRONICS MXL

Improper address on MKB-4

Correct address setting on the MKB-4 using S1. See the installation instructions for the MKB-4, page 2-4.

No communication between SMB-2 and MKB-4. Defective MKB-4.

Check the cable between the SMB-2 and the MKB-4. Replace the cable if defective. Replace the MKB-4.

If MOM-2/4 installed, defective network modules(s). Defective SMB-2

Disconnect the MOM-2/4 from the SMB-2. If probelm resolved, reconnect MOM-2/4 and remove all modules from MOM-2/4. Reinstall all modules one at a time. Replace any that cause the problems to reoccur. Replace SMB-2

4. Device troubles on analog loops.

Errors in loop wiring and installation of devices.

Check loop wiring for shorts, opens, etc. using the Field Wiring Checkout Guide (page 2-11). Check that all analog devices are I or IL Series devices, or are CZM-1B6s. See the list of compatible devices in the appendixes. Check that all devices are installed. Check that all devices installed comply with the configuration printout from CSG-M. Check printed trouble list for ID troubles and correct device IDs as required. Check devices using the FPI-32 Programmer Tester. Replace devices that fail to respond.

4-2

Testing and Troubleshooting TABLE 19 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued) SYMPTOM 5. Trouble with notification appliance circuits (NACs).

PROBABLE CAUSE

CORRECTIVE ACTION

End-of-line resistor improperly or not installed.

Check that the end-of-line resistor is 2.2K, ½W and is installed according to the instructions.

Notification appliances improperly installed.

Check notification appliances for presence of polarizing diodes and correct device wiring. Check NACs for proper wiring (shorts, opens, etc.). Use the Field Wiring Checkout Guide, page 2-11.

6. Output devices connected to System relays do not work.

7. CZM-1B6 reports a trouble.

Incompatible notification appliance connected.

Check P/N 315-096363 for a list of compatible notification appliances. Replace incompatible devices.

Error in control logic functions.

Check the logic functions using the printout from CSG-M; correct and reload the System from CSG-M into the SMB-2.

Power source for ouput devices missing or not connected.

Check that the power source is connected and that power is available.

Improper wiring of connected devices.

Check that output devices are properly wired.

Connected devices are not compatible with power source.

Check that power source and ouput devices are compatible.

No power to CZM-1B6.

On the SMB-2, check fuse F3. At the CZM-1B6 check power input; DC power must be 16-31 VDC. Check polarity.

Wiring error on initiating device circuit. 8. Modules in MOM-2/4 do not work.

9. CSM-4 does not respond to output logic commands.

Check for opens or incorrect or missing end-of-line resistor (4.7K, ¼W).

No power to MOM-2/4.

Check power cable connectors between the SMB-2 (P3) and the MOM-2/4 (P5). Replace the power cable, if defective.

No communications between SMB-2 and MOM-2/4.

Check communications cable connections between the SMB-2 (P6) and the MOM-2/4 (P7). Replace the communications cable, if defective.

Modules are not properly seated in edge connectors.

Remove and reseat all modules.

Modules are not properly addressed.

Address the modules correctly using the printed configuration from CSG-M (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381).

Fuses are blown.

Check wiring for shorts using the Field Wiring Checkout Guide (page 2-11). Replace fuses.

CSM-4 is improperly configured.

Check and correct the configuration using the installation instructions for the CSM-4 (P/N 315-090854) and the printed configuration from CSG-M (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381).

Incompatible notification appliances are connected.

Check P/N 315-096363 for a list of compatible notification applicances. Replace incompatible devices.

Error in control logic functions.

Check the logic functions using the printout from CSG-M; correct and reload the System from CSG-M into the SMB-2 (See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381).

Defective CSM-4.

Replace CSM-4.

4-3

Testing and Troubleshooting TABLE 19 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued) SYMPTOM

PROBABLE CAUSE

CORRECTIVE ACTION

10. CRM-4 does not respond to output logic commands.

Power source for device is missing or not connected.

Check that the power source to the CRM-4 is connected and that power is available.

Error in control logic functions.

11. Zone troubles from CZM-4.

Check the logic functions using the printout from CSG-M; correct and reload the System from CSG-M into the SMB-2 ( See CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381. )

Connected devices are incompatible with power source.

Check that the power source and output devices are compatible.

Defective CRM-4.

Replace CRM-4.

Errors in initiating device circuit wiring.

Check for wiring errors using the Field Wiring Checkout Guide ( page 2-11) and the installation instructions for the CZM-4 ( page 2-14) . Check that the end-of-line capacitor is the proper value and is properly connected. Unused zones must have end-of-line capacitors installed on MOM-2/4 screw terminals ( 50 MFD, 50 VDC polarized electrolytic capacitor) . See the installation instructions for the CZM-4 ( page 2-14) .

Defective CZM-4. Replace the CZM-4.

4-4

+D=FJAH

5

Walktest Operating Instructions INTRODUCTION

A Walktest of the MXL-IQ System enables a qualified technician to test the operation of input points on the MXL-IQ with or without disabling the entire fire alarm system. Testing can be either silent or with audible in the following ways: 1. Entire system 2. ALD loop (60 subaddresses) 3. CZM-4 module (4 zones) 4. Conventional zone (individual CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 zone) 5. MOI-7 (MID-16) inputs (128 subaddresses) If a printer is installed, a printed record of the test is made. The Walktest is available with MXL-IQ Operating Software. You must enter your 1-5 digit before you can use the Walktest functions. Enter the Walktest through the MXL-IQ Main Menu (See Chapter 3, Operating Instructions). The MXL-IQ Main Menu structure with Walktest included is:

The table below shows the selections in the Walktest Menu and their related help messages.

TABLE 20 Walktest Menu WALKTEST

HELP MESSAGE

System wAUD

Test Full System with AUDs

Loop wAUD

Test ALD Loop/MOI-7 (MID-16 group)/CZM-4 Module wAUDs

LIST

Zone wAUD

Test CZM-4/CZM-1B6 Zone with AUDs

CONTROL

Sytem SIL

Silent Test Full System

TEST

Loop SIL

Silent Test ALD Loop/MOI-7 (MID-16 group)/CZM-4 Module wAUDs

WALKTEST

Zone SIL

Silent Test CZM-4/CZM-1B6 Zone

Cancel

Cancel Walktest in progress

Extend

Reset test timer to 4 hours left

MXL-IQ Main Menu ACKNOWLEDGE

5-1

Walktest Operating Instructions

System w/AUD

Cancel

Select this option to walktest all CZM-4 zones, CZM-1B6 zones, MID-16 inputs, and ALD inputs with audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions.

Select this option from the menu while in the Walktest mode to set the Walktest timer at the 1 minute left in Walktest mark. This allows the MXL-IQ to complete Walktest sequencing on devices placed in test (alarm) just before cancellation. The MXL-IQ completes the final 60 seconds of the Walktest as indicated in Walktest Ending Sequence (See page 5-4).

System SIL Select this option to walktest all CZM-4 zones, CZM-1B6 zones, MID-16 inputs, and ALD inputs without audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions.

Extend Select this option from the menu while in the Walktest mode to reset the Walktest timer to the 4 hours remaining mark.

Loop w/AUD Select this option to walktest input devices on a specific ALD loop, MOI-7 (MID-16) group, or on all four zones of a CZM-4 with audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions for the ALD loop or CZM-4 conventional zones in Walktest.

Loop SIL Select this option to walktest input devices on a specific ALD loop, MOI-7 (MID-16) group, or all four zones of a CZM-4 without audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions for the ALD loop or CZM-4 conventional zones in Walktest.

Zone wAUD Select this option to walktest an individual conventional zone (CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 zone) with audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions for the conventional zone in Walktest.

Zone SIL Select this option to walktest an individual conventional zone (CZM-1B6 or CZM-4) without audible to the technician. This mode inhibits the MXL-IQ from annunciating real alarm conditions for the conventional zone in Walktest.

5-2

WARNING A device placed in Walktest is disconnected from its usual functions. Alarm causing devices in Walktest DO NOT CAUSE ALARMS until the MXL-IQ is out of the trouble of Walktest.

Suggested Walktest Procedure

In order to reduce the chance of problems, the following procedure must be followed before performing the Walktest. 1. Inform the person in charge of the MXL-IQ fire alarm system that a Walktest is to be performed and that part or all of the fire detection system will be disabled. It is also advisable (or may be required) to notify the fire department of the test. 2. Use the MXL-IQ’s LIST menu to obtain a printout of the device types and custom messages for ALL modules to be walktested. 3. Review the list with the person in charge of the fire protection equipment to ensure that the custom messages provide adequate information for locating and testing the devices in question. 4. Disable the ASD applications in the system using ASD_Device in the TEST menu prior to performing the walktest.

Walktest Operating Instructions Once the test ASD device option has been enabled using the test menu, the tester should wait 3 minutes before attempting to test the ASD devices. This will ensure that the ASD R-Algorithm has been disabled for the test. When the test is complete, press ASD_Device again to re-enable ASD R-Algorithm, or it will automatically re-enable after 4 hours. The System will not reset if the ASD devices are still in the disabled state. 5. Initiate Walktest. Test devices in a predetermined, orderly sequence. 6. When the Walktest is complete (timed out/canceled), acknowledge the OUT OF TROUBLE condition and reset the MXL-IQ. When the system indicates SYSTEM NORMAL, the test is complete. WARNING: A device placed in Walktest is disconnected from its usual functions. Alarm causing devices in Walktest do NOT cause alarms until the MXL-IQ is out of the trouble of Walktest. In both the silent (SIL) and audible (wAUD) Walktest modes, information is displayed on the Control LCD and printed on the printer (if a printer is installed). The audible (wAUD) mode also provides audible to the technician with the testing of each input device. Audible is NOT included on circuits with zone coded audibles. A system with only zone coded audibles ALWAYS results in a silent Walktest.

NOTE: The Walktest Ending Sequence (See page 5-4) occurs with audible warnings in the audible Walktest modes. NOTE: The MXL-IQ will not allow a walktest to be initiated if there are Alarms or Supervisory events in the event queues.

Walktest the System To place all CZM-4 zones, MID-16 inputs, and ALD input devices in Walktest, follow the procedure below: • Move the cursor to the S in System wAUD for a Walktest with audible or to the S in System SIL for a silent Walktest. • Press ENTER.

• The following events take place: - the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED lights - the TROUBLE LED flashes - the internal audible sounds - the Walktest activated trouble for the MXL-IQ records on the trouble list - if a printer is installed, the trouble is also printed • The LCD display on the MKB-4 reads: In Walktest. Normal operation disabled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER or wait 60 seconds and the display reads: Walktest expires in 4 hrs unless canceled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER, or wait 60 seconds and the MXL-IQ returns to the Walktest menu. (The MXL-IQ is in system Walktest.) The LCD indicates the time remaining in Walktest in the last five positions on the display. The time is indicated in HH:MM (hours:minutes) until less than one hour remains, then it is indicated in MM:SS (minutes:seconds). • Locate the device to be tested and place that device in alarm (or trouble). When the event is reported to the MXL-IQ, the following sequence occurs: 1. When the System is in the audible Walktest mode, all silenceable and nonsilenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed sound the code, depending on how the device is used in the CSG-M. The codes are: EVENT

CODE

ALARM

2 seconds on, then off

SUPERVISORY

2 one-second pulses (on-off)

TROUBLE

4 seconds on, then off

SECURITY

4 one-second pulses (on-off)

STATUS/OTHER

6 seconds on, then off

5-3

Walktest Operating Instructions 2. When a printer is installed, the printer prints a message similar to the following: WLK [event type] IN/OUT device address time/date device type, custom message, trouble type (if applicable)

• Press ENTER. • The MXL-IQ prompts the for the module number to be tested.

3. The LCD displays the device address, custom message, WLK IN/OUT [event type], and device type for 8 seconds.

• Enter the desired module network address, including all leading zeros, followed by ENTER.

4. If the ALD device has an LED, it turns on for 30 seconds to provide additional to the technician.

• If the network address entered is not an ALD, MOI-7, or CZM-4, the message Invalid type for Walktest is displayed for 2 seconds on the LCD. The display then returns to the Walktest menu.

If the MXL-IQ detects multiple events, they are automatically spaced 8-10 seconds apart to allow for separation of the coding. Up to five simultaneous events may be queued for processing.

• If the module type is an ALD, MOI-7, or CZM-4 in the CSG-M, the following events take place:

Walktest Ending Sequence

- the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED lights

NOTE: This sequence does not occur in Silent Walktest.

- the TROUBLE LED flashes

When 5 minutes remain in Walktest, all silenceable and non-silenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed cycle on-off five times (1 second on) to indicate that the Walktest will time out in 5 minutes. This occurs in the audible mode only. When 1 minute remains, event coding and the processing of devices to the LCD are suspended. If a device is alarmed, it is cycled silently through the resetting sequence. When 45 seconds remain, all silenceable and non-silenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed cycle on-off until Walktest times out. Do NOT continue to walktest devices. This 45 second period of no new Walktest events ensures that all devices are reset when the Walktest timer expires and the System returns to normal operation. Alarming a device during this period might result in the reporting of erroneous events when the system returns to normal operation.

Walktest Entire ALD Loop, MOI-7 (MID-16), or CZM-4 Module To place an ALD loop of input devices, an entire set of MID-16 (MOI-7) inputs, or all four zones of a CZM-4 module in Walktest, follow the procedure below:

5-4

• Move the cursor to the L in Loop wAUD for a Walktest with audible or to Loop SIL for a silent Walktest.

- the internal audible sounds - the Walktest activated trouble for the module appears on the trouble list - if a printer is installed, the trouble is also printed • The LCD display on the MKB-4 reads: In Walktest. Normal operation disabled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER or wait 60 seconds and the display reads: Walktest expires in 4 hrs unless canceled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER or wait 60 seconds and the MXL-IQ will return to the Walktest menu. (The MXL-IQ is in system Walktest.) The LCD indicates the time remaining in Walktest in the last five positions on the display. The time is indicated in HH:MM (hours:minutes) until less than 1 hour remains; then it is indicated in MM:SS (minutes:seconds). • Locate the device to be tested and place that device in alarm (or trouble). When the event is reported to the MXL-IQ, the following sequence occurs:

Walktest Operating Instructions 1. When the System is in the audible Walktest mode, all silenceable and nonsilenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed sound the code, depending on how the device is used in the CSG-M. The codes are as follows: EVENT

CODE

ALARM

2 seconds on, then off

SUPERVISORY

2 one-second pulses (on-off)

TROUBLE

4 seconds on, then off

SECURITY

4 one-second pulses (on-off)

STATUS/OTHER

6 seconds on, then off

2. When a printer is installed, the printer prints a message similar to the following: WLK [event type] IN/OUT device address time/date device type, custom message, trouble type (if applicable)

3. The LCD displays the device address, custom message, WLK IN/OUT [event type], and device type for 8 seconds. 4. If the ALD device has an LED, it turns on for 30 seconds to provide additional to the technician. If the MXL-IQ detects multiple events, they are automatically spaced 8-10 seconds apart to allow for separation of the coding. Up to five simultaneous events may be queued for processing.

Walktest Ending Sequence NOTE: This sequence does not occur in Silent Walktest. When 5 minutes remain in Walktest, all silenceable and non-silenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed cycle on-off five times (1 second on) to indicate that the Walktest will time out in 5 minutes. This occurs in the audible mode only. When 1 minute remains, event coding and the processing of devices to the LCD are suspended. If a device is alarmed, it is cycled silently through the resetting sequence.

When 45 seconds remain, all silenceable and non-silenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed cycle on-off until Walktest times out. Do NOT continue to walktest devices. This 45 second period of no new Walktest events ensures that all devices are reset when the Walktest timer expires and the System returns to normal operation. Alarming a device during this period might result in the reporting of erroneous events when the system returns to normal operation.

NOTE: If an alarm or supervisory is reported from a device that is NOT in Walktest, the Walktest is suspended immediately. No further Walktest events are annunciated or coded. The Walktest remains running in the background of the MXL-IQ until it times out or is canceled. WARNING: When performing a partial system Walktest, DO NOT TEST any devices that are not in the Walktest as this will cause an alarm in the system.

Walktest Individual CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 Zone To place an individual CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 zone in Walktest, follow the procedure below: • Move the cursor to the Z in Zone wAUD for a Walktest with audible or Z SIL for a silent Walktest. • Press ENTER. • The MXL-IQ prompts the for the module and device number to be tested. • Enter the desired network address, including all leading zeros, followed by ENTER. • If the network address entered is not a CZM-4 or CZM-1B6 zone, the message Invalid type for Walktest is displayed for 2 seconds on the LCD. The display then returns to the Walktest menu. • If the module type is a CZM-1B6 or CZM-4 zone in the CSG-M, the following events take place:

5-5

Walktest Operating Instructions - the PARTIAL SYSTEM DISABLE LED lights

2. When a printer is installed, the printer prints a message similar to the following:

- the TROUBLE LED flashes

WLK [event type] IN/OUT device address time/date device type, custom message, trouble type (if applicable)

- the internal audible sounds - the Walktest activated trouble for the zone records on the trouble list - if a printer is installed, the trouble is also printed • The LCD display on the MKB-4 reads: In Walktest Normal operation disabled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER or wait 60 seconds and the display reads: Walktest expires in 4hrs unless canceled. ENTER to continue.

• Press ENTER or wait 60 seconds and the MXL-IQ returns to the Walktest menu. (The MXL-IQ is in system Walktest.) The LCD indicates the time remaining in Walktest in the last five positions on the display. The time is indicated in HH:MM (hours:minutes) until less than 1 hour remains, then it is indicated in MM:SS (minutes:seconds). • Locate the device to be tested and place that device in alarm (or trouble). When the event is reported to the MXL-IQ, the following sequence occurs: 1. When the System is in the audible Walktest mode, all silenceable and nonsilenceable audibles that are not already active or disarmed sound the code, depending on the device usage in the CSG-M. The codes are as follows:

5-6

EVENT

CODE

ALARM

2 seconds on, then off

SUPERVISORY

2 one-second pulses (on-off)

TROUBLE

4 seconds on, then off

SECURITY

4 one-second pulses (on-off)

STATUS/OTHER

6 seconds on, then off

3. The LCD displays the device address, custom message, WLK IN/OUT [event type], and device type for 8 seconds. 4. If the ALD device has an LED, it turns on for 30 seconds to provide additional to the technician. If the MXL-IQ detects multiple events, they are automatically spaced 8-10 seconds apart to allow for separation of the coding. Up to five simultaneous events may be queued for processing. When 5 minutes remain, the system begins the Walktest Ending Sequence (See page 5-5). NOTE: If an alarm or supervisory is reported from a device that is NOT in Walktest, the Walktest is suspended immediately. No further Walktest events are annunciated or coded. The Walktest remains running in the background of the MXL-IQ until it times out or is canceled.

WARNING: When performing a partial system Walktest, DO NOT TEST any devices that are not in the Walktest as this will cause an alarm in the system.

+D=FJAH

6

History Log The MXL-IQ history system has five major parts. They are: 1. CSG-M options that control the type and number of events the MXL-IQ records. 2. Logging lists that record MXL-IQ hardware events. 3. Event viewing and listing in the MXL-IQ through the MKB-4 and attached printer. 4. History removal and collation outside the MXL-IQ. 5. Report generation and analysis on an external PC.

CSG-M History Options

INTRODUCTION

The CSG-M gives the designer a set of options to use for operating the history system. The designer must first decide whether or not to use the history option. If he chooses to use it, he must select the mode of logging and which event types to include in the log. The History Recording Options are selected from the Options, System Message, Authorizations menu. (See Screen 1.) To access the history option, move the cursor to highlight History Recording Options and press ENTER. The history recording option selection screen is then displayed as shown in Screen 2, page 6-2.

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316848 free Options, System Message, Authorizations

CONFIG => TEST1

Options, System Message, Authorizations Other System Flags History Recording Options System Holidays

Press First Letter or Move Cursor to Highlight Selection, then ENTER

Screen 1 Options, System Message, Authorizations

6-1

History Log

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316852 free History Recording Options

History mode -------------------> Log alarms ---------------------> Log troubles -------------------> Log supervisories --------------> Log securities -----------------> Log status ---------------------> Log verification ---------------> Log output ---------------------> Log resets ---------------------> Log block acks. ----------------> Log audible changes ------------> Log manual sens. changes -------> Log logic sens. changes --------> Log arm/disarm -----------------> Log energize/deenergize --------> Log time changes ---------------> Log s ------------------> Log overrides ------------------> Enable History Log Via MKB Menu >

CONFIG => TEST1

Small YES YES YES YES NO NO NO YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES YES NO NO

Move Cursor to Select, ENTER to TOGGLE

ESC = Prev. Menu

Screen 2 History Recording Options

Screen 2 shows the default conditions for the history option when it is selected for the first time. Keep in mind that the external data base may not contain all events that were ever detected. The completeness of the data base depends on whether the system operator extracts all event formation before it is lost.

Logging Methods

The MXL-IQ has two mutually exclusive ways to log events: 1. Small list 2. Circular list

6-2

Small List Logging In the small list logging mode, the MXL-IQ stores up to 818 events (See Screen 3) in non-volatile memory. Non-volatile memory is memory that is not lost when the power is removed.

When the event storage area becomes 80% full, a system trouble begins. • the trouble audible sounds • the trouble indicator lights • the message Event Log 80% full shows on the LCD display • this trouble operates like any other trouble in the system

When the event storage area becomes 90% full, a new system trouble begins.

History Log • the trouble audible sounds • the trouble indicator lights • the message Event Log 90% full shows on the LCD display • this trouble operates like any other trouble in the system

When the event log is full, an new trouble condition occurs which causes the trouble audible to activate. • the message Log FULL, Events will be lost appears on the display • upon reset this trouble reappears, replacing the 90% trouble message • when the log is full, all new events are lost This system encourages removing history information into an external data base before the log overflows.

Circular Logging In the circular logging mode, the MXL-IQ guarantees that the most current 500

events are stored in non-volatile memory. Once all available storage is used, the oldest history entries are replaced by newer ones. It is assumed that the end selects this mode because he does not wish to maintain an external history data base. Therefore, only two warning troubles are issued: 1. When the number of recorded events reaches 80% of the total. 2. When the number of recorded events reaches 90% of the total. Once this trouble is acknowledged, it disappears until 80% of events is reached in the next cycle. Using the circular logging mode does not prevent the storage of history information into an external data base. However, there is a high probability of loosing old events because of the limited warnings given when events are about to be overwritten. Beginning with MXL-IQ Rev. 6.0, the can suppress the Circular History Log Full Trouble. This option must be set in CSG-M and is only available if the history is in circular mode.

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316852 free DISPLAY MXL-IQ Info

CONFIG => TEST1

MXL-IQ INFO: MXL-IQ ROM Version -------------------> MXL-IQ Main Board Version ------------> MXL-IQ Minimum Allowable Board Ver.---> RAM size -----------------------------> EEROM size ---------------------------> MXL-IQ Dictionary Version ------------> MXL-IQ Alt. Dictionary Version--------> History Memory Available -------------> IEC Storage Memory Available --------->

Rev. 1.00 2 Rev. 1.00 163840 bytes 114688 bytes 0 0 818 (11) elements (used) 8189 bytes

PROGRAMMING INFO: Configuration Source Filename --------> Configuration Size -------------------> Last Programming Date ----------------> Configuration Revision Level ---------> Programming Info CHECKSUM ------------>

TEST1 2802 bytes Wed Mar 22 15:28:16 20XX 215 1085

ANY KEY TO CONTINUE

Screen 3 Display MXL-IQ Info

6-3

History Log Logging Item Selection The system designer can log one or many event types. The selection is determined by the system requirements, the amount of event storage, and the external data base design. The following list summarizes event types that can be selected. * ALARMS * TROUBLES * SUPERVISORIES * SECURITIES STATUS CHANGES DEVICE VERIFICATION OUTPUT ACTIVATIONS * RESET * BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE * AUDIBLE CONTROL SET SENSITIVITY AUTO SET SENSITIVITY * ARM/DISARM * ENERGIZE/DE-ENERGIZE * SET TIME

System Message Authorization, then select History Recording Options. From History Recording Options, move the cursor down to the line that reads Enable History Log Via MKB Menu, and select YES to compile the CSG-M program and it to the MXL-IQ. (Refer to Screen 2.)

From the MKB Menu Go to the TEST menu, move the cursor to the right until it highlights the Event-Log Menu item, and press Enter to bring up the submenu for MXL History. Move the cursor within the submenu to either the left or right to highlight the Hist_Ctrl item to turn on/off the History, or Hist_Erase to erase History. Notice that if the CSG-M system option Enable History Log Via MKB Menu is set to NO, these submenus are not accessible. History turned on or off using the MKB menus is unaffected through RESET, and defaults to the setting in CSG-M upon power-up. Pressing ENTER while the cursor is on Hist_Erase displays the following message on the MKB asking for confirmation: Enter to proceed, other key to abort

* OVERRIDE *The items marked with an asterisk are set as default when the logging option is first selected. At least one event type must be selected.

MKB Menu Option to Enable, Disable and Erase History

Effective with MXL-IQ Revision 6.0, this option allows the with the highest level to turn on, turn off, or erase the History, provided that this system option has been enabled in the CSG-M and the History mode is other than NONE (that is, either small or circular).

Enabling the History Option in CSG-M From the Main Menu, select System Configuration Edit, then select Options,

6-4

Pressing ENTER erases the History section in the flash no matter what state the History is currently in (manually turned on or off); pressing any other key aborts the action. Manual manipulation of History using the MKB is logged in History as in the following examples: History Manually Erased History Manually Turned off History Manually Turned on

NOTES: 1. The operator should the history log for future reference before erasing the MXL-IQ’s History, since once the history is erased it cannot be undeleted. 2. The history menu options do not alter the history mode selected in the CSG-M.

History Log

Local History Log Query

There is a limited set of query selection and filter options available within the MXL-IQ. More complex options are only possible using an IBM PC that is running the MXL-IQ history program. The can get history formation from the MKB-4 control by choosing the TEST menu, selecting EVENT_LOG, and pressing ENTER. A submenu of filter selections is then displayed. The choices are as follows: Alrm_Only Only display or print alarm events Trbl_Only Only display or print trouble events Superv_Only Only display or print supervisory events Security_Only Only display or print supervisory events All_events Display or print all recorded history events Hist_Ctrl Use to turn History on/off Hist_Erase Use to Erase History • If the makes a selection from the filter menu using the ENTER key of the MKB-4, the output goes to the LCD display. • If the filter menu is selected using the PRINT key of the MKB-4, then the output goes to the system printer. • If the group of events selected is empty, then the MXL-IQ displays or prints, as appropriate, NO HISTORY ITEMS FOUND.

Cursor left or right until the desired filter type (See Query Filters, below) is reached and then press ENTER to display to the LCD, or PRINT to print on the MXL-IQ system printer. The MXL-IQ asks for a starting date and time. If a time is entered, it suppresses the display or printing of older events. This initial display of time and date indicates the oldest history event recorded in memory. If the operator presses the ENTER key without making any numeric input, then all events in the log are selected.

Query Filters A limited set of event type filters is available from the MXL-IQ control . The mutually exclusive filters are: ALARMS The Alrm_Only filter selection displays or prints incoming alarms, alarm acknowledgments, audible control, and resets. This set of events gives the operator a clear picture of the important events that constitute an alarm condition. TROUBLES The Trbl_Only filter displays or prints troubles and resets. SUPERVISORIES The Superv_Only filter displays or prints supervisories and resets. SECURITIES The Security_Only filter displays or prints securities, device arms, device disarms, and resets. ALL The All_events filter displays or prints all events.

Query Selection The MXL-IQ s one query selection option when generating listings or printouts from the MXL-IQ control .

HISTORY ON/OFF The Hist_Ctrl filter turns the History events on/off.

From the TEST menu, move the cursor to the EVENT_LOG item and press the ENTER key to select history information. The MXL-IQ responds with a submenu that allows an event type filter to be selected.

HISTORY ERASE The Hist_Erase filter erases the History events.

6-5

History Log

Navigating The History Display

When the operator selects the LCD display mode, the NEXT and HOLD keys are used to navigate through the log list. When the history log list first displays, the oldest history event shows in the display. Use the NEXT key to select the next newest event in the list and the HOLD key to select the next oldest event in the list. When either end of the history log list is reached, the message End of History List displays. Continuing to press either key wraps the list to the oldest or newest event, as appropriate.

001÷001 The module/device address. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. 1ST FLOOR EAST WING The custom message assigned to this input. 321 The history log sequence number. ACK Optional field indicating that this is an acknowledgment event. This field is blank when the initiating event is displayed.

The MXL-IQ remains in the history log list display mode until the up arrow key is pressed. As with all menu operations, if no keys are depressed for one minute, the current activity is canceled.

12:24:48 Mar 10, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

History Display Formats

IN

History events display one at a time, in reverse chronological order, with the oldest event displayed first. History event displays use both lines of the LCD.

OUT DEVICE REPORTS RETURN TO NORMAL STATE

A division symbol (÷) in the first line of the display gives the operator a quick visual cue that the MXL-IQ is in the history display mode. If the history event begins with a module/device (mmm/ddd) code, the display is formatted as: mmm÷ddd

IN The event direction. The possible event direction types are:

ON

DEVICE REPORTS ACTIVE STATE

DEVICE TURNED ON

OFF DEVICE TURNED OFF DIS

DEVICE DISARMED (always occurs with ARM)

ALR The event type. The possible abbreviations for Device Event types are: ALR

ALARMS

TBL

TROUBLES

If the line begins with an event type name, such as Block Acknowledge, then the first line of the display reads:

SUP SUPERVISORY

mmm÷

SAT

STATUS

VFY



BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE

where mmm is the module number of the MKB-4 or SMB that caused the event.

Device Event A device event is any alarm, trouble, supervisory, or security input change of state. This change of state can be into or out of an active condition. The LCD displays: 001÷001 1ST FLOOR EAST WING ACK 321 12:24:48 Mar 10,20XX IN ALR

6-6

Where:

SEC SECURITY

DEV DEVICE (used for ON and OFF indications) ARM DEVICE ARMED (disarmed when used with DIS)

Reset Event A reset event is any cold, warm, manual, or watchdog reset. The LCD displays:

History Log 253÷ 10100

WATCHDOG RESET 1:22:04 Mar 10,20XX

Where: 253÷ The module address where the reset occurred. In this example, the watchdog reset originated on the SMB-2 at fixed address 253. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. WATCHDOG RESET The message describing the type of reset that occurred. The possible messages for this field are: COLD RESET WARM RESET MANUAL RESET WATCHDOG RESET 10100 The history log sequence number. 1:22:04 Mar 10,20XX The time that the event was logged.

SET TIME The message describing this display as a set time event. 10100 The history log sequence number. 2:00:30 Mar 10, 20XX The date and time in the MXL-IQ before the SET TIME function was performed. 2:10:45 Mar 10, 20XX The time when the event was logged. Note that this is also the new date and time in the MXL-IQ as a result of this operation.

Block Acknowledge Event A block acknowledge event occurs when the alarm, trouble, supervisory, or security acknowledge key is actuated on an MKB-4 in a system that allows block acknowledgments. The LCD displays: 251÷ All Alarms Acknowledged 4211 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

Where:

Set Time Event A set time event records any change to the MXL-IQ real time clock. There are two occasions when a set time event occurs. They are: 1. When an operator goes into the TEST menu and manually changes the real time clock using the SET_TIME function. 2. At the end of a CSG-M configuration . The LCD displays: 251÷ SET TIME - 2:00:30 Mar 10,20XX 10100 2:10:45 Mar 10,20XX

Where: 251÷ The module address where the time change occurred. In this example, the set time originated from the MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display.

251÷ The module address where the block acknowledge occurred. In this example, the block acknowledge originated from the MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. All Alarms Acknowledged The message that describes this display as an alarm block acknowledge event. The text changes to reflect one of the following four types of block acknowledgments, as appropriate: All Alarms Acknowledged All Troubles Acknowledged All Supervisories Acknowledged All Security Acknowledged 4211 The history log sequence number. 11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

6-7

History Log

Audible Silenced Event This event occurs when the audible silence key is actuated on an MKB-4. The LCD displays: 251÷ AUDIBLE SILENCED 4212 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

OVERRIDE The action that is being applied to the feature. The selections in this field are: OVERRIDE NORMAL 4212 The history log sequence number.

Where:

11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

251÷ The module address where the audible silence occurred. In this example, the audible silence originated on an MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display.

Audible Unsilenced Event

AUDIBLE SILENCED The message that describes this event. 4212 The history log sequence number. 11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

Override Event This event occurs when an operator overrides a verification or confirmation. The LCD displays: 251÷ CONFIRMATION OVERRIDE 4212 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

This event occurs when the audible unsilence key is pressed on an MKB-4. The LCD displays: 251÷ AUDIBLE UNSILENCED 4213 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

Where: 251÷ The module address where the audible unsilence occurred. In this example, the audible unsilence originated on an MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. AUDIBLE UNSILENCED The message that describes this event. 4213 The history log sequence number. 11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

Where: 251÷ The module address where the override operation occurred. In this example, the confirmation override originated on an MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. CONFIRMATION The feature that is either being overridden or returned to normal. This selections in this field are: CONFIRMATION VERIFICATION

6-8

Event This event occurs when an operator enters a new at an MKB-4. The LCD displays: 251÷ LEVEL : 1 4214 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

Where: 251÷ The module address where the event occurred. In this example, the

History Log change originated on an MKB-4 at address 251. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. LEVEL : 1 The message that describes this as a event and indicates the new authorization level that was entered. 4214 The history log sequence number. 11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

Configuration Changed Event This event occurs when an operator s a new CSG-M configuration to the MXL-IQ control . The LCD displays: 254÷ Configuration changed 10->11 4214 11:25:14 Mar 11,20XX

Where: 254÷ The module addres where the configuration change occurred. In this example, the configuration change originated from the field programmer at address 254. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. Configuration changed The message that describes this as a configuration change event. 10 The old configuration modification sequence number. 11 The new configuration modification sequence number. Note: These values may not be consecutive. They depend on the number of modifications made to the configuration by the CSG-M. 4214 The history log sequence number. 11:25:14 Mar 11, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

Manual Sensitivity Set Event A sensitivity set event displays any change of sensitivity to a detector device that was made manually at a system control . The LCD displays: 001÷001 1ST FLOOR EAST WING 321 12:24:48 Mar 10,1995

NORMAL

Where: 001÷001 The module/device address. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. 1ST FLOOR EAST WING The custom message assigned to this input. 321 The history log sequence number. 12:24:48 Mar 10, 20XX The time that the event was logged. NORMAL The sensitivity value sent to the device. The selectable values include: Hi_3 Hi_2 Hi_1 NORMAL Low_1 Low_2 Low_3

Auto Sensitivity Set Event A sensitivity set event displays any change of sensitivity to a detector device made by the auto sensitivity adjustment system. The LCD displays: 001÷001 1ST FLOOR EAST WING 2.12 + 321 12:24:38 Mar 10, 20XX

Where: 001÷001 The module/device address. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display. 1ST FLOOR EAST WING The custom message assigned to this input.

6-9

History Log 321 The history log sequence number. 2.12 Indicates that this is an IEC (Enviro-Link) set sensitivity event. The detector sensitivity has been set to 2.12 volts. (The voltage can range from 0-5 volts.) This field may contain the word CLEAN to indicate that this detector was cleaned and restored to its base sensitivity. + This symbol represents the type of automatic correction that was made. A plus sign (+) indicates that the sensitivity was increased, a minus sign (-) indicates that the sensitivity was decreased. 12:24:48 Mar 10, 20XX The time that the event was logged.

Logic Sensitivity Set Event

History Print Formats At The MXL-IQ

The history printout format available at the MXL-IQ control appears in the same format as all other listing type reports. The listing output is in the higher character density mode of the output device. The vertical pitch varies to clearly distinguish one event from another. If the target printer has variable point spacing, each event is separated by a 0.5 line gap. On printers without variable point spacing, there is one full blank line between events. To interrupt the listing operation at any time, press the CLEAR key. Significant system activities, such as alarms, troubles, etc., automatically terminate the listing. The printout always indicates when the listing has been prematurely terminated. (Refer to the History Log Sample Printout on the following page) The basic format of the history printout is:

A sensitivity set event displays any change of sensitivity to a device made by output logic. The LCD displays:



FN0012÷ Sensitivity set by logic 321 12:24:48 Mar 10,20XX NORMAL

<Event Type [Modifier]> <Event Locator> <Event Time> <Event Sequence #> <Event Description>

Where:



FN0012÷ The label of the logical function that generated this sensitivity set. The division sign indicates that this is a history log display.

•

SENSITIVITY SET BY LOGIC The message describing this as a logic sensitivity set event.

•

• (repeated for each event having matching conditions)



321 The history log sequence number. 12:24:48 Mar 10, 20XX The time that the event was logged. NORMAL The sensitivity value sent to the device. Hi_3 Hi_2 Hi_1 NORMAL Low_1 Low_2 Low_3

6-10

Where: Listing Date Identifies the report type (in this case the history log) and the date that the report was generated. Listing Conditions Shows the filter and starting date for this report.

History Log History Log Sample Printout 1 Line 1 Line 2

10 20 30 40 50 Listing of History Log at 14:32:22 Apr 04,20XX This is a FULL list beginning at 09:20:02 Mar 01,20XX:

60

70

80

Line 3

SENS NORM. FN0012

06:00:00

Mar 02,20XX

#1

Sensitivity set by output logic

Line 4

SENS Hi_1 FN0013

19:00:00

Mar 02,20XX

#2

Sensitivity set by output logic

Line 5 Line 6

TROUBLE IN 1-1 22:10:11 Mar 02,20XX #3 Response Too Low, TRI-2R Switch Input + Relay

UTILITY CABINET, Input Dev.

Line 7

ACK. TRBL. 251

22:15:24

Mar 02,20XX

#4

Troubles Block Acknowledged

Line 8

MAN. RST. 251

22:50:03

Mar 02,20XX

#5

Manual Reset

Line 9

SENS NORM. FN0012

06:00:00

Mar 03,20XX

#6

Sensitivity set by output logic

Line 10

SENS Hi_1 FN0013

19:00:00

Mar 03,20XX

#7

Sensitivity set by output logic

Line 11 Line 12

2-11 21:39:00 Ionization Detector

Mar 03,20XX

#8

ROOM 101 FIRST FLOOR, ID-60I

Line 13

SENS NORM. FN0012

06:00:00

Mar 04,20XX

#9

Sensitivity set by logic

Line 14 Line 15

12-23 10:42:20 Ionization Detector

Mar 04,20XX

#10

ROOM 221 SECOND FLOOR, ID-60I

Line 16 Line 17

ALARM IN 12-23 10:43:12 Ionization Detector

Mar 04,20XX

#11

ROOM 221 SECOND FLOOR, ID-60I

Line 18

OUTPUT ON FN0103

10:43:13

Mar 04,20XX

#12

Output logic operation

Line 19

OUTPUT ON FN0010

10:43:13

Mar 04,20XX

#13

Output logic operation

Line 20

ACK. ALARM 251

10:45:21

Mar 04,20XX

#14

Alarms Block Acknowledged

Line 21

SILENCE

10:45:22

Mar 04,20XX

#15

Audibles silenced

Line 22

MAN. RST. 251

10:45:25

Mar 04,20XX

#16

Manual Reset

Line 23

2

10:50:53

Mar 04,20XX

#17

Operator to Level 2

Line 24 Line 25

DISARM 12-23 10:51:23 Ionization Detector

Mar 04,20XX

#18

ROOM 221 SECOND FLOOR, ID-60I

Line 26

DISARM

10:52:04

Mar 04,20XX

#19

FAN #1, CRM-4 Relay Output

Line 27

ENERGIZE

10:52:24

Mar 04,20XX

#20

FAN #1, CRM-4 Relay Output

Line 28

SENS HIGH FN0013

19:00:00

Mar 04,20XX

#21

Sensitivity set by logic

251

251

7-2 7-2

6-11

History Log Event Type Identifies the type of history event that is being reported. The following event types are arranged in groups. The modifier fields for each group are different. Group 1 types: ACK. ALARM Alarm block acknowledge

SUPERVS

Security causing device event Supervisory causing device event

Group 3 types: SENS Sensitivity set

ACK. TRBL.

Trouble block acknowledge

Group 4 types: Operator

ACK. SEC.

Security block acknowledge

Group 5 types: OUTPUT Output logic event

ACK. SUP.

Supervisory block acknowledge

MAN. RST.

Manual reset via MKB-4

COLD RST.

Hard reset from power off

WARM RST.

Hard reset via reset jumper

WDOG RST.

Hard reset via 6805 watchdog



Alarm

ENERGIZE

Energize an output

DE-ENERGIZE De-energize an output

6-12

SECURTY

ARM

Arm a device

DIS-ARM

Disarm a device

SILENCE

Silence audibles

UNSILENCE

Unsilence audibles

CONFIG.

(CSG-M) Configuration changed

Modifier The modifier is an optional field that extends the meaning of the event type. For example, ALARM IN, where IN explains the ALARM type. Group 1 type: No modifiers for this group Group 2 types: IN Condition now active OUT Condition now inactive ACK Condition now acknowledged Group 3 types: Hi_3 Hi_2 Hi_1 NORMAL Low_1 Low_2 Low_3 Group 4 types: 0 Lowest access 1 2 3 Highest access Group 5 types:

Group 2 types: ALARM Alarm causing device event

ON

Condition now active

OFF

Condition now inactive

TROUBLE

Event Locator This field locates the source or destination

Trouble causing device event

History Log of the event as either a module number, module-device pair, or function name.

Event Time The time and date of this event. Event Sequence # The sequence number of this event in the history log list. The maximum value of this number depends on the type of logging selected and the length of time since the last . Event Description The event description is either the custom message associated with a device, or for non-devices, it is a descriptive message.

MXL-IQ To CSG-M Formats

from the MXL-IQ history log to the CSG-M history feature occurs while the MXL-IQ maintains all normal operations. There are two ways to access history log events: 1. Non-destructive mode—information can be examined only.

2. Destructive mode—information can be extracted from the MXL-IQ and incorporated into a data base (See Screen 4). If the information is extracted from the MXL-IQ, the history is erased from the system, and the system is reset. Access to the destructive mode is and vendor ID protected. The history contents and organization of the CSG-M configuration change over the lifetime of the system. As a result, the history extraction process must both the encoded history log and its configuration in the CSG-M. At the conclusion of the extraction process, an .IMH file is created which contains fixed data that is common to all history extractions from a given CSG. This technique has the advantage of eliminating the need for a complex code in the MXL-IQ to reorganize the data, shifting that burden to programs in the PC environment which are more easily modified. However, this technique requires time to perform the . Each access of the history, whether in the examine or extract mode, requires the transmission of the entire CSG-M configuration from the MXL-IQ to the PC host. For very large configurations, this could take many minutes for the first after a

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316848 free CONFIG => TEST1 Transfer a System to or from an MXL-IQ

SEND System Configuration TO MXL-IQ READ System Configuration FROM MXL-IQ System Configuration in MXL-IQ DISPLAY MXL-IQ Info EXTRACT MXL-IQ History

Move Cursor to Highlight Selection, then ENTER

ESC=Prev. Menu

Screen 4 Transfer a System to or from an MXL-IQ

6-13

History Log configuration is changed. If the .IMH file is present after the first of a configuration, the operation will run more quickly on subsequent s.

4. The PC creates a raw data file that contains an identifying header.

History Sequence

5. The PC s the compressed history log data and appends it to the file.

The process uses the existing capabilities of the CSG-M programming system. The sequence for extracting history log events is as follows: 1. PC s the MXL-IQ and requests the configuration header and data area pointers. 2. If the PC determines that there is history data present, then the extraction process begins. 3. The PC computes the required amount of storage and determines if the media in the PC has enough room for it. If there is sufficient room, the process continues; if

6-14

not, the is prompted to change disks.

6. The PC s the configuration data and appends it to the file. 7. The resulting file is closed and then tested for integrity. Any irregularity in this validation ends the extraction process and signals the . 8. If this is a non-destructive , then the process is complete.

If this is a destructive , then the clearing of the history the MXL-IQ begins. A warm reset occurs in the MXL-IQ at the end of the extraction process.

+D=FJAH

Connections and Ratings

7

ALD-2I Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings: Supervisory

Alarm

30 VDC peak 66mA max 30 VDC peak 66mA max (60 devices in alarm)

All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes. Only the devices listed in Appendix A, Table 2 - Analog Addressable Detectors on page A-1 may be used. The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model names specified.

See Notes 7 and 11. See Note 8.

ALD-2I Wiring

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 100 ohms total. 4. Maximum capacitance: 0.4µF between + loop and – loop. 0.8µF between + loop and chassis. 0.8µF between – loop and chassis. 5. Each detector or group of detectors, requires a two-wire circuit of thermo-plastic fixture wire enclosed in conduit or limited energy shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. 6. No end of line device required. 7. Operates in full conformance with Style 6. 8. Operates in full conformance with Style 4. 9. Either loop may be wired Class A or B. 10. 60 devices maximum per loop. 11. T-tapping is NOT allowed on Class A loops. 12. Both circuits are supervised.

7-1

ALD-2I Connections and Ratings

7-2

CMI-300 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings: Supervisory or Alarm 5 VDC, 96mA max

TYPICAL CLASS B (STYLE 4) CONNECTION

3

4

2-WIRE 18 AWG

1

CABLE MIN*

2

3

4

TB1

2

TB2

1

2

3

2

1

LLM-1

4

3

LLM-1 4

* USE 2-WIRE COPPER CABLE, 105 C, 300V, 18 AWG,

TB2

1

TB1

MOM-2/4

1

CXM-1

2

4

3

1

2

3

4

NOTES 1. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation. 2. All circuits are rated 2 volts peak to peak, 1.3mA. All circuits are supervised. 3. Operates in full conformance with Style 4.

SOLID OR STRANDED, MAX 7 STRANDS.

CMI-300 Wiring - Typical Class B (Style 4) Connection

7-3

CMI-300 Connections and Ratings

TYPICAL CLASS A (STYLE 7) CONNECTION

4

3

2

1

TB1

2

1

TB1

MOM-2/4 4

3

1

2

1

4

3

LLM-1 TB2

TB2

LLM-1

2

4

3

1

2

*USE 2-WIRE

COPPER CABLE, 105 C, 300V, 18 AWG, SOLID OR STRANDED, MAX 7 STRANDS.

4

3

TB1

NOTES 1. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation. 2. All circuits are rated 2 volts peak to peak, 1.3mA. All circuits are supervised. 3. Operates in full conformance with Style 7.

1

2

TB1

TWO 2-WIRE 18 AWG CABLE MIN* 600 OHM MAX LINE RESISTANCE TOTAL PER PAIR

4

3

1

1

2

4

3

LLM-1 TB2

TB2

LLM-1

2

4

3

1

2

4

3

2

1

CXM-1

3

CMI-300 Wiring - Typical Class A (Style 7) Connection

CONDITIONED NON-SWITCHED LEASED TELEPHONE LINE, 600 OHMS IMPEDANCE TYPICAL CLASS B (STYLE 4) CONNECTION

3

4

1

3

4

1

2

3

2

1

LLM-1

R1 560 OHMS, 1/2W, 5% P/N 140-820366

2

TB1

2

4

1

2

4

3

R2

CXM-1

CMI-300 Wiring - Typical Class B (Style 4) Connection Using Conditioned, Non-Switched Telephone Line

7-4

4

3

LLM-1 TB2

1

TB1

MOM-2/4

TB2

NOTES 1. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation. 2. All circuits are rated 2 volts peak to peak, 1.3mA. All circuits are supervised. 3. Operates in full conformance with Style 4.

1

2

3

4

4

CRM-4 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings: 24 VDC 15mA (no energized relays) Add: 18.7mA per energized relay (75mA - all relays energized)

MOM-4 (TB-1, TB-2, TB-3, or TB-4) or MOM-2 (TB2 or TB4)

CRM-4 Relay Wiring

NOTES 1. rating: 2A, 30VDC/120 VAC resistive. 2. Use only with power limited / Class 2 circuits. 3. Coils are supervised when de-energized. 4. s are not supervised. 5. All relay s are shown in normal (de-energized) state.

7-5

CRM-4 Connections and Ratings

7-6

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings:

Only the devices listed in Compatible Notification Appliances, P/N 315096363 may be used. The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model names specified.

Supervisory

24V unfiltered, full wave rectified 12mA max

Alarm

24V unfiltered, full wave rectified 1.5A max

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES (NFPA 72 Local) All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes.

STYLE Y (CLASS B)

STYLE Z (CLASS A)

CIRCUIT 1

CIRCUIT 2

2.2K, 1/2W

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

-

+ MOM-4 (TB1, TB2, TB3, or TB4) or MOM-2 (TB2 or TB4)

2.2K, 1/2W

NO CONNECTION

+ 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

NO CONNECTION

10 11 12

13 14 15 16

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 3 ohms total. 4. End of line device: 2.2K, ½W, P/N 140-820380. 5. Either circuit may be wired Class A or B. 6. Both circuits are supervised. 7. Polarity shown in supervisory state.

CSM-4 Loop Wiring for Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit

7-7

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings

NOTES 1. Both circuits are not power limited. 2. The total loop resistance from the LLM-1 to the Municipal Tie, including the 14.5 ohms in the Municipal Tie, should not exceed 22.5 ohms. 3. Either circuit may be used. 4. Polarity shown in supervisory state.

MUNICIPAL TIE (NFPA 72 Municipal Tie) All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes.

Electrical ratings: Trip Coil

14.5 ohms

Trip Current

220 to 320mA DC (momentary)

Supervisory Current Voltage

12mA DC 24V unfiltered, full wave rectified

Minimum emergency power 60 hour standby 5 minute alarm

MOM-4 (TB1, TB2, TB3,or TB4) or MOM-2 (TB2 or TB4)

CSM-4 Loop Wiring for Supervised Municipal Tie

LEASED LINE (NFPA 72 Remote Station) All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes.

When a CSM-4 circuit is used as a Leased Line trouble output, SW1 and SW2 on switch S2 must be set. These positions permit the degrade trouble bus to activate the trouble line.

Electrical Ratings: 24V unfiltered, full wave rectified Load must be a compatible polarity reversal labeled remote station receiver unit Rated current 3mA to 9mA, alarm/supervisory External circuit resistance 2K to 5K ohms Minimum emergency power 60 hour standby 5 minute alarm

7-8

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. External resistance: 2K-5K ohms. 3. Both circuits are not supervised. 4. Polarity shown in supervisory state.

MOM-4 (TB1, TB2, TB3,or TB4) or MOM-2 (TB2 or TB4)

CSM-4 Leased Line Circuit Wiring

RELEASING SERVICE (Per NFPA 12A, NFPA 13, and NFPA 2001)

Electrical Ratings: Solenoids

24 VDC 16.8 watts max 700mA max

Supervisory

12mA max

Alarm

800mA max

All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes. Set all positions of switch S2 to OFF (OPEN). Application NFPA 13

Make Skinner

Model LV2LBX25, 24V

(Pre-Action Deluge)

ASCO

T8210A107, 24V

ASCO

R8210A107, 24V

NFPA 12A (Halon) NFPA 20 01 (FM-20 0)

ASCO

8210A107, 24V

Pyro

50 0-982631, 24V

Pyro

50 0-286652, 24V

Pyro

50 0-083377, 24V

Pyro

50 0-086929, 24V

Pyro

ECHS-24 EXP

NOTES 1. Releasing zones are not power limited. 2. Maximum resistance: 3 ohms total. 3. No end of line device required. 4. Both circuits are supervised for opens only. 5. Polarity show in supervisory state.

MOM-4 (TB1, TB2, TB3,or TB4) or MOM-2 (TB2 or TB4)

CSM-4 Loop Wiring for use as Releasing Service (per NFPA 12A, NFPA 13, and NFPA 2001)

7-9

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings

7-10 NOTES: 1. Use only listed solenoids from the following table:

Application NFPA 13

Make Skinner

Model LV2LBX25, 24V

(Pre-Action Deluge)

ASCO

T8210A107, 24V

ASCO

R8210A107, 24V

ASCO

8210A107, 24V

NFPA 12A

Pyro

50 0-982631, 24V

Pyro

50 0-286652, 24V

(Halon)

Pyro

50 0-083377, 24V

Pyro

50 0-086929, 24V

Pyro

ECHS-24 EXP

NFPA 20 01 (FM-20 0)

2. Solenoids supervised for opens only. 3. Polarity shown in supervisory condition. 4. Releasing circuits are not power limited. 5. No end-of-line device used on Pre-Action/Deluge or releasing circuits. 6. Configure CSM-4 Pre-Action/Deluge circuits as Municipal Tie. 7. Maximum of 4 zones per MOM-2. 8. Each MOM-2 must be powered from a separate ALARM-SAF power supply. 9. Set all positions of S2 on the CSM-4 to OFF (OPEN).

MXL-IQ Releasing Service Wiring Diagram Using MOM-2 (NFPA 12A, 13, and 2001)

MOUNT VAI-1 AND TRI-60/B6 IN ALARM - SAF CABINET

VAI-1

24 VAC + BATTERY _

1 2 3 4

TRI-60/B6 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N N N C C C

1 2 3 4 CHASSIS

CHASSIS 120 VAC INPUT

END OF LINE RESISTOR 3.6K, 1/4W P/N 140-820185

CHASSIS NEUTRAL HOT

DC OUT

+ _

FAULT

+ _

1 2 3 4

ALARM - SAF MODEL AS/PS5-BFS-24-UL UL GUIDE UTRZ FILE NO. S3584

Maximum # per MOM-4 5

_

Make Skinner

(Pre-Action Deluge)

ASCO

T8210A107, 24V

5

ASCO

R8210A107, 24V

5

ASCO

8210A107, 24V

5

Pyro

50 0-982631, 24V

8

Pyro

50 0-286652, 24V

8

Pyro

50 0-083377, 24V

8

Pyro

50 0-086929, 24V

8

Pyro

ECHS-24 EXP

8

(Halon) NFPA 20 01 (FM-20 0)

2. Solenoids supervised for opens only. 3. Polarity shown in supervisory condition. 4. Releasing circuits are not power limited. 5. No end of line device used. 6. Each MOM-4 must be powered from a separate ALARM-SAF power supply. 7. Set all positions of S2 on the CSM-4 to OFF (OPEN).

+

_

12 VDC LEAD ACID BTX-1 31 AH

SOLENOID

SOLENOID

+

+

_

+ 12 VDC LEAD ACID BTX-1 31 AH

SOLENOID

SOLENOID

+

+

_

_

_

TO SMB-1/-2 P6

N N C C

N N N N C C C C

N N N N C C C C

N N C C

TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P1

CSM-4

P2

CSM-4

N C1 P5

N N C C

2 1

N N N N C C C C

N N C C

TB3

TB6

P7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P3

CSM-4

P4

DO NOT USE

MOM-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P8

TB2 N N C C

+

N N N N C C C C

_

+

N N C C

N N N N C C C C

N C

1

TB7 2 1 N N C C

N N N N C C C C

P10

2 NC 1 NC TB5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TB4

DO NOT USE

_

2.2K, 1/2W P/N 140-820830

7-11

SOLENOID

MXL -IQ Releasing Service Wiring Using MOM-4 (per NFPA 12A, NFPA 13, and NFPA 2001)

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

For FM Approved Deluge/Pre-Action: All initiating devices connected to the system MUST be wired Class A.

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings

Application NFPA 13

NFPA 12A

To Analog loop on MMB-1/2 or ALD-2I. Program TRI-60/B6 + _ as trouble causing program for normally open operation. Refer to TRI-60 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092329 and TRI-B6 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-093315.

BATTERY ENCLOSURE UL LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SERVICE

NOTES 1. Use only listed solenoids from the following table:

Model LV2LBX25, 24V

_ Power supply common connection Connect to: SMB-1/2 TB5 Terminal 9

CSM-4 Connections and Ratings

7-12

CZM-1B6 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings:

Initiating Devices

Supervisory

18-24.5 VDC 4mA max

Alarm

18-24.5 VDC 45mA max

Zone Resistance

35 ohms total

Max Ripple

500mV

The CZM-1B6 s one zone of initiating devices in either Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B). The initiating devices are connected to terminals 5-8 on the CZM-1B6 terminal block.

Electrical connections: There are three basic connections to the CZM-1B6 as follows:

Only the devices listed in Appendix A, Table 1 - Conventional Detectors: Compatible With CZM-1B6 on page A-1 may be used. Use up to 15 detectors, any combination of those listed. Only one PB-1191, and no additional devices, can be connected to a CZM-1B6. Detector operated accessories cannot be used with the CZM-1B6. The model numbers listed are the UL compatibility identifiers.

STYLE B (CLASS B)

EOL

STYLE D (CLASS A) +

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

POWER

POWER +

-

+

-

ANALOG LOOP

EARTH

EARTH

ANALOG LOOP

EOL

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

+

-

+

-

+

+

-

-

CZM-1B6 Class A (Style D) Wiring

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

+

-

+

-

+

+

-

-

CZM-1B6 Class B (Style B) Wiring

9

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 35 ohms total. 4. Each detector or group of detectors, requires a two-wire circuit of thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in conduit or limited energy shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. 5. End of line device: 4.7K, ¼W, P/N 140-820188. 6. Either circuit may be wired Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B) 7. 15 devices maximum per circuit. 8. Initiating circuit is supervised.

7-13

CZM-1B6 Connections and Ratings PB-1191 When the PBA-1191 is used, the 2-position plug from jumper J1 must be removed as follows: • Remove the screw from the center of the CZM-1B6 plastic cover and place it to one side. • Remove the circuit board and locate jumper J1. • Remove the 2-position plug from J1. • Reassemble the circuit board and plastic cover using the screw that was removed in the first step. • Be sure to use the correct end of line device with the CZM-1B6 in this configuration.

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 100 ohms total. 4. Maximum capacitance: 0.4µF between + loop and – loop. 0.8µF between + loop and chassis. 0.8µF between – loop and chassis. 5. Each detector or group of detectors, requires a two-wire circuit of thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in conduit or limited energy shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. 6. No end of line device required. 7. Operates in full conformance with Style 6. 8. Operates in full conformance with Style 4. 9. Either loop may be wired Class A or B. 10. 60 devices maximum per loop. 11. T-tapping is NOT allowed on Class A loops. 12. Both circuits are supervised.

7-14

PB-1191 Installation

Analog Loops The CZM-1B6 communicates with the MXL-IQ via the MXL-IQ’s analog loops, which may be on the SMB-2 or the optional

ALD-2I module. The analog loops may be wired Class A (Style 6) or Class B (Style 4).

ALD-2I MOM-4 TB2

MOM-4 TB1

SMB-2

SMB-2

LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP 1 2 1 2 1

LOOP 2

TB2

TB3

4

8

4

8

4

4

3

7

3

7

3

3

2

6

2

6

2

2

1

5

1

5

1

1

4

8

4

8

4

4

3

7

3

7

3

3

2

6

2

6

2

2

1

5

1

5

1

1

CLASS A INSTALLATION See notes 7 and 11.

-

CZM-1B6

1

+ +

2

3

4

5

6

CZM-1B6

1 7

8

2

3

4

5

6

8

2

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

8

CLASS B INSTALLATION See note 8.

+

CZM-1B6

1 2

3

4

5

6

CZM-1B6

1 7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

CZM-1B6

1 8

4

5

6

7

8

CZM-1B6 1 2

Analog Loop Wiring

CZM-1B6

1 7

3

4

5

6

CZM-1B6 Connections and Ratings

CZM-1B6 Power The CZM-1B6 receives its power from the CZM-1B6 power output on the SMB-2. This power is available on TB5 of the SMB-2 on terminals 9-12. The power may be wired as

SMB-2 TB5

12 11 10

Class A or Class B. Since the CZM-1B6 monitors the power at its screw terminals, it is possible to T-tap the power connection; this can be done only in the Class B configuration.

CLASS A INSTALLATION

+ +

See note 6.

4

-

1

2

CZM-1B6 5

3

6

7

4

8

1

2

CZM-1B6 5

3

6

7

CZM-1B6

4

8

1 2

5

3

6

7

8

9

12 11 10 9

CLASS B INSTALLATION

+ -

4 1

2

CZM-1B6 5

3

6

7

4

8

1

2

5

6

7

4 1 2

8

CZM-1B6 5

3

CZM-1B6

+ 4

-

3

CZM-1B6

1

2

3

CZM-1B6 5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 4 ohms total. 4. No end of line device required. 5. Circuit is supervised. 6. T-tapping is NOT allowed on Class A loops. 7. For loop resistance, refer to the SMB-2 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095097.

8

8

CZM-1B6 Power Wiring

7-15

CZM-1B6 Connections and Ratings

NOTES 1. Intrinsically Safe Output: Open Circuit Voltage: 28 VDC Short Circuit Current: 93mA 2. Maximum loop resistance must not exceed 35 ohms. 3. A maximum of ten DI-3IS Ionization Detectors or up to five S121 or S122 Flame Detectors can be used in addition to mechanical (non-energy storing) shorting devices. 4. Maximum safe system voltage is 250 VAC. 5. For mounting and installation of the ISI-1, see the ISI-1 instructions. 6. Only mechanical (non-energy storing) shorting devices

Intrinsically Safe Zone Wiring FM Approved Only (Not UL Approved)

7-16

such as the MS-51 Manual Station may be used. 7. WARNING: Do not make any connection to terminal 6 of the DB-3S base. Such a connection would void use in an intrinsically safe application. 8. In addition, S121 and S122 are also approved for use in Class II and Class III, Groups E, F, and G. 9. For guidance on installation see ANSI/ISA RP 12.6, “Installation of Intrinsically Safe Instrument Systems in Class I Hazardous Locations”. 10. For DI-3IS information, see the DI-3 Series installation instructions, P/N 315-081943. 11. For S121 and S122 information, see the installation instructions, P/N 315-085258.

CZM-4 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings:

Initiating devices per zone:

Supervisory

21.7-22.8 VDC 4mA max

Alarm

21.7-22.8 VDC 180mA per zone max

Max ripple

400mV

Up to 30 detectors, any combination of those listed in Appendix A, Table 1 Conventional Detectors (except the PBA-1191), on page A-1, may be used. Up to five waterflow switches or 20 tamper switches may be used. Wiring may be Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B).

STYLE B (CLASS B)

STYLE D (CLASS A)

STYLE B (CLASS B)

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

+

+

-

-

+

+

-

-

+

+

-

-

+

+

-

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

+

+

50uF 50V *

MOM-4 TERMINALS TB1 (UPPER SLOT) OR TB2 (LOWER SLOT) OR MOM-2 TERMINAL TB2

50uF 50V *

PBA-1191 Linear Beam Detector

- + - + - + +

A

B

C

D

E

F

50uF, 50V *

DO NOT USE

* EOL CAPACITOR (P/N 100-115588) ** EOL RESISTOR (P/N 140-820188)

CZM-4 Wiring

EOL 4.7K, 1/4W **

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 70 ohms total (40 ohms if relay bases are used). 4. Each detector or group of detectors, requires a two-wire circuit of thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in conduit or limited energy shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. 5. Loops may be wired Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B). 6. 30 devices maximum per loop. 7. All circuits are supervised. 8. Do not connect more than one PBA-1191 to each zone. (Refer to PBA-1191 instruction, P/N 315-095424 for further information.) 9. Do not mix smoke detectors with the PBA-1191. 10. The PBA-1191 requires Rev. 3 or higher of CZM-4 firmware.

7-17

CZM-4 Connections and Ratings

7-18

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings MOI-7 Electrical ratings: Supervisory

5V ± .5V 140mA

Alarm

5V ± .5V 180mA

Electrical connections The MOI-7 is shipped with one cable as described below. 5V Power The MOI-7 receives its 5 volt power on connector P1. This power can be sent to other modules requiring 5 volts from P2. Pin 1 is the positive input; pin 2 the return. Use the supplied cable, P/N 600-291261.

24V Return TB2 connects to the return side of the power supply used with the MOD-16s and MID-16s. There are two positions on the TB2—position 1 connects to the MOD-16/ MID-16 and position 2 to SMB-2, TB5-9, or to PS-35, terminal 6. MOD-16 and MID-16 Connection P4 is the connector for the MOD-16/MID-16 modules. Connect the first MOD-16/MID-16 in the system using a 10-wire cable P/N 555-190940. Be sure that the locking tab on the cable engages the rib on P4.

MXL-IQ Network Connection For Style 4 wiring use only terminals 1 and 2 of TB1; terminals 3 and 4 of TB1 are not used. In a Style 4 network, make only Network A connections and ignore all Network B connections. Do not use connector P5 in this configuration.

7-19

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings

NETWORK A TB4 4

N E 3 T W O 2 R K 1

RCC-1/1F (PS-5N7)

CABLE P/N 600-291261 TO PSR-1, P9 OR PS-5, J2

D D O O

U S E

NOTES: 1. 18 AWG minimum. 2. 80 ohms maximum per pair. 3. Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. 4. Terminate the shield at the SMB-2 enclosure only. 5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 6. Maximum voltage 8V p-p. 7. Maximum current 150mA.

STYLE 4

N N O O T T

+5 VDC IN

P1 P2

SEE MOI-7 WIRING

U S E

4 3 2 1

TB1

2

1

TB2

1

DO NOT USE

P5

MOI-7

MXL-IQ Network Connection Wiring Diagram Local Trouble Input When terminal 3 of TB3, the local trouble input, is driven high, it reports a trouble condition to the MXL-IQ. This input is protected and has a maximum input rating of 40V. Terminal 2 of TB3 is the common for this input. Local Lamp Test Terminal 1 of TB3 is used for a local lamp test. When this input is pulled low, the MOD-16 outputs do a lamp test. Use a normally open momentary switch connected between terminal 1 and 2 of TB3.

7-20

Inputs The MOI-7 has two inputs. The first input allows for a local lamp test of all connected MOD-16 outputs. Screw terminal 1 on TB3 is the lamp test input. To activate the lamp test, use a normally open switch between terminals 1 and 2 (common) of TB3. Each MOD-16 board is lamp tested sequentially. The lamp test sequence stops automatically after approximately 30 seconds. The second input is for transmission to the MXL-IQ of local trouble. This input is high going for trouble. Each MOI-7 transmits the state of this input to the MXL-IQ for annunciation. The MXL-IQ indicates this trouble as an MOI-7 local trouble. See the electrical ratings and wiring diagrams for these two inputs.

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings

MOD-16

MID-16

Electrical ratings:

Electrical ratings:

Supervisory

40V peak 2mA

Alarm

40V peak 850mA

Maximum current for each output

50mA

Module power

5VDC 2mA max

Input ratings: Input voltage range

18-31 VDC

Input impedance

8K ohms

Input current

2mA max

MOI-7 Wiring

7-21

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings

NOTES 1. 18 AWG minimum for LED and 24V lamp connections. 2. 14 AWG minimum for supply connections (TB1-9 and 10, TB2-9 and 10). 3. All wiring must be in accordance with NEC 760. 4. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation. 5. All wiring to MID-16, MOD-16, or MOI-7 (non-network) modules is unsupervised. Any wiring leaving the enclosure must be within 20 feet, in rigid conduit, and must not leave the room. 6. For additional information see MOI-7 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092799. 7. A maximum of 8 MOD-16s can be used with the MOI-7. 8. Both TB1-9 (or 10) and TB2-9 (or 10) must be connected to the common of the power supply. 9. When using SR-35, refer to table on this page.

TO COMMON OF SUPPLY OR TB1-10 OF PREVIOUS MOD-16 OR MID-16

TO TB1-9 OF NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16

SEE NOTE 8

TB1, 1-8, PROVIDES CONTROLLED OUTPUTS

TB1 1

S1, 1-8 CONNECT TO CORRESPONDING OUTPUTS TB1, 1-8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P1

P2

MOD-16

FROM PREVIOUS MOD-16, MID-16 OR MOI-7 (CABLE P/N 555-190940)

NOTE: THE CABLE P/N 555-190940 IS SUPPLIED. IF THE CONNECTION IS TO ANOTHER RAIL IN THE ENCLOSURE, USE OPTIONAL CABLE P/N 555-190941.

TO NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16 (CABLE P/N 555-190940) NOTE: SWITCH S2-8 IS OPEN TO PROVIDE A 2.7K LIMITING RESISTOR.

S2, 1-8 CONNECT TO CORRESPONDING OUTPUTS TB2, 1-8

TB2, 1-8 PROVIDES ADDITIONAL CONTROLLED OUTPUTS

10

SW2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONNECT TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

TB2 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

+

9

10

LED

MODULE

TERMINAL

SMB-2 MPS-24 PS-35

TB5-12 TB1-4 TB1-5

OR ANY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY U.L. LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION SIGNALING USE

TO COMMON OF SUPPLY OR TB2-10 OF PREVIOUS MOD-16 OR MID-16

TO TB2-9 OF NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16

MOD-16 Wiring Connection To SR-35 Module* MOD-16

SR-35 Screw Terminal

TB1-1

4

TB1-2

8

TB1-8

32

SMB-2, TB5-12 or PS-35, TB1-5

33

SMB-2, TB5-9 or PS-35, TB1-6

35

*For additional information see: SR-35 Instructions (P/N 315-087691) PS-35 Instructions (P/N 315-085062) SMB-2 Instructions (P/N 315-095931)

7-22

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings

TO COMMON OF SUPPLY OR TB1-10 OF PREVIOUS MOD-16 OR MID-16

TB1, 1-8, PROVIDES THE FIRST 8 INPUTS

TO TB1-9 OF NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16

TB1 1

2

3

4

5

6

1

7

10

9

8

10

P1

DO NOT USE

P3

P4

P5

1

1

MID-16

FROM PREVIOUS MOD-16, MID-16 OR MOI-7 (CABLE P/N 555-190940)

NOTE: THE CABLE P/N 555-190940 IS SUPPLIED. IF THE CONNECTION IS TO ANOTHER RAIL IN THE ENCLOSURE, USE OPTIONAL CABLE P/N 555-190941.

10

TO NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16 (CABLE P/N 555-190940)

10

SWITCH 1

TB2, 1-8 PROVIDES THE SECOND 8 INPUTS

10

P2

CONNECT TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

TB2 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

INPUT IMPEDANCE: 8K OHMS MAXIMUM INPUT CURRENT: 4mA / INPUT

9

10

MODULE

TERMINAL

SMB-2 MPS-24 PS-35

TB5-12 TB1-4 TB1-5

OR ANY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY U.L. LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION SIGNALING USE

TO COMMON OF SUPPLY OR TB2-10 OF PREVIOUS MOD-16 OR MID-16

TO TB2-9 OF NEXT MOD-16 OR MID-16

NOTES 1. 18 AWG minimum for all input connections. 2. 14 AWG minimum for supply connections (TB1-9 and 10, TB2-9 and 10). 3. All wiring must be in accordance with NEC 760. 4. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation. 5. All wiring to MID-16, MOD-16, or MOI-7 (non-network) modules is unsupervised. Any wiring leaving the enclosure must be within 20 feet, in rigid conduit, and must not leave the room. 6. For additional information see MOI-7 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092799 7. A maximum of 8 MID-16s can be used with the MOI-7. 8. P1 is connected in parallel with TB1. 9. P2 is connected in parallel with TB2.

MID-16 Wiring

7-23

MOI-7, MOD-16, MID-16 Connections and Ratings

7-24

MOM-2 Connections and Ratings Electrical Installation There are two inputs that connect the MOM-2 with the SMB-2. These inputs provide all the necessary power and data lines to the optional modules. The first input is an 8-conductor ribbon cable. Attach the cable to P6 on the SMB-2, making sure that the locking rib on the cable connector engages the locking tab on P6. Attach the other end of the cable to P7/P10 on the MOM-2, again making sure that the locking rib on the cable engages the locking tab on P7/P10. This cable supplies 5 VDC and communication between the SMB-2 and the modules installed in the MOM-2. The second input feeds 24 VDC full wave unfiltered DC to the MOM-2. This input is connected to either P5/P8 (SMB-1 only) or TB6/TB7. A 2-wire cable is provided for backward compatibility with the SMB-1. Connect one end of the cable to P3 on the SMB-1, making sure the cable rib and board tab lock. Attach the other end of the cable to P5/P8 on the MOM-2 in the same way. The SMB-1 limits this power input to 2 amps. Under maximum load conditions the optional modules must never draw more than 2 amps from this connection. When the 24 VDC is provided by the SMB-2 use TB6/TB7 on the MOM-2 to connect the power. The wire for this connection is not supplied (See SMB-2 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095931 for terminal connections). Use the following chart to determine the available 24 VDC current.

Depending on the optional modules installed, additional power may be available at TB5 and for notification appliances. See the table in Appendix D - MXL Power Supply Load Calculations on page D-2 for the maximum current required by each module under full load conditions. Determine which optional plug-in modules are used in your CSG-M configuration. Depending on the optional modules used, determine the outstanding power by using the table in Appendix D - MXL-IQ Power Supply Load Calculations on page D-2 (See the EXAMPLE). This power can be used for notification appliances or for the optional power connector on TB5. NOTE: When a CSM-4 is used, you may add notification appliances to it if the maximum load current to the MOM-2 does not exceed 2 amps (SMB-1); or with an SMB-2, 6 amps (MPS-6/6W) or 12 amps (MPS-12/12W). Include the total alarm current on each CSM-4 notification appliance circuit when performing the calculations.

MAXIMUM MODULE LOAD CURRENTS Source

Max. Current

SMB-2 wit h MPS -6/6W

6*

SMB-2 wit h MPS -12/12W

12 *

* Derat e by t he t ot al of CZM-1B6 power, NAC-1 and NAC-2

7-25

MOM-2 Connections and Ratings

EXAMPLE: With:

one CZM-4 and one CRM-4 and one CSM-4

Total load current = 0.720 + 0.075 + 0.034 = 0.83A With MPS-6/6W: Remaining Available Current = 2.0 - 0.83 = 1.17A (SMB-1) 6.0 - 0.83 = 5.17A (SMB-2) with no CZM-1B6 load With MPS-12/12W: Remaining Available Current = 2.0 - 0.83 = 1.17 (SMB-1) 12.0 - 0.83 = 11.17 (SMB-2) with no CZM-1B6 load

7-26

MOM-4 Connections and Ratings Electrical Installation There are two inputs that connect the MOM-4 with the SMB-1/-2. These inputs provide all the necessary power and data lines to the optional modules. The first input is an 8-conductor ribbon cable. Attach the cable to P6 on the SMB-1/-2 making sure that the locking rib on the cable connector engages the locking tab on P6. Attach the other end of the cable to P7/P10 on the MOM-4, again making sure that the locking rib on the cable engages the locking tab on P7/P10. This cable supplies 5 VDC and communication between the SMB-2 and the modules installed in the MOM-4. The second input feeds 24 VDC full wave unfiltered DC to the MOM-4. This input is connected to either P5/P8 (SMB-1 only) or TB6/TB7. A 2-wire cable is provided for backward compatibility with the SMB-1. Connect one end of the cable to P3 on the SMB-1, making sure the cable rib and board tab lock. Attach the other end of the cable to P5/P8 on the MOM-4 in the same way. The SMB-1 limits this power input to 2 amps. Under maximum load conditions the optional modules must never draw more than 2 amps from this connection. When the 24 VDC is provided by the SMB-2 use TB6/TB7 on the MOM-4 to connect the power. The wire for this connection is not supplied (See SMB-2 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-095931 for terminal connections). Use the following chart to determine the available 24 VDC current.

Depending on the optional modules installed, additional power may be available at TB5 and for notification appliances. See the table in Appendix D - MXL Power Supply Load Calculations on page D-2 for the maximum current required by each module under full load conditions. Determine which optional plug-in modules are used in your CSG-M configuration. Depending on the optional modules used, determine the outstanding power by using the table in Appendix D - MXL Power Supply Load Calculations on page D-2. (See the EXAMPLE). This power can be used for notification appliances or for the optional power connector on TB5.

NOTE: When a CSM-4 is used, you may add notification appliances to it if the maximum load current to the MOM-4 does not exceed 2 amps (SMB-1); or with an SMB-2, 6 amps (MPS-6/6W) or 12 amps (MPS-12/12W). Include the total alarm current on each CSM-4 notification appliance circuit when performing the calculations.

MAXIMUM MODULE LOAD CURRENTS Source

Max. Current

SMB-2 wit h MPS -6/6W

6*

SMB-2 wit h MPS -12/12W

12 *

* Derat e by t he t ot al of CZM-1B6 power, NAC-1 and NAC-2

7-27

MOM-4 Connections and Ratings

EXAMPLE: With:

one CZM-4 and one CRM-4 and one CSM-4

Total load current = 0.720 + 0.075 + 0.034 = 0.83A With MPS-6/6W: Remaining Available Current = 2.0 - 0.83 = 1.17A (SMB-1) 6.0 - 0.83 = 5.17A (SMB-2) with no CZM-1B6 load With MPS-12/12W: Remaining Available Current = 2.0 - 0.83 = 1.17 (SMB-1) 12.0 - 0.83 = 11.17 (SMB-2) with no CZM-1B6 load

7-28

NIM-1R Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings:

The network can be installed as either Style 4 or Style 7. Style 7 is required in Canada.

5 VDC, 160mA For battery calculations, the NIM-1R draws 70mA from 24 VDC.

NIM-1R Network Up to 32 MXL-IQ Systems can be connected in the network with an NIM-1R installed in each MXL-IQ System. For the highest level of fault protection, install the NIM-1R in the enclosure with the SMB-2, although this is not necessary. When connecting more than 32 MXL-IQ Systems, a REP-1/D2300 repeater is required. Refer to the REP-1 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092686 or the D2300 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092882, for the wiring diagram.

Each NIM-1R is shipped with two 120 ohm EOLRs—only two are required for each network pair. Install an EOLR at the ends of each network pair. Do not install an EOLR at each NIM-1R. (For a simple rule of thumb, an EOLR must be installed where only a single wire lands on a screw terminal.)

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 80 ohms per pair. 4. Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. 5. Terminate the shield ONLY at MXL-IQ 1. 6. Maximum voltage: 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current: 150mA. 8. For Style 4 omit all Network Pair B connections. 9. Do not use terminals 12 - 16 if NCC is not connected.

Do not T-tap the network wiring. If T-tapping is required, use the REP-1/D2300 repeater. Refer to the REP-1 Installation Instructions, P/N 315-092686 or the D2300 Installation Instructions, P/N 315092882, for the wiring diagram. For Style 4 wiring, terminate the secondary network pair (terminals 3 and 4) on each NIM-1R with an EOLR.

NETWORK PAIR B * SUPERVISED (OMIT FOR STYLE 4)

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150 CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2 DO NOT USE TB1, 1-16

DO NOT USE

P7

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2

SEE FIGURE 2 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB3

NIM-1R

MOM-2/-4

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

NETWORK PAIR A SUPERVISED

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

DO NOT USE TB1, 1-16

DO NOT USE

P7

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2

SEE FIGURE 2 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB3

NIM-1R P3

INSTALLED IN MXL-IQ 1

MOM-2/-4

INSTALLED IN MXL-IQ 2

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

DO NOT USE TB1, 1-16

DO NOT USE

P7

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SEE FIGURE 2 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB3

NIM-1R P3

MOM-2/-4

P3

INSTALLED IN MXL-IQ 3

* REQUIRED IN CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS

NIM-1R Network Wiring (Figure 1)

7-29

NIM-1R Connections and Ratings

Network Command Center (NCC)

• The total number of s in the network must not exceed 64, including the NCC.

The RS-232 interface connects to the NCC with a 9-pin female D-SUB connector. Observe the following restrictions:

• For NIM-1Rs that are not connected to an NCC, leave terminals 12–16 disconnected.

• Give the NCC a number. (This number is in addition to the number for the MXL-IQ system that the NCC connects to.)

5 DO NOT USE

9 4

DO NOT USE

8

CONNECT TO COM1 OF NCC/NCC-G CABLE P/N 555-193085

3 7 2 6

DO NOT USE 1

DO NOT USE

SEE FIGURE 1

DO NOT USE 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB1

1

1

2

3

4

DO NOT USE 5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB3

NIM-1R P1

P3

MOM-4

P2

P4

TB2 1

TB4 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

NIM-1R and NCC Wiring (Figure 2)

7-30

P7

BLACK

SUPERVISED

CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2

GREEN

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum cable length 25 feet. 4. Cable must be in rigid conduit and can not leave the room. 5. Shielded cable is not recommended. 6. Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak. 7. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit.

WHITE RED

BROWN

DB9 FEMALE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

DO NOT USE TERMINALS 12-16 IF NCC IS NOT CONNECTED

NIM-1R Connections and Ratings

Foreign System Interface (FSI)

For networked systems, each FSI port must be configured as either local or global in the CSG-M. Local FSI ports display information only on the MXL-IQ System to which they are connected. Global FSI ports display all events in all MXL-IQ Systems. Refer to the CSG-M Manual, P/N 315-090381, for further information.

The FSI installs on TB3 or TB4, terminals 1 and 2, of the MOM-4/-2 depending on where the NIM-1R is installed. Use one of the EOLRs provided with the NIM-1R on terminals 1 and 2. This properly terminates the FSI. Use the second EOLR on terminals 3 and 4. Never use terminals 3 and 4 to connect to the FSI. Refer to Figure 3 for the polarity of the FSI driver. If multiple FSI connections are required, up to four NIM-1Rs may be installed in an individual MXL-IQ System. In networked systems each MXL-IQ can up to four FSI ports.

CONNECT ONLY TO UL EDP OR ETI LISTED EQUIPMENT

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

SUPERVISED

TRANSMIT

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

-

TRANSMIT ENABLE

+

RECEIVE EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2 DO NOT USE 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

FOREIGN SYSTEM RS-485 INTERFACE

DO NOT USE 12

13

14

15

16

P7

TB1

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TB3

NIM-1R P1

P3

MOM-4

P2

P4

TB2 1

TB4 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

NIM-1R and FSI Wiring (Figure 3)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 80 ohms per pair. 4. Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. 5. Terminate the shield ONLY at NIM-1R enclosure. 6. Maximum voltage: 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current: 150mA.

7-31

NIM-1R Connections and Ratings

AnaLASER Interface

Complete wiring of the converter before installing the ACC-1 in the enclosure.

The AnaLASER interface connects to the MOM-4/-2, TB3 or TB4, terminals 1 and 2, depending on where the NIM-1R is installed. Up to 31 AnaLASER detectors can be connected to a single NIM-1R.

• Place the end-of-line resistors in the locations specified in Figure 4 below. • Install the cable, P/N 500-693801 between the converter and the ACC-1.

The ACC-1 requires an RS-485 to RS-232 converter which mounts in the back of the ACC-1 enclosure. The converter model number is AIC-4Z. The AIC-4Z s from one to four AnaLASER detectors. Refer to the AIC-4Z Installation Instructions, P/N 315-093792, for the mounting and configuration of the converter and the ACC-1s.

• Refer to the AnaLASER Air Sampling Smoke Detection Manual, P/N 315092893, for connection to the AnaLASER detector and power supply, as well as mechanical mounting of the ACC-1.

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 80 ohms per pair. 4. Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. 5. Terminate the shield ONLY at NIM-1R enclosure. 6. Maximum voltage: 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current: 150mA. EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W, P/N 140-820150

SUPERVISED EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/4W P/N 140-820150

CABLE P/N 555-190506 TO SMB-2

TO POWER SUPPLY, TB2 LOAD -

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

16 15 14 13 12 11 10

TB3

8

7

6

5

TO ACC, TB2, TERMINAL 10

4

3

2

1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10

2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

LK1 LK2

SINGLE ZONE

LK1 1-2 JUMPERED LK2 2-3 JUMPERED LK3 2-3 JUMPERED

CON3

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

AIC-4Z

JUMPER SETTINGS

CON4

9

TO ACC, TB2, TERMINAL 10

TB1

AIC-4Z P3

TO POWER SUPPLY, TB2 LOAD +

DO NOT USE

TB1

NIM-1R

MOM-4

9

TO ACC, TB2, TERMINAL 9

TO POWER SUPPLY, TB2 LOAD +

DO NOT USE

DO NOT USE

P7

TO POWER SUPPLY, TB2 LOAD -

TO ACC, TB2, TERMINAL 9

CON2

CON1

LK3

REFER TO THE ANALASER AIR SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTION MANUAL, P/N 315-092893, FOR CONNECTION OF THE ACC, THE POWER SUPPLY, AND THE ANALASER DETECTOR AND AIR SAMPLING NETWORK.

2 1

LK1

3 2 1

LK2

3 2 1

LK3

TO ACC #1, P4

CABLE P/N 500-693801

JUMPER SETTINGS

MULTI ZONE

LK1 1-2 JUMPERED LK2 2-3 JUMPERED LK3 2-3 JUMPERED

CON4

CON3

CON2

CON1

TO ACC #28, P4 TO ACC #29, P4 TO ACC #30, P4 TO ACC #31, P4

NIM-1R and AnaLASER Wiring (Figure 4)

7-32

Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Connections and Ratings Electrical ratings: Supervisory

18-40 VDC 60mA

Alarm

18-40 VDC 130mA

Electrical connections: The MXL-IQ Control connects to the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Digital Fire Communicator using the Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory dry s on the MXL-IQ Main Board. Refer to the Silent Knight 5128/5129 Fire Slave Communicator Installation Manual, P/N 150805, provided with Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 for dialer instructions.

In NFPA 72 Central Station connections, AC fail reporting is delayed. The delay is 6 hours (25% of 24 hours) for NFPA Local and Proprietary, and 15 hours (25% of 60 hours) for NFPA Municipal Tie and Remote Station. Only the reporting of the trouble is delayed. AC power must be present for a full minute before the system switches back to AC power from the battery. Using the optional AC monitor input, the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 monitors AC fail trouble. When the MXL-IQ System reports an AC fail trouble, the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 sends a specific code to the Central Station that identifies the trouble as AC fail.

The Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 monitors all System troubles through the MXL-IQ trouble relay. The MXL-IQ delays the AC fail trouble signal in accordance with NFPA and UL requirements. In NFPA 72 Remote Station, install batteries to provide 60 hour standby capacity. For signalling service DACT wire according to the diagram on the following page.

7-33

12

CZM-1B6 POWER

11 10 9

+

-

8 7

CHASSIS

6 5

NOT SUPERVISED

4

SMB-2

3 2

(RED)

1

(BLK) (YLW) (ORN) (RED)

6

TROUBLE

5 4

*

2 1

SILENT KNIGHT 5230 (PROGRAMMING)

TELCO 1 TIP (RED)

HOUSE 1 TIP (GRAY)

(GRY)

*

(VIO)

HOUSE 1 RING (BROWN)

TO RJ31X

(BLU)

TB4

(GRN) NOT USED

P2 - CHANNEL INPUTS

NOT USED (RED)

* UL LISTED EOL DEVICE 4.7K, 1/2W, 5% (P/N 140-820388)

*

UL LISTED EOL DEVICE 3.6K, 1/4W (P/N 140-820185)

6 5

HOUSE 2 RING (BROWN)

HOUSE 2 TIP (GRAY)

SUPERVISED

(BRN) (WHT) (BLK)

NOTES 1. TRI-60R/B6R input must be programmed in CSG-M as trouble causing. 2. TRI-60R/B6R output must be programmed in CSG-M to transfer on loss of AC Mains. 3. All wiring supervised except as noted. 4. For Remote Station, provide 60 hour battery capacity.

TELCO 1 RING (GREEN)

SUPERVISED

P4

(BRN)

3

ALARM

P1 - DC POWER

4 3

TRI-B6R

MXL-IQ to Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Wiring Diagram

P3 - AC MONITOR (SEE NOTE 2) RELAY NC RELAY C RELAY NO

SILENT KNIGHT MODEL NO. 5128/29

TELCO 2 TIP (RED)

TELCO 2 RING (GREEN)

TO RJ31X

Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Connections and Ratings

7-34 TB5

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings INTERNAL WIRING

To complete the SMB-2 internal wiring connections, follow the steps below, skipping those that do not apply to your particular MXL-IQ System.

Main power connections Primary power for the SMB-2 is provided by the MPS-6/6W or MPS-12/12W. Both of these mount in the lower right-hand corner of the MXL-IQ enclosure. Follow the instructions below for the appropriate power supply.

MPS-6/6W- Install the MPS-6/6W (See MPS-6/6W Instructions, P/N 315-090334/W). With the AC mains disconnected, connect the MPS-6/6W power cable to P1 of the SMB-2. Be sure that the jumper assembly is installed in P14 of the SMB-2. If this jumper is not installed, the SMB-2 will detect a permanent AC fail or indicate auxiliary power voltage is low. MPS-12/12W - Install the MPS-12/12W (See MPS-12/12W Instructions, P/N 315092030/W). Remove and discard the jumper assembly installed in P14 of the SMB-2. Disconnect the AC mains. Connect the MPS-12/12W power cable to P14 of SMB-2.

Battery power connection The SMB-2 kit includes a battery cable (wiring harness). Use the harness to connect the 24V backup batteries to P2 of SMB-2.

MOM-4 optional module card cage There are two connections between the SMB-2 and the MOM-4 board. 1. 24V power connection. P3 provides backward compatibility with the SMB-1 and should only be used when replacing an SMB-1. P3 is limited to 2 amps. The SMB-2 allows the use of either an MPS-6/6W or an MPS-12/12W. TB1 terminals 4 and 5 supply 24V to the MOM-4 with a maximum of 6 amps (MPS-6/6W) or 12 amps (MPS-12/12W) available. This output must be derated by the total current drawn from NAC1 (1.5A max), NAC2 (1.5A max) and the CZM-1B6 power (1A max) on the SMB-2. Connect TB1, 4 and 5 on the SMB-2 to TB6/TB7, 1 and 2 on the MOM 4. 2. 5V power and the communication interface. Connect the 8-wire ribbon cable from P7/P10 on the MOM-4 to P6 on the SMB-2.

7-35

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings

FIELD WIRING The screw terminals for the field wiring circuits are located on the left and right sides of the SMB-2. They are labeled TB1 through TB5.

SMB-2

The field wiring circuits available are: • CZM-1B6 power • Analog device loop 1 • Analog device loop 2 • Notification appliance circuit 1 • Notification appliance circuit 2 • Common alarm relay • Common trouble relay • Style 4 RS-485 Network (MNET) The following sections describe each circuit type and give the related instructions. Refer also to the wiring diagrams.

MOM-4 24V Wiring

CZM-1B6 power CZM-1B6 12

+

11

DO NOT USE

10

DO NOT USE

CZM-1B6 T-TAPPING ALLOWED

_

9 TB5

CZM-1B6

CZM-1B6 Supervised Auxiliary Power Class B Wiring

7-36

Auxiliary power is available on TB5, terminals 9 through 12 of the SMB-2. The circuit is power limited per NEC Article 760 and is rated at 1 amp, 18-31 VDC. This power supply is for use with the CZM-1B6 Remote Conventional Zone module. You may connect a maximum of 20 CZM-1B6s to this power source. T-tapped wiring can be used to obtain the maximum of 20 CZM-1B6s. Each tap can a maximum of 10 CZM1B6s, 4 ohms max. Multiple power connections can be used provided you do not exceed the ratings above (20 CZM-1B6s max and 4 ohms per run max). For example, you could have four individual T-tapped power runs, for a total of 20 devices (6, 4, 3, and 7 CZM1B6s), each of the four runs not exceeding 4 ohms resistance.

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings

Analog device loops 1 and 2 (TB2 and TB3) To install a device for Class B, refer to the wiring diagram below and the electrical ratings.

Wiring the Analog Loops Class B Wiring To install a device for Class A, refer to the wiring diagram below and the electrical ratings.

Wiring the Analog Loops Class A Wiring

Only the devices listed in Appendix A, Table 2 - Analog Addressable Detectors on page A-1 may be used. The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model names specified.

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Each detector or group of detectors requires the following: • a 2-wire circuit of 18 AWG minimum thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in a conduit. or • 18 AWG limitedenergy shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. 3. Maximum resistance: 100 ohms total. 4. Maximum capacitance: 0.4µF between + loop and – loop. 0.8µF between + loop and chassis. 0.8µF between – loop and chassis. 5. Refer to Wiring Guide for compatible wire types.

6. Maximum voltage: Supervisory 30 VDC peak. Alarm 30 VDC peak. 7. Maximum current: Supervisory 66mA Alarm 66mA 8. No end of line device required. 9. Operates in full conformance with Style 4. 10. Operates in full conformance with Style 6. 11. Either loop may be wired Class A or B. 12. 60 devices maximum per loop. 13. T-tapping is NOT allowed on Class A loops. 14. Both circuits are supervised.

Analog loop electrical ratings: Supervisory 30 VDC peak 66mA max Alarm

30 VDC peak 66mA max (60 devices in alarm)

All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and the local building codes.

7-37

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings

Notification appliance circuits (TB5, 1-4 and TB5, 5-8) These circuits are for notification appliances only, NFPA 72 Local. For NFPA 72 Municipal Tie or NFPA 72 Leased Line, use the Model CSM-4. All wiring must be in accordance with Article 760 of NEC and local building codes.

Common Alarm Relay The common alarm relay changes state whenever a fire alarm is detected.

Common Trouble Relay The trouble relay changes state whenever a System trouble is detected. NOTES 1. rating: 2A, 30 VDC/120 VAC resistive. 2. Use only with power limited / Class 2 circuits. 3. Coils are supervised when de-energized. 4. s are not supervised. 5. All relay s are shown in normal state.

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 3 ohms total. 4. End of line device: 2.2K, ½W, P/N 140-820380. 5. Either circuit may be wired Class A or B. 6. Both circuits are supervised. 7. Polarity shown in supervisory state.

TROUBLE

Notification Appliance Circuits Wiring

ALARM

SMB-2 Relay Wiring Electrical ratings: Supervisory

Alarm

24V, unfiltered full wave rectified 12mA max 24V, unfiltered full wave rectified 1.5A max

Only the devices listed in Compatible Notification Appliances, P/N 315-096363 may be used. The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the model names specified.

7-38

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings

Style 4 Network (MNET) The SMB-2 provides a Style 4 MNET network for connection to remote annunciators (MOI-1/7, RCC-1/1F).

NOTES 1. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. 2. Minimum wire size: 18 AWG. 3. Maximum resistance: 80 ohms total. 4. Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. 5. Terminate the shield ONLY at the SMB-2 chassis. 6. Maximum voltage: 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current: 150mA.

SMB-2

Style 4 Network (MNET) Wiring

SMB-2 Fuses NOTE: The fuses are located on the upper left and right corners of the SMB-2 board.

FUSE RATINGS F1

MPS-6 Input

8A, 3 AG, Normal Blow

F2

Battery Reversal

20A, 3 AG, Normal Blow

F3

CZM-1B6 Power

2A, 3 AG, Normal Blow

F4

24V Output 15A, 3 AG, (TB1 - 4 and 5) Normal Blow

7-39

SMB-2 Connections and Ratings

7-40

Appendix A

Compatible Devices TABLE 2 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE DEVICES Device

TABLE 1 CONVENTIONAL DEVICES Detector

Base

Installation Instructions

CZM-1B6

DB-3S

315-081943-15

CZM-1B6

1,6

DI-B3/B3H

AD-3I/ILP AD-3RI/3RP

315-093234-4 315-086591-7

CZM-1B6

DT-11

DB-11 315-095429-1 DB-3S + DB-ADPT

CZM-1B6

PBA-1191

PBB-1191

315-095424-2

PE-3/3T

DB-3S AD-3ILP AD-3RP

315-090875-6 315-093234-4 315-086591-7

PE-11/PE-11T

DB-11 315-094198-3 DB-3S + DB-ADPT 315-094198-3 AD-11P/11PR 315-095659-2

5,7

FP-11/FPT-11

Compatible With

DI-3/3H DI-A3/A3H

5

CZM-1B6

CZM-4

4

1,6

CZM-4

4

1,6

CZM-4

4

1,6

S121/S122 + ISI-1

DB-3S —

— 8

FP-11 (d) 8, 10

Installation Instructions 315-095355-2

DB-11, DB-X11RS DB-3S + DB-ADPT 315-095921-4 DB-X3RS + DB-ADPT ADBI-60 + DB-ADPT AD-11P/11XPR

315-095659-2

—

315-095306-3

ID-60I/60IH ID-60IA/60IAH

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-090287-2

CZM-4 

ID-60IB/601BH

AD-3I AD-3XRI

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

CZM-4

4

ILI-1/1H ILI-1A/1AH

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-095387-1

CZM-4

ILI-1B/1BH 4

AD-3I AD-3XRI

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

ILP-1/ILPT-1

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-092594-5

AD-3ILP AD-3XRILP

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-095028-1

AD-3ILP AD-3XRILP

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

DB-3S

315-093336-1

MSI-10/20

—

315-090903-3

MSI-10B/20B

—

315-093329-1

MSI-B6F

—

315-095302-1

MSI-MB6

—

315-093613-1

TRI-B6/6D/6R

—

315-093315-3

TRI-B6M

—

315-094547-1

TRI-S/D/R

—

315-096242-2

CZM-1B6

1,6

315-081943-15

CZM-1B6

2,6

—

315-085258C

CZM-1B6

3

—

FM Approved Only DI-3IS + ISI-1

Base

I-B6

ILPT-1(d) ILP-2

9

ILP-2(d) 9, 10 1. May use up to 15 detectors of any type. 2. May use up to 10 DI-3IS ionization detectors in addition to mechanical (non-energy storing) shorting devices. 3. May use up to five S121 or S122 flame detectors in addition to mechanical (non-energy storing) shorting devices. 4. May use up to 30 detectors of any type, except PB-1191. 5. Do not use with alarm verification. 6. Do not use detector operated accessories with CZM-1B6. 7. Only one PB-1191, and no additional device, can be connected to a CZM-4 initiating zone.  8. The FP-11 is only compatible with MXL-IQ Rev. 6.0 or greater firmware. 9. Must use MXL-IQ Rev 3.0 or greater firmware. 10. When the CSG-M is configured, the DUCT application must be selected when the device is used in an air duct housing or in a spot duct application.

ILT-1

A-1

Appendix A

A-2

Appendix B

Device Analog Voltages DETECTOR VOLTAGE RESPONSE

Device

Input State

Voltage Response

CZM-1B6

Normal Alarm Trouble

0.50-4.19 4.20-5.0 0 0.0 0-0.47

ID-60T-135 ILT-1

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

MSI-10/20

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

MSI-10B/20B

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

MSI-MB6

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

MSI-B6F

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

MS-MI

Normal Alarm Trouble

1.80-3.0 0 3.10-5.0 0 0.0 0-1.79

TRI-60/60D/60R

Not Available

Not Available

TRI-B6/B6D/B6R

Not Available

Not Available

TRI-B6M

Not Available

Not Available

Dust

Supervisory

Trouble

4.25-5.12 4.12-5.0 0 4.0 0-4.88 3.88-4.75 3.75-4.63 3.63-4.50 3.50-4.38

0.63-4.12 0.63-4.0 0 0.63-3.88 0.63-3.75 0.63-3.63 0.63-3.50 0.63-3.38

0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50

5.25-10.0 0 5.12-10.0 0 5.0 0-10.0 0 4.88-10.0 0 4.75-10.0 0 4.63-10.0 0 4.50-10.0 0

4.25-5.12 4.12-5.0 0 4.0 0-4.88 3.88-4.75 3.75-4.63 3.63-4.50 3.50-4.38

0.63-4.12 0.63-4.0 0 0.63-3.88 0.63-3.75 0.63-3.63 0.63-3.50 0.63-3.38

0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50 0.0 0-0.50

ID-60P

LOW3 LOW2 LOW1 NOR M HI-1 HI-2 HI-3

5.12-10.0 0 5.0 0-10.0 0 4.88-10.0 0 4.75-10.0 0 4.63-10.0 0 4.50-10.0 0 4.38-10.0 0

4.12-5.0 0 4.0 0-4.88 3.88-4.75 3.75-4.63 3.63-4.50 3.50-4.38 3.88-4.25

0.88-4.0 0 0.88-3.88 0.88-3.75 0.88-3.63 0.88-3.50 0.88-3.38 0.88-3.25

0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75

ILP-1/ILPT-1 ILPT-1(d)

LOW3 LOW2 LOW1 NOR M HI-1 HI-2 HI-3

5.12-10.0 0 5.0 0-10.0 0 4.88-10.0 0 4.75-10.0 0 4.63-10.0 0 4.50-10.0 0 4.38-10.0 0

4.12-5.0 0 4.0 0-4.88 3.88-4.75 3.75-4.63 3.63-4.50 3.50-4.38 3.88-4.25

0.88-4.0 0 0.88-3.88 0.88-3.75 0.88-3.63 0.88-3.50 0.88-3.38 0.88-3.25

0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75

ILP-2 (In Default/No Application Mode Only)

LOW3 LOW2 LOW1 NOR M HI-1 HI-2 HI-3

5.12-10.0 0 5.0 0-10.0 0 4.88-10.0 0 4.75-10.0 0 4.63-10.0 0 4.50-10.0 0 4.38-10.0 0

4.12-5.0 0 4.0 0-4.88 3.88-4.75 3.75-4.63 3.63-4.50 3.50-4.38 3.88-4.25

0.88-4.0 0 0.88-3.88 0.88-3.75 0.88-3.63 0.88-3.50 0.88-3.38 0.88-3.25

0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75 0.0 0-0.75

Detector

Sensitivity

Alarm

ID-60I/60IH ID-60IA/60IAH ID-60IB/601BH

LOW3 LOW2 LOW1 NOR M HI-1 HI-2 HI-3

5.25-10.0 0 5.12-10.0 0 5.0 0-10.0 0 4.88-10.0 0 4.75-10.0 0 4.63-10.0 0 4.50-10.0 0

ILI-1/1H ILI-1A/1AH ILI-1B/1BH

LOW3 LOW2 LOW1 NOR M HI-1 HI-2 HI-3

Threshold

B-1

Appendix B

B-2

Appendix C

MXL-IQ Battery Calculations Battery backup is a requirement for the MXL-IQ. To determine the size battery you must use, follow the procedures listed below. The MXL-IQ can charge a battery of up to 55 amp hours. A battery size calculation form is also provided. 1. Record all the modules required in the form on the following page. 2. Calculate each row across and place the total in the right column: Total Standby 24 VDC Module Current 3. Total the right-hand column and record it at the bottom of the form opposite Total System Current.

5. Multiply the AH Total by 1.3 to obtain the final battery amp hour capacity and record it opposite Battery Size. Three battery models are UL listed for use with the MXL-IQ: BP-61—24V, 15 AH BTX-1—a set of 12V, 31 AH BTX-2—a set of 12V, 55 AH Select the battery that meets or exceeds the final calculated battery amp hour rating. Use an external battery box with the BTX-2 model.

4. For NFPA 72 Local, 72 Proprietary, and UL 1076 systems multiply the total system current by 24 and record it at that Total AH location. or For NFPA 72 Municipal Tie and 72 Remote Station systems multiply the total system current by 60 and record it at that Total AH location. or For FM Approved Deluge/PreAction systems multiply the total system current by 90 and record it at that Total AH location.

C-1

Appendix C

NOTES The following modules draw no 24 VDC current and do not need to be included in the battery calculations: MOM-2 MOM-4 TSW-2 1. Use this column for battery size calculations. 2. Power is supplied by a separate UPS. 3. EOL currents included.

C-2

Load Current Per Circuit Standby 24 VDC Total Standby 24 Module Quantity Module Current VDC Module (See Note 1) End of Line Device Device Current Current 175mA SMB-2 12mA per NAC 1.1mA per device MKB-4 5mA 0 0 RCC-1/1F 75mA 0 0 TSP-40 70mA 0 0 10mA CSM-4 0 12mA 15mA CRM-4 15mA per active relay 55mA CZM-4 0 3mA 105mA ALD-2I 0 1.1mA per device CMI-30 0 30mA 0 0 NIM-1R 70mA 0 NA MOI-7 120mA 0 0 MOD-16 2mA 0 0 MID-16 2mA 0 0 6mA CZM-1B6 5mA NA I-B6 18mA 2.5mA NA PIM-1 10mA 0 NA PIM-2 (See Note 2) 0 NA PAL-1 (See Note 2) 0 NA D230 0 50mA 0 0 Silent Knight 60 mA 0 0 Total System Current NFPA Local (72A), Proprietary (72D), UL 1076 (MMB-2 only) - Total AH x 24 = NFPA Municipal Tie (72B), Remote Station (72C) - Total AH x 60 = FM Approved Deluge/PreAction - Total AH x 90 = Battery Size (with Alarm Reserve Correction) x 1.3 =

Appendix D

MXL-IQ Power Supply Load Calculations Each MXL-IQ System enclosure requires an SMB-2. To ensure that the power supply is not overloaded, complete the worksheet on the following page. • Enter the quantity of each module in the enclosure. • Calculate both the 24V and 5V loads for each row. • Total the Active 24V and Active 5V columns. • Ensure that both totals are within the power supply output ratings in the table to the right.

POW ER S U PPLY OU TPU T R ATI NGS A ct iv e 2 4 VDC M odule C ur r ent

A ct iv e 5 VDC M odule C ur r ent

SMB -2/MPS -6

6 a mp s

500mA

SMB -2/MPS -12

12 amps

500mA

M odule

D-1

Appendix D

The following modules draw no current from either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC power supplies and do not need to be included in these calculations: MOM-2 MOM-4 PAL-1 PIM-2 TSW-2

Module

D-2

Active 24 VDC Module Current

SMB-2

(See Note 3)

MKB-4

0

Total Active 24 VDC Module Current (See Note 1)

Active 5 VDC Module Current

Total Active 5 VDC Module Current (See Note 2)

(See Note 3) 0

15mA

RCC-1/1F

80mA

0

0

TSP-40

70mA

0

0

CSM-4

34mA + 1.5A max per circuit

30mA

CRM-4

75mA

30mA

CZM-4

720mA 4 zones in alarm

24mA

ALD-2I

105mA + 1.1mA per device

0

0

CMI-30 0

0

0

96mA

NIM-1R

0

0

160mA

MOI-7

1. Use this column to calculate total current from 24 VDC supply to make sure it is not overloaded. 2. Use this column to calculate total current from 5 VDC supply to make sure it is not overloaded. 3. SMB-2 supplies 5V at 500mA, 24V at 6A (MPS6), 24V at 12A (MPS-12).

Quantity

120mA

175mA

MOD-16

850mA max

2mA

MID-16

32mA max

2mA

50mA

0

0

I-B6

1.5A

0

0

PIM-1

0

0

25mA

D230 0

0

0

20 0mA

CZM-1B6

Silent Knight

130mA TOTAL

0

0 TOTAL

Appendix E

Alarm Verification The Alarm Verification feature provides the MXL-IQ with a way to an alarm from area type addressable smoke detectors connected to the analog loops or from standard smoke detectors connected to the CZM-4 module. This feature reduces the incidence of false alarms. When a detector is supervised with Alarm Verification, it is turned off immediately after the System first detects alarm causing data from it. The length of time that the detector is verified is fixed at 50 seconds. In MXL-IQ, an addressable detector is “turned off” by the System ignoring its data; a standard detector is turned off by the power actually being removed from the detector. After the

turnoff period, the puts that detector into alarm if it has alarm causing data within 60 seconds of being turned back on. See the figure below for a graphic illustration of Alarm Verification You can select Alarm Verification for none, all, or any combination of addresssable smoke detectors. MXL-IQ s a global verification feature called Device Confirmation. It provides adjustable AðB verification times for all addressable: • Ionization detectors • Photo detectors • Ionization and photo detectors

A____________________B________________________C Timeð A AðB BðC

Time at which the System initially recognizes an alarm from a smoke detector. The 50 seconds during which the System ignores the alarm data The 60 seconds during which the System alarms if the device is returning alarm data

CAUTION Use only detectors which are subjected to air velocities of less than 100 feet per minute with Alarm Verification. Under dynamic air velocity conditions, smoke may be swept from a smoke detector after the initial alarm. That may cause a long delay before verification. Do not select Alarm Verification for such applications.

Line Graph of Alarm Verification

E-1

Appendix E With Device Confirmation, the BðC verification time known as System Justified Alarm time is also adjustable. It is the same time used by both ionization and photo detectors. If a device is individually selected for alarm verification, the alarm verification feature takes priority over the device confirmation option. For adjustment ranges, refer to the CSG-M Programming Manual, P/N 315-090381.

E-2

There is an Override menu selection in the Test menu of MXL-IQ. Select Alr_ to disable all alarm verification or select Alr_Confirm to disable all alarm confirmation for a period of up to 4 hours or until manually re-enabled.

Appendix F

Envirolink

INTELLIGENT ENVIRONMENTAL COMPENSATION (IEC) Envirolink is an optional feature that permits MXL-IQ to compensate automatically for environmental changes (such as dirt and dust buildup) in the analog voltage of an I Series photo or ion smoke detector. The selection of Envirolink devices is made in the CSG-M. Once a detector is chosen to be covered by Envirolink, MXL-IQ stores and analyzes the analog readings of the smoke detector and adjusts the detector’s threshold upward or downward, as necessary, to maintain a constant sensitivity.

SENSITIVITY VOLTAGE

Analog Voltage

As the analog voltage increases due to environmental factors, an equivalent increase in the detector’s alarm threshold prevents factors other than smoke from causing an alarm. This method maintains the selected detector’s sensitivity. Typically, the analog voltage changes slowly over long periods of time for environmental factors, but changes quickly over short periods of time for actual smoke.

Initial System Power-Up When a new or modified CSG-M is loaded into a system, the MXL-IQ control goes through an initial system power-up. The MXL-IQ does not keep the Envirolink option where it was formerly applied when this new system powers up. The Envirolink memory re-initializes, and then MXL-IQ begins adjusting the alarm thresholds wherever Envirolink is selected in the new CSG-M.

Alarm Threshold Voltage

0 Volts

Adjusting the Alarm Threshold When a New CSG-M is ed After MXL-IQ checks that the actual ID of a device with Envirolink agrees with the CSG-M, it adjusts the detector’s alarm threshold according to the data stored. The first adjustment occurs after 100 hours of data accumulation. In the case of power cycling or resetting, adjustments begin within 90 seconds.

F-1

Appendix F If a detector with Envirolink (IEC) reports an alarm condition before the detector’s alarm threshold is adjusted, the alarm delays until the alarm threshold is adjusted. If the device continues to report an alarm condition once its alarm threshold is adjusted, the alarm reports. If the CSG-M and the device ID do not agree, the IEC for that device does not activate until the trouble condition is removed from the system and the is reset.

MXL-IQ Power On When a system is brought on-line, or when there is a complete loss of power in an MXL-IQ enclosure containing detectors with IEC applied, the operator must perform a reset sequence for the IEC devices in that MXL-IQ and also reset the MXL-IQ. When an MXL-IQ is powered the first time, and there is no data for IEC devices, MXL-IQ leaves these devices at the default alarm threshold. However, if former IEC data is available, MXL-IQ adjusts the device alarm threshold accordingly.

Ongoing Adjustments of the Alarm Threshold Environmental conditions usually cause a small change in the analog voltage over a long period of time. At regular intervals MXL-IQ collects analog data for each detector with IEC and adjusts the alarm threshold accordingly. MXL-IQ adjusts for both up and down changes in the analog voltage. In addition, if system power is lost, MXL-IQ adjusts the alarm thresholds as needed by using stored data.

Indicating IEC Trouble Conditions A trouble condition involving the IEC may be annunciated by the MXL-IQ as: PRE-DIRTY ANALOG VOLT. REACHED

The trouble conditions shown above are annunciated on a detector-by-detector basis as each detector is checked. MXL-IQ annunciates a trouble condition for a detector when its alarm threshold reaches a predetermined limit. The operator should acknowledge the trouble, clean the detector if possible, and reset the control . If the detector is not cleaned, the control annunciates this trouble condition after every reset until the detector is cleaned. When it is cleaned, that is detected by the Auto Clean Detection feature.

Automatic Cleanliness Detection MXL-IQ automatically detects when an IEC detector was cleaned and checks whether the detector is considered clean by MXL-IQ’s standards. If the detector is clean, IEC data for that device is reset to clean levels, and the following message prints: Detector Cleaned

NOTE: Automatic detection and documentation of the cleaning of a detector by MXL-IQ may take as long as 1 hour. To avoid this, use the Det cleaned option in the Test menu to avoid automatic clean detection. When you enter the address of the detector that was cleaned, MXL-IQ adjusts that detector’s Norm sensitivity setting reference.

Detector Cleaned IEC must be enabled in the CSG-M in order to have access to the Det_cleaned option through the MXL-IQ Annunciator . At the Test menu, use the Left or Right arrow key to cause the D in Det_cleaned to start blinking:

TEST: OVERRIDE DET CLEANED

OR IEC LIMIT REACHED. SERVICE REQ

F-2

Press ENTER when the D is blinking to select Det_cleaned.

Appendix F The System asks you to type the module and device numbers. • Type the three-digit module number and the three-digit device number (mmm/ddd), including all leading zeroes. • Press ENTER. After entering the module-device, MXL-IQ checks whether the device is subject to IEC. If the device is not subject to IEC, or if IEC is not enabled for the system, an error messages displays:

DEVICE NOT SUBJECT TO IEC IEC NOT ENABLED IN CSG-M

If the device is an IEC detector, MXL-IQ displays and prints the time, date, device, and custom message of the cleaned device.

F-3

Appendix F

F-4

Appendix G

Latching/Non-Latching Troubles This feature is not available for Networked MXL-IQ Systems.

When the Latching/Non-Latching (self restoring) trouble option is set to YES in the CSG-M, MXL-IQ automatically removes trouble conditions from the trouble queue when the OUT OF TROUBLE condition is detected. For NFPA 72 Local, 72 Municipal Tie, and 72 Remote Station systems, the following criteria must be met in order for the trouble to be removed from the trouble queue: • Module and device numbers must be identical • Trouble type must be identical • Both IN/OUT conditions must be recorded in the queue • All printers being used must print both IN/OUT conditions When all these conditions are met, the MXL-IQ removes both the in and out occurrence of this trouble from the queue. If there are no other events in the system (alarm, supervisory, trouble, or security), MXL-IQ returns to the SYSTEM NORMAL display (without a system reset). If there are other events in the system, MXL-IQ updates the display.

For NFPA 72 Proprietary systems, the following criteria must be met if the trouble is to be removed from the trouble queue: • Module and device numbers must be identical • Trouble type must be identical • Both IN/OUT conditions must be recorded in the queue • All printers being used must print both IN/OUT conditions • Both IN and OUT conditions must be acknowledged and printed When all these conditions are met, MXL-IQ removes both the in and out occurrence of this trouble from the queue. If there are no other events in the system (alarm, supervisory, trouble, or security), MXL-IQ returns to the SYSTEM NORMAL display. If there are other events in the system, MXL-IQ updates the display. Not all troubles can be removed from the trouble queue. If there is no OUT condition reported (i.e., Class A loop trouble), MXL-IQ requires an acknowledgement and reset.

G-1

Appendix G

G-2

Appendix H

Installing A Security Point WARNING:

These circuits are intended for 24 hour alarm monitoring only.

CAUTION: • When setting the device address using the FPI-32, select the normally closed alarm causing input.

UL 1076 requires a TSW-2 tamper switch as well as a supervised printer (PAL-1/ PAL-2). Other supervised printers that are selectable in CSG-M are the TI-820 and the LA-50. Only Models TRI-60/-60D/-60R or TRI-B6/-B6D/-B6R may be used as security points. A COMMUNICATION FAILURE with a TRI device configured for SECURITY results in a SECURITY ALARM as well as a communication trouble. When installing a TRI device in the CSG-M, be sure to set the device usage field to security; otherwise, the device usage defaults to fire alarm. TRI-60 / TRI-B6

1 2 3 4

SWITCH

NC

5

For proprietary burglary application (UL 1076): • Use a TSW-2 tamper switch to monitor the main enclosure. • Monitor each TRI-60/-60D/-60R or TRI-B6/-B6D/-B6R related to this application for 24 hours by using a listed motion detector (to prevent tampering).

TRI-60R / TRI-B6R

+ ANALOG - LOOP OUT

+ ANALOG - LOOP IN

• Connect only one switch per TRI input.

EOL * 3.6K 1/4W

1 2 3 4

+ ANALOG - LOOP OUT

+ ANALOG - LOOP IN SWITCH

NC

EOL * 3.6K 1/4W

TRI-60D / TRI-B6D

1 2 3 4

5

5

6

6

7

7

7

8

8

8

6

NOT USED

GND

GND

+ ANALOG - LOOP OUT

+ ANALOG - LOOP IN SWITCH A

SWITCH B

NC

EOL * 3.6K 1/4W

NC

EOL * 3.6K 1/4W

NOT USED GND

* END OF LINE DEVICE: P/N 140-820185 REFER TO TRI INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, P/N 315-092329 OR 315-093315, AS APPLICABLE

Installing the Security Point for UL 1076

H-1

Appendix H

H-2

Appendix I

Application Specific Detection (ASD) Application Specific Detection (ASD) allows the system designer (and anyone with Control menu access) to program an ILP-2 detector’s sensitivity, pre-alarm threshold, and other alarm-related parameters using English descriptions of the detector's environment (application). This eliminates the need for detailed knowledge of smoke detector terminology and operation. The designer can set all of the critical detector parameters by simply selecting an application description that closely fits the one where the detector is to be installed. For example, to use ASD to select the optimal parameters for a detector in a hotel lobby, select the LOBBY application in the CSG-M for that device. The MXL will automatically transmit the factory determined sensitivity, pre-alarm threshold, and detection algorithm (R-algorithm) to the corresponding device. This eliminates the guesswork of selecting these parameters for different environments. Changes made at the control using the Control menu (Change_Apps) override the ASD settings made in CSG-M for that ILP-2 device until the next power-on reset. NOTES: 1. The ILP-2 is only compatible with MXL-IQ Revision 3.0 or greater firmware. 2. The FP-11/FPT-11 is only compatible with MXL-IQ Revision 6.0 or greater firmware. 3. When the CSG-M is configured, the DUCT application must be selected when the device is used in an air duct housing or in a spot duct application.

ASD SUBMENU ABBREVIATIONS MXL Menu

CSG-M Application

NONE

Disable

OFFC

Office (Retail)

WHSE

Warehouse (Light Manufacturing)

LOBY

Lobby

Relatively clean area, temperature changes, cellular phones, smoking

COMP

Computer Room

Very controlled environment, clean, temperature closely regulated, high cost clean machinery operating, no smoking, high air velocity

DORM

Dormitory

Airborne dust and temperature changes, living quarters, cooking fumes, smoking

HLTH

Healthcare

Higher level risk, relatively clean, electronic equipment

PARK

Parking Garage

UTIL

Utility (Transformer) Room

PREC

Precious Storage (Sensitive Environment)

HOST

Hostile Environment

DUCT

Duct (Open air or duct housing)

Description No Applications (Standard Photoelectric Detector) Reasonably clean, climate controlled atmosphere Airborne dust, equipment, fork truck and light to medium dock area exhaust fumes

Airborne dust, car and diesel fumes, temperature swings Normal to somewhat dirty environment, heat from running equipment Sensitive materials or equipment storage, clean dust-free environment, earliest warning desired Dirty, dusty, humid, operating equipment, RF present, wide temperature swings Dirty, dusty, humid, wide temperature swings, high air velocity

I-1

Appendix I

Testing ASD Devices Since one of the parameters transmitted to the detector adjusts the detection algorithm (R-algorithm) to reduce false alarms, it is necessary to defeat ASD (or at least the R-algorithm) when smoke testing ASD devices. The Test ASD_Devices menu option has been supplied for this purpose. When ASD devices are to be smoke tested, the Test ASD_Devices option must be enabled. This disables the application specific detection R-algorithm so the detector will alarm using the standard test gas method. If the Test ASD_Devices option is not enabled prior to smoking the

I-2

device, the tester may find it extremely difficult to alarm the detector since the algorithms are designed not to be fooled by a deceptive phenomenon such as test gas. Once the Test ASD_Devices option has been enabled using the test menu, the tester should wait 3 minutes before attempting to test the ASD devices. This time may vary slightly with the number of ALDs and ASD detectors in a system. This will ensure that the ASD R-algorithm has been defeated for test purposes. The system will not reset until the Test ASD_Devices option has been disabled.

Appendix J

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

MXL-IQ Trouble Messages Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

AC Fail or Brownout

Primary AC power is missing or below the brownout level; the System is running on battery backup.

Airflow Too Low

AnaLASER airflow is below programmed threshold.

Airflow Too High

AnaLASER airflow is above programmed threshold.

AnaLASER Power Trouble

Problem with AnaLASER power supply.

ASD Testing Enabled

Application specific detector testing is enabled. The applications feature is disabled during testing.

Aux Pwr Class A Fail Neg

The negative side of the CZM-1B6 power circuit is open.

Aux Pwr Class A Fail Pos

The positive side of the CZM-1B6 power circuit is open.

Battery Backup Invalid

A battery is connected, but not selected in CSG-M.

Battery Fuse/Wiring Open

Either the battery is not connected, or the battery fuse is blown, or the battery voltage is too low.

Carrier Lost

CMI-300 to CXL communications problem where the CMI-300 does not see the CXL's modem carrier (tone). No data is being transmitted.

Class A Loop Trouble

If Class A: The initiating circuit at this module address has an open. If Class B: Wired zones are missing the Class A jumpers.

J-1

Appendix J

J-2

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

CMI-300 General Trouble

Communications trouble between the CMI300 and the CXL. Data is attempting to transmit.

CSGM Out Of Date

This MXL-IQ (node) will need to be updated with the latest CSG-M networked program. A network CSG-M has been loaded on another MXL-IQ (node) and has a reference to this MXL-IQ (node).

Daily Detector Test Abnormal

Device is defective.

Detector Trouble

AnaLASER detector in need of repair.

Device Communication Error

An analog device whose response has failed error checking.

Device Detected Waveform Error

An analog device reports this trouble if it receives an unknown polling waveform.

Device LED Turned On

A device LED was turned on from the Test menu of the MXL-IQ.

Device Multiple Response

Two or more analog devices at the same address have reported during normal supervision.

Device Out of Calibration

This message is used with XLD and is the same as the XL-3 message, Response out of window at cal.

Device Receive Error

An analog device reports this trouble if it receives an incorrect analog transmission.

Event log 80% full

Use extract history in CSG-M to reset the MXL-IQ history log.

Event log 90% full

Use extract history in CSG-M to reset the MXL-IQ history log.

Function Recursion Trouble

The number of evaluations of output logic required until outputs are stable has exceeded the system maximum. Rewrite CSG-M to simplify functions.

Ground Fault Minus

Low impedance to the negative side of one of the field wiring circuits to earth ground.

Appendix J

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

Ground Fault Plus

Low impedance to the positive side of one of the field wiring circuits to earth ground.

High Battery Voltage

Battery voltage is too high because battery has been overcharged. Battery and/or charger are possibly defective.

History Manually Turned Off History Manually Turned On History Manually Erased

History Log has been manually changed (Turned Off / Turned On / Erased) using the MKB.

IEC Limit Reached. Service Req

Detector environmental compensation has reached UL limit. Detector is very dirty and requires cleaning.

IEC/Pre-alarm Memory Error

An unsuccessful attempt was made to access the IEC area of flash memory. Is IEC-1 module present? Is segmented flash present?

Incorrect Device ID

An analog device whose type or usage does not agree with the CSG-M assignment at that address.

Incorrect Node Address

Address on NIM-1R is incorrect.

Input Device Not Responding

A device assigned in CSG-M is not reporting at its address.

Input Dev Response Too Low

Input wiring to TRI or CZM-1B6 modules has an open circuit or no EOL. Loss of power to CZM-1B6 module. Smoke detector chamber defective.

Input Device Requires Service

An ion or photo detector has exceeded the 80% dust threshold.

Input Disarmed

An initiating device was disarmed through the Control menu.

Keyswitch Activated (CANADA)

This is a trouble type for activation of Canadian manual station keyswitch if no alarm is present.

Lamp Supervision Trouble

MID-1 input trouble when used for lamp supervision.

J-3

Appendix J

J-4

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

Log FULL, Events Will Be Lost

History Log is full. Use extract history in CSG-M to reset the MXL-IQ history log

Loss of 24V Input Power

A CZM-4 has lost its 24 VDC input.

Low Battery Voltage

Battery voltage readings low; the battery requires recharge/replacement.

Low IEC Voltage, Service Req

Defective device.

Memory Error In RAM Test

An error was detected in RAM memory IC 112 or IC 113.

Memory Error in ROM test

An error was detected in the EPROM IC 111 or IC 110

Memory Upgrade Required

Starting with revision 6.00, the MXL-IQ requires a memory upgrade (RAM) in socket IC113.

Missing Device ID Response

An ALD module has not returned an ID Poll response for any of its detectors or devices. NOTE: This trouble will accompany module not responding for missing ALD modules.

Module Comm Failure

When network communications are interrupted, and then restored, all module addresses affected report this trouble.

Module Not Responding

The module assigned in CSG-M at this address is not responding.

Module RAM Failure

The CRM-4, CSM-4, or CZM-4 at this address has determined that its internal RAM is not operating properly.

Module ROM Failure

The module at this address has a ROM checksum failure.

MOI-1 Local Trouble

This trouble is reported when the TRBL IN input of the MOI-7 is driven high.

MOI-1 Voice System Trouble

This condition is caused by driving the TRBL IN of the MOI-7 high with voice modules configured in CSG-M for this module.

Appendix J

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

MOI-1 Zone Disarmed

Output of an MOI-7 (MOD-16 or VPM-5) has been disarmed at the MXL.

More Than 60 Alarms

The System alarm queue is full, and more alarms have been received.

More Than 60 Securities

The System security condition queue is full, and more security conditions have been received.

More Than 60 Supervisory

The System supervisory queue is full, and mor supervisories have been received.

More Than 60 Troubles

The System trouble queue is full, and more supervisories have ben received.

Multiple Module Response

Two or more modules respond at the same address.

Multiple Response Analog Poll

Two or more analog devices at the same address have reported during an analog data request.

MXL Network Failure

The MKB/RCC has lost communication with the MNET.

Network CSGM Needed

A function was added to an XNET node and had a reference to another node. This function shall be added to each node it references.

Network Input Disarmed

A point on another XNET node has been disarmed.

Network Loop A Failure

The Style 7 primary (A) RS485 MNET network loop has failed.

Network Loop B Failure

The Style 7 secondary (B) RS485 MNET network loop has failed.

No CSG - Default In Use

No CSG-M custom programming was found in FLASH memory so the system is using the default CSG-M.

Node Disconnected

XNET node was logically disconnected from the NCC.

Node Multiple Response

Two nodes are programmed at the same address.

J-5

Appendix J

J-6

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

Node Not Responding

XNET wiring and/or NIM-1R module is defective.

Out of RAM Call Pyrotronics

The configuration is too large.

Out of Tasks Call Pyrotronics

the Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Technical Services Department.

Output Disarmed

Indicates that an output point has been manually disarmed.

PRE 1 Level PRE 2 Level

AnaLASER device has reached its pre-alarm setting.

Pre-alarm

Device has reached its pre-alarm setting.

Pre-dirty Analog Volt. Reached

IEC compensation has reached a level where the detector should be cleaned.

Printer Off Line/Fault

A supervised printer is not responding.

Printer Out Of Paper

The printer has run out of paper.

Relay Coil Open

The relay coil at this address is open.

Relay Disarmed

The relay at this address has been disarmed from the Control menu.

Relay Driver Inoperative

The relay on the CRM-4 or CSM-4 at this address does not operate when commanded to energize.

Relay Supervision Failure

The relay at this address has a coil failure.

ROM SW Version Error

Module at the address noted needs an update to latest available software level.

Signal Circuit Disarmed

The NAC at this address was disarmed from the Control .

Signal Circuit Loop Open

The NAC at this address has a broken wire or missing EOL device.

Signal Ckt Loop Shorted

The NAC at this address is shorted, or the EOL device is the wrong value, or the notification appliances are not polarized or are connected backwards.

Appendix J

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

Signal Mod A/D Convert Fail

The CSM-4 at this address has a failed analog-to-digital converter.

Signal Module Zone Code

Zone code failure on the CSM-4 module.

Software Key Violation

Incorrect Software Key Installed (NCC only).

Stack Fault Call Pyrotronics

When the message Call Pyrotronics appears, a four letter Alpha ID will be displayed. This number is necessary when reporting the problem to Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

Style 4 Network Mode

The Style 4 jumper on a NET-7 is found on a Style 7 system. Move the jumper to the Style 7 position.

Style 7 Network Mode

The Style 7 jumper on a NET-7 is found in the Style 4 mode. Move the Style 7 jumper to the Style 4 position.

System Commissioning Mode

The system has been put in the commissioning mode.

System Signal Power Failure

A CSM-4 has lost power to its output circuits.

Tamper Switch

This is a security-type message for the tamper switch on the SMB-2 board when the system is selected for UL 1076 operation.

Too Many ALD-2s

To many ALD-2Is are installed on the system. This is beyond the maximum allowed.

Trouble Causing Input

A device programmed on the system as trouble causing has been activated and has changed state.

Trouble Type Not Defined

Unspecified trouble has been received from this address.

Troubles Summarized

While the system is in the commissioning mode, the modules will display this message in lieu of all the devices on this module.

Unspecified Dev Responding

An analog device has reported at an address not assigned in CSG-M.

J-7

Appendix J

Trouble Message

The Probable Cause Is:

Unspecified Mod Responding

A module has reported at an address not assigned in CSG-M.

Unspecified Node Responding

• NIM-1R address on another node is incorrect. • The network CSG-M is incorrect.

J-8

WALKTEST Activated

The MXL-IQ has been placed in the walk test mode.

Warm Reset

The hardware reset input to the MXL-IQ was used.

Watch Dog Circuit Triggered

The watch dog circuit on the SMB-2 triggered.

Zone Loop Open

Broken wire on CZM-4 circuit.

Zone Loop Shorted

Shorted wire on CZM-4 circuit.

Zone Power Loss

The CZM-4 zone at this address has lost its 24 volt input.

Appendix K

Power Limited Wiring For power limited wiring refer to the following Installation Instructions:

Enclosure

Installation Instructions

LLM-1

315-093530-2

MSE-3

315-093831-1

MSE-3L

315-095445-1

K-1

Appendix K

K-2

Appendix L

New Two Stage Alarm

For use in Canada only with MXL-IQ software version 1.0 and higher

Canadian Two Stage Alarm is available with revision 1.0 of MXL-IQ firmware and revision 6.07 of CSG-M. All new installations of Two Stage Alarm should use the new implementation. The hardware requirements for the Two Stage Alarm are as follows: • MXL-IQ firmware revision 1.0 or higher • CSG-M revision 6.07 or higher • CSM-4s must contain revision 4 or higher The new Two Stage implementation is designed for flexibility. It allows the system

designer/programmer to define how Two Stage alarm should function.

Selecting Two Stage A new selection in the CSG-M determines which version of Two Stage Alarm is used in an MXL-IQ. In the Other System Flags menu (under the Options, System Message, Authorizations menu), a YES/NO option has been added for New Two Stage Configuration. This flag determines which implementation of Two Stage alarm is used in the MXL-IQ.

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2864 used, 243212 free Other System Flags

CONFIG => TWOSTG

Sensitivity Adjustments Allowed -----------------> Block Alarm and Trouble Acknowledge Allowed -----> Multienclosure System ---------------------------> Device disarm through RESET ---------------------> Self restoring troubles -------------------------> NFPA 71 connection ------------------------------> NET 7 checking ---------------------------->

NO YES NO NO NO NO NO

Network Repeater Used ---------------------------> NO Independent Function Keys -----------------------> NO New Two Stage Configuration ---------------------> YES

Move Cursor to Select, ENTER to TOGGLE

ESC = Prev. Menu

CSG-M Other System Flags Menu

L-1

Appendix L • Select NO for the old system flag driven version of Two Stage • Select YES for the new control function version of Two Stage NOTE: When recompiling an older implementation of Two Stage Alarm under CSG-M 6.07 or higher, make certain that the New Two Stage Configuration flag is set to NO before compiling and ing to the MXL-IQ.

Two Stage Signal Circuit Output Definition The output for all the coded audibles must be defined on a system basis. This is done in CSG-M from the Options, System Message, Authorizations menu. The Zone Coded Audible Format menu item determines the system’s Two Stage audible definition. The following nine selections are provided for Two Stage audibles:

• Zone codes must be entered on a point by point basis. • Zone codes will be output first by priority, second by queue order. • In order to have the codes sound in the queue order only, all priorities must be the same.

Two Stage Control Function (CSG-M) This function has two inputs and an output list. The inputs are labeled Stage 1 and Stage 2. The inputs may contain the following items: • a device address • function output (logic, timer, etc.) • system flag reference The output may only be a list of CSM-4 or main board signal circuits. The signal circuits referenced must be zone coded audibles. The following table describes how the Two Stage Control Function works.

Two Stage Audible - 30/120 SPM Two Stage Audible - 30 SPM/Steady Two Stage Audible - 30 SPM/Temporal Two Stage Audible - Steady/Steady Two Stage Audible - Steady/120 SPM Two Stage Audible - Steady/Temporal Two Stage Audible - Zone Coded/Steady Two Stage Audible - Zone Coded/120 SPM Two Stage Audible - Zone Coded/Temporal

TWO STAGE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Note that each selection contains a slash (/) which separates the Stage 1 audible signal from the Stage 2 audible signal as shown in the following example.

Stage 1 Input

Stage 2 Input

Coded Audibles in Ouput List

False

False

Silent

True

False

Stage 1 Audible Signal For example: 30 SPM, steady or zone coding

False

True

Stage 2 Audible Signal For example: 120 SPM, steady or temporal

True

Stage 2 Audible Signal For example: 120 SPM, steady or temporal

Example: Stage 1 audible

Stage 2 audible

Two Stage Audible - 30 / 120 SPM slash

When zone coding is selected for Stage 1, the system displays the Zone Coding Characteristics menu. (See Figure on the next page.) This menu allows the system designer to program the number of rounds, minimum number of rounds, etc. The final state will always be STEADY no matter what is selected in this menu.

L-2

True

Multiple Two Stage control functions may be used in a configuration. A single coded audible may appear on the output list of more than one Two Stage control function. Due to the potential conflict between the functions controlling the same coded output, the following rule applies to the Two Stage control function:

Appendix L

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316874 free CONFIG => TWOSTG Options, System Message, Authorizations

System Message -----------------> Authorization Code-Level 1 -----> Authorization Code-Level 2 -----> Authorization Code-Level 3 -----> COUNTRY where installed --------> Language Selection -------------> NFPA System Designation --------> Backup Power Type --------------> Zone Coded Audible Format ------> Function Evaluation Limit ------> Photo Detector Confirmation ----> Ion Detector Confirmation ------> Sys. Justified Alarm Time ------> Intelligent Env. Compensation -->

----- CERBERUS Pyrotronics ----11111 22222 33333 Canada ENGLISH and FRENCH NFPA A System 15 Amp Hour TWO STAGE AUDIBLE - ZONE CODED/STEADY 32 0 0 60 OFF

VDT Time Out (hh:mm) --> 00:05 Zone Coding Characteristics Move Cursor to Highlight Selection, then ENTER

ESC=Prev. Menu

Fire Protection Company Name CSG-M Memory=2900 used, 316874 free Zone Coding Characteristics

# rounds (3-15) ----------------> Tempo --------------------------> Final output status ------------> Inter-digit time (0.5-15 secs) -> Inter-round time (0.5-15 secs) -> Inter-group time (0.5-15 secs) -> Minimum # round (3-15) ---------> Zone Code Alarms After Silence ->

CONFIG => TWOSTG

5 60/MIN AUDIBLES ON 1.0 2.0 4.0 3 YES

Move Cursor to Highlight Selection, then ENTER

ESC=Prev. Menu

Selecting the Zone Coding Characteristics Menu

L-3

Appendix L • When a coded audible appears on the output list of more than one Two Stage control function and there is a conflict (that is, some functions indicate Stage 1 and some functions indicate Stage 2), then Stage 2 has priority over Stage 1. As a result, the coded audibles in question will output Stage 2 (either 120 SPM, steady, or temporal, as selected). NOTE: When zone coding is selected as the Stage 1 audible output, Stage 2 always has priority over the Stage 1 coding. Once the coded circuit is driven into Stage 2 by logic, all zone codes will stop for that circuit no matter what the minimum rounds are.

There are two keyswitch types available in the MXL-IQ. All logic associated with a keyswitch device is CSG-M programmable. The only MXL-IQ defined aspects of a keyswitch are as follows: Keyswitch Type 1 1. If a Type 1 keyswitch is activated, an alarm event will result. 2. The event will be recorded on the alarm queue and all standard MXL-IQ functions associated with an alarm will occur (that is, the ANY ALARM flag will be set to TRUE, the ANY NEW ALARM flag will pulse, etc.). 3. This is true even if there are no previous alarms.

Two Stage System Flags There are two system flags associated with Two Stage alarm: Reset Inhibit and Two Stage Audible State. Both of these flags are writable with -designed logic. Refer to the following table for Setting the Two Stage System Flags. It is important to note that other Two Stage writable flags used in the previous Two Stage implementation are not used in the new Two Stage implementation.

Keyswitch Type 2 1. If a Type 2 keyswitch is activated when no alarms are present in the system, it will result in a trouble condition at the MXL-IQ. 2. If an alarm is detected while this trouble condition is present on the trouble queue, the active Type 2 keyswitch will be added to the system as an alarm event (added to alarm queue).

SETTING THE TWO STAGE SYSTEM FLAGS

3. If the keyswitch is activated when an alarm is present in the system, the keyswitch will be treated as an alarm.

When the Reset Inhibit Then the Normal Reset flag is held:* (Red MMB key) is:

All other system behavior is determined by output logic design.

True False

Inhibited Not Inhibited

*The default value of Reset Inhibit is FALSE if the system does not require a Reset Inhibit.

Sample Two Stage Systems

If the Two Stage Audible Then the Normal Audible State flag is held:** Silence (Red MKB key) is:

Using Reset Inhibit with Timer The figure on page L-5 shows methods of implementing Reset Inhibit with a timer, creating an ANY KEYSWITCH function/flag and a timer based signal silence inhibit function.

False True

Inhibited Not Inhibited

**The default value of Two Stage Audible State is TRUE if the system does not require a Two Stage Audible State Inhibit.

L-4

Keyswitch Devices

Keep in mind that your implementation of these features may vary from the examples shown. If Reset Inhibit or Two Stage Audible Silence are not required in your system, then references to these flags are not required in the logic design.

Appendix L Basic Two Stage System The figure on page L-6 demonstrates a basic Two Stage system design. Its operation is summarized below:

reset (provided the RESET INHIBIT logic permits). • If a keyswitch is activated after the ANY_ALARM flag is TRUE, the system will output the second stage audibles. • In either stage, the audible silence flag/key controls the silencing and unsilencing of the coded audibles. • The Reset flag is used to assure timers and latches are reset for the next event after reset.

• This system will output Stage 1 audibles when the first alarm occurs. • If the alarm is not acknowledged prior to the expiration of stg1_timer, coded audibles will be forced output Stage 2 audibles. • If the alarm is acknowledged during Stage 1, only a keyswitch will place the system in the second stage. • If the system is reset after the alarm has been acknowledged and coded audibles silenced, the system may be

RESET_INH Any Alarm

Trigger (ALL) 30 Sec

True

SS_INH Any Alarm

Run

Trigger (ALL)

Reset Inhibit

Run

Enable

True

Two Stage Audible Silence

Enable

Start Timer

Start Timer

Cancel

Cancel

False

Reset

Typical RESET INHIBIT Timer Function

Typical Signal Silence Inhibit Function

Any_keyswch Any alarm Keyswch List of Keyswitch Inputs

OR (ANY)

AND (ALL)

Typical ANY KEYSWITCH Function

Using Reset Inhibit with Timer

L-5

Appendix L

Any Alarm

True

Stg1_timer

Run

Trigger (ALL)

Q

Start Timer

Cancel

Enable

Reset

Set

Stg2_enb

Any Alarm

Reset

Clear

Stg2_can

OR (ANY)

False

Reset

Reset

Audible Silence

In this example, several Two Stage control functions are used in the system design. Together with the proper glue logic, a modified Two Stage system is the result. In this system, the floors above and below the alarm signal Stage 1 coded audibles while the floor of alarm codes Stage 2 audibles. The general differences between the basic and complex systems are as follows: • The first alarm will result in Stage 1 coding on that floor. • An activation of a keyswitch will place the system in second stage. Therefore, the floors above and below the alarm will code Stage 1; Stage 2 will code on the floor of alarm. • If an adjacent floor generates an alarm, that floor will code Stage 2. This same principle may be applied to networked MXL-IQs using external references.

All Alarms Ackd

Any Alarm

any_keyswch

Stg1_to

AND (ALL)

Stg2_timer

Run

Trigger (ANY)

Enable

Start Timer

Cancel

For example: The building in alarm codes Stage 2 while the adjacent buildings code Stage 1.

Audible Silence

Reset

Stg1_ssi

AND (ALL)

Stg2_sil

OR (ANY)

Stg2_ran

Set

Reset

Clear

Visual indications are made using MOD-16 outputs. Simply connect the signal in the logic diagram to the desired LED or other function to indicate the system stage. For example: Connect Stage 1 and Stage 2 inputs to an LED function to indicate the system state.

Q Stg_ctl

Stg1

Stg2

Audible Silence

Q

Stg2_sil

AND (ALL)

List of Two Stage Audibles

Basic Two Stage System

L-6

Complex Two Stage System The figure on the next page demonstrates a more complex Two Stage system. The basic principles of operation are the same as the basic Two Stage system with a slight variation.

NOTE: Since other audibles may be present in the system besides coded (Two Stage) audibles, the AUDIBLE SILENCE LED on the MKB will indicate the state of the AUDIBLE SILENCE flag as usual. Its state will only change with manual intervention (manual silence/unsilence).

xxxx

Complex Two Stage System

Stg1_ssz1 To input list of stg1_ssz1, stg1_ssz2, stg1_ssz3

Stg1_timer Any Alarm

Trigger (ALL) Run Enable

Floor 1 alarm pts

Stg1_to

OR (ANY)

AND (ALL)

Q

stg2_flr1

AND (ALL)

Any Alarm

flr1_2stg Stg1

Audible Silence

All Alarms Ackd True

stg1_flr1

stg1_timer

Stg2 Stg2_sils Floor 1 alarm pts

Start Timer

AND (ALL)

First Floor Two Stage Audible List

Cancel

Stg1_ssz2

Reset any_keyswch

Stg2_enb Any Alarm False

Set

stg1_timer Floor 2 alarm pts

Stg2_timer

Q

Audible Silence

Trigger (ANY)

Reset

stg1_flr2

AND (ALL)

Clear

Stg2_sils

Enable

Reset Audible Silence

Floor 2 alarm pts

Start Timer

Stg2_can OR (ANY)

flr2_2stg Stg1 Q

stg2_flr2

Run Reset

OR (ANY)

Stg2

Second Floor Two Stage Audible List

AND (ALL)

Cancel

Stg1_ssz3

Stg2_sil

stg1_timer Floor 3 alarm pts

Stg2_ran Set

L-7

Reset

Clear

Q Audible Silence

Audible Silence Stg2_sils OR (ANY)

stg1_flr3 OR (ANY)

flr3_2stg Stg1 Q

stg2_flr3 Use to indicate Stage Two is active

Stg2_sils Floor 3 alarm pts

Stg2 AND (ALL)

Third Floor Two Stage Audible List

Appendix L

Reset

AND (ALL)

AND (ALL)

Appendix L

L-8

Appendix M

Pre-alarm, Dual Criteria Logic Functions, and Percent Per Foot Obscuration Features The pre-alarm feature provides an early warning of smoke conditions at a more sensitive reading than alarm level. This indication can be in the following form: • a displayed and printed pre-alarm report • output logic control • both Dual criteria logic allows for the distinction between the chamber or thermal detector of the ILPT-1 photo thermal. The pre-alarm and dual criteria logic function (ILPT-1 only) features of the ILI or ILP series of detectors are enabled by the FPI-32 Field Programmer. Note:

FPI-32 Rev. 1.3 or higher is required.

The FPI-32 also gives these detectors new unique IDs so that they can be identified at the MXL-IQ as different from the ID-60I and ID-60P series. The ID-60I and ID60P detectors still exist in the CSG-M, but the features described in this appendix do not apply to them.

CSG-M Software

ILI ion detectors and ILP photoelectric detectors are available as I/O device types for ALD-2s (or ALD-2Is). These device types tell the CSG-M and the MXL-IQ that they have the features of pre-alarm, dual criteria (photo thermal only), and ability to display readings in percent per foot (%/ft) obscuration. These detectors appear in the CSG-M with the existing ID-60I and ID-60P detectors. The MXL-IQ’s Custom Software Generator (CSG-M) allows the installation of the ILI or ILP detectors at any valid ALD address.

Pre-alarm Pre-alarm must be selected to either annunciate a detector’s pre-alarm or use the detector in a Criteria Selection function. Pre-alarm can be enabled at each device when it is installed as a Yes/No (Y/N) option. The CSG-M provides the following system options for pre-alarm: • annunciate (Y/N) • automatic adjust (Y/N) • annunciation type – trouble • learning period (1 - 30 days) • activate detector LED (Y/N)

M-1

Appendix M

Dual Criteria Logic Functions The CSG-M provides a logic function type labeled Criteria Selection. The following inputs to this function are a detector’s: • pre-alarm (from IL devices or Analaser), • verification, or • chamber or thermal for the photo thermal detector (ILPT-1) Pre-alarm and chamber or thermal selections cannot be mixed in the same function. The output can be any that is capable of being driven by output logic, including sending the output to another function. Note:

For networked MXL-IQ systems, no external inputs are allowed in the Criteria Selection function.

MXL-IQ Pre-alarm Software Pre-alarm Learning and Setting The MXL-IQ automatic pre-alarm learning feature adjusts smoke detector pre-alarm levels (during the time period selected in the CSG-M) until they stabilize. Depending upon pre-alarm activity, the system starts with the most sensitive pre-alarm level and gradually adjusts (de-sensitizes) the MXL-IQ until pre-alarms no longer occur. The level reached by each smoke detector at the end of the learning period is the learned pre-alarm level. No pre-alarms annunciate or feed output logic during this learning period. The learned pre-alarm level is stored in flash memory so that on a power-on, watchdog, or nickel reset, the pre-alarm readings still exist. When a new or modified CSG-M is loaded into flash memory, the MXL-IQ will NOT assume pre-alarm existed before and will re-start the learning mode. The flash memory used for storing prealarm detector readings shares the intelligent environmental control (IEC) flash memory area. This requires that a boot block flash device be used if pre-alarm is enabled. The flash segment size shared by

M-2

IEC and pre-alarm is 8K. Each IEC device uses 2 bytes and each pre-alarm device uses 1 byte, allowing a maximum of slightly over 2500 devices with both IEC and prealarm. Manual pre-alarm settings can be set at the MXL-IQ by using the CONTROL PERCENT/FT PRE_ALARM command (See Pre-alarm and Sensitivity Settings below). Any valid pre-alarm reading within the range specified in the table on page M-3 can be used. Pre-alarm adjustments are in %/ft obscuration. Manual settings override the learning mode settings. However, they do not take effect until the end of the learning period.

Pre-alarm Event Annunciation Annunciation is a global yes/no option and the type of annunciation is a trouble. The trouble report contains the type field text of Pre-alarm and both the INs and OUTs are recorded. The format of these trouble reports is identical to the format of all existing MXL-IQ trouble or supervisory reports. Annunciation of a pre-alarm smoke detector is provided even if the device goes immediately into alarm. The alarm is reported first because of its higher priority, but a pre-alarm or trouble is also generated thereafter with the same time and date. Output logic control using the criteria function with ILI/ILP pre-alarm as the criteria selection follows the INs and OUTs. If latching is desired, it must be added in the CSG-M. Using the criteria selection function to select either the chamber or the thermal for the ILPT-1 takes the MXL-IQ an additional 5 seconds (or more) to evaluate after the device alarms. This occurs because a special status poll must be done to determine whether it was the chamber or the thermal that caused the alarm. A criteria function with a selection of alarm verification provides an output for the duration a smoke detector is being verified or until reset if the device alarms.

Pre-alarm and Sensitivity Settings Pre-alarm and sensitivity adjustments are in %/ft obscuration and have the following ranges, increments, and default values:

Appendix M PHOTO

ION

Pre-alarm adjust increment

.25% / ft.

.12% / ft.

Pre-alarm range

.25 - 2.0% / ft.

.25 - .75% / ft.

1.5% / ft.

.75% / ft.

Sensitivity adjust increment

~.25% / ft.

~.12% / ft.

Sensitivity range

1.25 - 3.4% / ft.

.6 - 1.6% / ft.

3.0% / ft.

1.4% / ft.

Pre-alarm default

Sensitivity default (Norm)

Because the pre-alarm and sensitivity settings overlap, set the pre-alarm to at least an increment below the sensitivity setting.

Field Programmer Use

The FPI-32 (Rev. 1.3 or higher) must be used to enable the programming of the ILI and ILP IDs. The IDs tell the smoke detector it has the advanced features such as pre-alarm. For more information ing the FPI-32 with IL series detectors, refer to the FPI-32 Programmer/Tester Operations Manual, P/N 315-090077.

M-3

Appendix M

M-4

Appendix N

MXL-IQ Spare Parts List Cables

Part Number

SMB-1/-2 to MKB-4

555-192238

SMB-1/-2 to MOM-2/-4 (24V Power)

60 0-290505

SMB-1/-2 to MOM-2/-4 (5V and Data)

555-190506

SMB-1/-2 to Battery

555-190968

SMB-1/-2 to CSG-M Programming Cable

60 0-190704

Fuses 20 Amp MDA Normal Blow

105-292017

15 Amp 3AG Normal Blow

105-224090

8 Amp 3AG Normal Blow

105-217858

2 Amp 3AG Normal Blow

105-210758

N-1

Appendix N

N-2

Appendix O

New Features for MXL-IQ Revision 6.0 and Higher Reset Causing Zone for MID-16 or CZM-4 This powerful feature allows the to reset the MXL-IQ by changing the state of the MID-16 or CZM-4 input. In CSG-M Revision 10.01, select the new Local Reset Causing usage for MID-16 or CZM-4 in the Available Device Usage Types screen: LOC RES CAUSNG

The system designer can connect the MID-16 or CZM-4 inputs to another system via a relay or have a remote reset input. When this input changes state to the offnormal position, the MXL-IQ resets in the same way as a RED KEY reset. Existing events do not need to be acknowledged and audibles do not need to be silenced. NOTE: This option is limited to NFPA 72A systems. In networked systems, the scope of the reset is local.

ALD Fast Polling When this option is set in the CSG-M for the ALD loops, the ALD polls only up to the last device installed on the loop, thus speeding up the system response. For example, if there are only 5 devices installed on the ALD loop, the MXL-IQ polls only up to address 5 on that loop instead of polling all 60 addresses. The ALD Fast Polling option requires ALD-2I board Revision 14 and SMB ROM Rev. 6.0. See the CSG-M Appendix for

Revision 10.01, P/N 315-096220, for setting this option. NOTE: The ALD Fast Polling option can only be used with Non-Fireprint Detectors.

24 Hour Trouble Resound / Reminder Timer If this feature is set in CSG-M, the MXL-IQ automatically sounds the trouble buzzer every 24 hours from the time that the trouble was acknowledged until the trouble is cleared. The troubles themselves are not re-annunciated.

Trouble Delay Time for Damper Control Using TRI This delay time was fixed at 30 seconds in the previous MXL-IQ Revisions. In Revision 6.0, the MXL-IQ delays the TRI damper travel delay time trouble according to the time that is selected in CSG-M. The delay time is programmable from 0 to 90 seconds in 1 second increments.

Delay of AC Failure Report The delay time is programmable in CSG-M from 0 to 90 seconds in 1 second increments. The default value for this option is 0 seconds, which results in an immediate reporting of the trouble. If an AC failure occurs, the MXL-IQ checks the database for the delay time and starts

O-1

Appendix O the timer if the delay time is other than zero. No AC failure trouble is reported at this time. At the end of this delay time, if the AC still fails, the MXL-IQ posts the AC Failure trouble; otherwise, it goes back to the original state.

CCU Pager Interface A new selection is added to the list of printer selections under the Global MKB in the Network map of the CSG-M: CCU/M Pager Interface. The new selection provides a remote interface between the MXL-IQ and the operator. This selection is available in all situations where a printer was previously available. For a 72 Proprietary networked system (72D system), this selection is available under a Display Only Global MKB. There are only two selections in this configuration: NONE and CCU/M.

O-2

When programmed into the CSG-M, this pager interface can be either supervised or unsupervised. The CCU/M interface is an application specific output device, and not a global MKB printer for a 72D system. Therefore, if it is installed on a 72D networked system, it does not satisfy the compile check for a supervised printer. To this compile error, add a supervised printer to a local MKB in every node in a 72D system. Despite the above limitation, in both 72A and 72D systems the CCU/M interface counts as one GMKB printer available in a networked system. Only the normal print messages for events are sent to the CCU/M interface. Information such as acknowledge, reset, time changes, etc., do not output. The output formatting is considered as a generic ASCII printer.

Index A Acknowledge menu. See Menu: Acknowledge addresses, 3 - 1 fixed addresses, 3 - 1

CRM-4 connections and ratings, 7 - 5 description, 1 - 9 installation, 2 - 14 module address, 3 - 2 CSM-4 connections and ratings NFPA 12A, NFPA 1 - 1 and NFPA 2001, 7 - 9

alarm verification, E - 1 to E - 2

NFPA 72 Local, 7 - 7

ALD fast polling. See new features - rev.6.0 and higher

NFPA 72 Municipal Tie, 7 - 8

ALD-2I connections and ratings, 7 - 1 description, 1 - 10 installation, 2 - 12 module address, 3 - 2 analog loop, 1 - 1 analog voltages. See device analog voltages

NFPA 72 Remote Station, 7 - 8 description, 1 - 8 installation, 2 - 14 module address, 3 - 2 CZM-1B6 connections and ratings, 7 - 13 analog loops, 7 - 14

application specific detection, I - 1 to I - 2

initiating devices, 7 - 13

ASD. See application specific detection

B battery calculations, C - 1 BP-61 batteries description, 1 - 7 BTX batteries description, 1 - 7

power, 7 - 15 description, 1 - 14 CZM-4 connections and ratings, 7 - 17 description, 1 - 9 installation, 2 - 14 module address, 3 - 2

D

C Canadian two stage alarm, L - 1 to L - 7 CCU pager interface. See new features - rev.6.0 and higher CMI-300 connections and ratings, 7 - 3 description, 1 - 9 installation, 2 - 13 compatible devices, A - 1

delay of AC failure report. See new features - rev.6.0 and higher device analog voltages, B - 1 devices, compatible. See compatible devices DI Series of detectors description, 1 - 15 DT-11 description, 1 - 15 dual criteria logic, M - 1 to M - 3

Index - 1

Index IEC. See Envirolink

E Envirolink, F - 1 to F - 3

ILI Series of detectors description, 1 - 13 ILP Series of detectors

F FP Series of detectors description, 1 - 12

H

description, 1 - 13 ILT description, 1 - 13

L

History Log display, 6 - 6 to 6 - 10 audible silenced event, 6 - 8 audible unsilenced event, 6 - 8 auto sensitivity set event, 6 - 9 block acknowledge event, 6 - 7 configuration changed event, 6 - 9 event, 6 - 6 formats, 6 - 6 manual sensitivity set event, 6 - 9 override event, 6 - 8 event, 6 - 8 reset event, 6 - 6 set time event, 6 - 7 formats, 6 - 13 sequence, 6 - 14 local log query, 6 - 5 logging methods, 6 - 2 to 6 - 4 options, 6 - 1 enable, disable and erase, 6 - 4 overview, 6 - 1 print formats, 6 - 10 to 6 - 13

latching/non-latching troubles, G - 1 LIM-1 description, 1 - 14

M Menu. See MKB-4: operation Acknowledge, 3 - 18 Alarm, 3 - 18 to 3 - 19 Security, 3 - 21 to 3 - 22 Supervisory, 3 - 19 to 3 - 20 Trouble, 3 - 20 to 3 - 21 Control, 3 - 36 to 3 - 42 Analaser, 3 - 40 Arm/dis, 3 - 38 Change Apps, 3 - 42 Loop Arm, 3 - 39 Loop Disarm, 3 - 39 to 3 - 40 Net Link Request, 3 - 40 Output on/off, 3 - 38 to 3 - 39 Percent/ft, 3 - 41 to 3 - 42 Reset, 3 - 37 Sensitivity, 3 - 37 List, 3 - 22 to 3 - 36

I I / I-B6 description, 1 - 12 ID Series of detectors description, 1 - 12 to 1 - 13

Index - 2

Alarm, 3 - 23 to 3 - 24 Analaser, 3 - 32 to 3 - 34 ASD_apps, 3 - 35 to 3 - 36 Device Type, 3 - 29 Device Usages, 3 - 31 to 3 - 32

Index Message, 3 - 29 to 3 - 30

global operation, 3 - 12 to 3 - 14

Module, 3 - 28 to 3 - 29

display format, 3 - 12

Node Address, 3 - 32

keypad, 3 - 13 to 3 - 14

Output States, 3 - 31

limitations and restrictions, 3 - 12

Percent/ft, 3 - 34 to 3 - 35

installation, 2 - 4

Security, 3 - 25 to 3 - 26

local operation, 3 - 3

Sensitivity, 3 - 26

alarm, 3 - 6 to 3 - 8

Software Version, 3 - 30 to 3 - 31

command keypad, 3 - 5

Status, 3 - 23

display, 3 - 3

Supervisory, 3 - 24

display keys, 3 - 5

Temp, 3 - 28

internal audible, 3 - 4

Trouble, 3 - 24 to 3 - 25

LEDs, 3 - 5

Voltages, 3 - 26 to 3 - 28

modes of operation, 3 - 5

Test, 3 - 42 to 3 - 49

numeric keypad, 3 - 4

ASD_Devices, 3 - 48

security, 3 - 10 to 3 - 11

Det_cleaned, 3 - 47

special (alt + function) keypad, 3 - 5

Device LED, 3 - 45

supervisories, 3 - 8 to 3 - 9

Event Log, 3 - 47

troubles, 3 - 9 to 3 - 10

Ground Fault, 3 - 44

using the menu, 3-14

Lamp Test, 3 - 45

walktest. See Walktest: operating instructions

Manual Activate, 3 - 49 MOI Lamp Test, 3 - 46

module address, 3 - 2 MOD-16

Override, 3 - 46 to 3 - 47

connections and ratings, 7 - 21

Power, 3 - 44 to 3 - 45

description, 1 - 10

Pre-alarm, 3 - 47 to 3 - 48

installation, 2 - 9

Pyro-diags, 3 - 47

operation, 3 - 3

Set Time, 3 - 43 to 3 - 44

Module Addresses. See Addresses

Summarize, 3 - 48 to 3 - 49

MOI-7

Test Network (X-Net, M-Net), 3 - 46

connections and ratings, 7 - 19

Menu overview, 3 - 15

description, 1 - 10

MID-16

installation, 2 - 9

connections and ratings, 7 - 21

module address, 3 - 2

description, 1 - 11

operation, 3 - 3

installation, 2 - 9 MKB-4 description, 1 - 5

MOM-2 connections and ratings, 7 - 25 description, 1 - 8 installation, 2 - 6 to 2 - 9

Index - 3

Index MOM-4 connections and ratings, 7 - 27 description, 1 - 8

P PAL-1 description, 1 - 6

installation, 2 - 6 to 2 - 9 MPS-6/-6W, MPS-12/-12W description, 1 - 5 installation, 2 - 3 to 2 - 4 MSE-3L installation, 2 - 2 MSI Series of manual stations description, 1 - 14

installation, 2 - 6 PBA-1191 description, 1 - 15 PE Series of detectors description, 1 - 15 percent per foot obscuration, M - 1 to M - 3 PIM-1 description, 1 - 6

MXL Power Supply Load Calculations, D - 1 MXL-IQ basic components, 1 - 4 battery calculations, C - 1 description, 1 - 1 minimum configuration, 1 - 3 new features - rev.6.0 and higher, O - 1 power supply load calculations, D - 1 software, 1 - 1

N new features - rev.6.0 and higher, O - 1 to O - 2

installation, 2 - 5 PIM-2/PAL-1 installation, 2 - 6 power limited wiring, K - 1 power supply load calculations, D - 1 pre-alarm, M - 1 to M - 3

R reset causing zone for MID-16 or CZM-4. See new features - rev.6.0 and higher: reset causing zone reset procedures hard reset, 3 - 11

24 hour trouble resound /reminder timer, O - 1 ALD fast polling, O - 1 CCU pager interface, O - 2 delay of AC failure report, O - 1 to O - 2 reset causing zone, O - 1 trouble delay time for damper control using TRI, O - 1 NIM-1R connections and ratings, 7 - 29 to 7 - 32 AnaLaser interface, 7 - 32 foreign system interface (FSI), 7 - 31

soft reset, 3 - 11 to 3 - 12

S security point, installing, H - 1 self restoring troubles. See latching/non-latching troubles Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 connections and ratings, 7 - 33 SMB-2 connections and ratings, 7 - 35

network, 7 - 29

field wiring, 7 - 36 to 7 - 38

network command center (NCC), 7 - 30

internal wiring, 7 - 35

description, 1 - 11

description, 1 - 4

installation, 2 - 14

installation, 2 - 3 module address 3 - 2

Index - 4

Index spare parts list, N - 1 start up procedure, 2 - 10 to 2 - 16 system operation, global, 3 - 12 to 3 - 14 system test, 4 - 1

T testing procedures, 4 - 1 TRI Series of interface modules description, 1 - 14 trouble delay time for damper control using TRI. See new features - rev.6.0 and higher trouble messages, J - 1 to J - 8 trouble resound / reminder timer. See new features rev.6.0 and higher Troubleshooting Guide, 4 - 2 TSW-2 description, 1 - 6 installation, 2 - 2 two stage alarm, Canadian, L - 1 to L - 7

W Walktest, 5 - 1 to 5 - 6 operating instructions, 5 - 4 overview, 5 - 1 suggested procedure, 5 - 2 to 5 - 3

Index - 5

Index

Index - 6

WARNING:

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.

Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 8 Fernwood Road Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 P/N 315-093624CD-9

Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd. 50 East Pearce Street Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 1B7 CN

NOTES: 1. For Installation Instructions for the MXL-IQ modules refer to the Table below. 2. Waterflow Alarm must be AccuLINK (CSG-M) configured to at least one non-silenceable NAC. 3. Refer to the MXL-IQ OPERATION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (P/N 315-093624) for minimum NFPA configurations and additional information. 4. Use the following batteries: BTX-1, BTX-2, or BP-61. 5. The CSM-4 module is capable of the following functions: Leased Line Circuit Supervised Local Energy Auxiliary Trip (Municipal Tie) Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit Releasing Service 6. CRM-4 relay coils are supervised when not energized; s are not. 7. For alternate configurations using CZM-1/1B6s, consult Technical . 8. Optional transient suppressors Model 2341 and 2297 may be used in addition to the transient protection incorporated in the and not in lieu of that protection. Use them for extreme lightning conditions. For 2297 refer to instructions P/N 315-092355. For 2341 refer to instructions P/N 315- 092390. 9. For the Silent Knight 5128/5129 Central Station, Remote Station connection (NFPA 72), refer to instructions P/N 315-093294. 10. The modules indicated with an asterisk in the Table below are rated power limited on all terminals. Refer to the MXL-IQ Power Limited Wiring Instructions, P/N 315-095445, for separation of power limited wiring. 11. When the CSM-4 is configured for Municipal Tie or Releasing Service, terminals 1 and 4 and/or terminals 9 and 12 are non-power limited. In all other applications, the CSM-4 is power limited on all terminals. 12. For a list of Compatible Notification Appliances, refer to P/N 315-096363.

> * 7 (2 =. ', 2 <

:) 0 2 ?

$ . - ( " ? 7 (+ 0- 1(

)( C%+B 44A' A@?

)( C%+B 44A' A@?

/(( OLAE A@? NHML "% 2FKHFE JFIHGFED 8( OLAE A@? NHML "&<;. 2FKHFE JFIHGFED

>&A#@ C:B $,,7

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /#A' A@?

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /T8' A@?

) OLAE A@?

>&A#@ BI&#GHGAF E,D(2

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /' A@?

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /' A@?

0 OLAE A@?! V/( +3*$/
:$J#@"

)( C%+B 4(A' A@?

)( C%+B 4(A' A@?

/(( OLAE A@? NHML "% 2FKHFE JFIHGFED 8( OLAE A@? NHML "&<;. 2FKHFE JFIHGFED

BI&#K

#($#0T8 C%+ 0A' A@?

#0T8 C%+ A@? /9(A' A@?

,( OLAE A@?

BI&#GHGAF

/9$#0T8 C%+ 0A' A@?

#0T8 C%+ A@? 08A' A@?

)8 OLAE A@?

>&A#@ :-0),3 $,,7

B>&#K C:B $,,7

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /#A' A@?

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B ##($)#(A' VAOAFRM@KWU

##T8 OLAE A@? VHRGPSJHRX PO@JU

B>&#K $(0'(+ $.-(

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B )$-A' A@?

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B )$-A' A@?

#T86 OLAE VHRGPSJFE PHRF @RJ PO@JU

#0 C%+ /#A' A@?

#0 C%+ 9((A' A@?

) OLAE A@?

B>&#K 4()(0'.-3 >(2=.1( *See Note 7

&%$#"! &,+*)('

"-'/0))0/.,"-'/2*1/.,-'

'&%$#"! +*"$)((! +.##-, +.#)0/ +1*$0 +2*$0† +3*$/! +3*$/54! +3*$0! "+.! "+.$54! &"*$/! *"%$/4 *65$0 *7%$/4

)/8$(-/040$8 )/8$(-/#8-$8 )/8$(-#)88$# )/8$(-#-)($# )/8$(-(98)+ )/8$(-(980$)/8$(-(,#8$9 )/8$(-8)88$# )/8$(-(,#4$, )/8$(-#0,0$4 )/8$(-8)(4$# )/8$(-#/)8$8 )/8$(-/94($# )/8$(-)8,8$) )/8$(-(9)($0

*7"$,! *7*$# *7*$0 *.2$4 *.2$/# :"*$/1 .'&$/ ."*$/! ."*$# .2$8' .2$8:,! 1++$/2=$#

)/8$(-#,--$# )/8$(-#,,,$8 )/8$(-(98#$, )/8$(-())0$) )/8$(-#()($) )/8$(-#-8)$0 )/8$(-#0(9$8 )/8$(-/04#$/( )/8$(-#0(9$8 )/8$(-#)4,$0 )/8$(-#,#-$4 )/8$(-8)40$# )/8$(-8-)/$# )/8$(-#0))$#

†See Note 11

† ;=1 Y ;SPP =@IF 1FGMHQHFJ

C o mp a tib le In itia tin g D e v ic e s fo r AL D - 2 I a n d S M B - 2 Compatible Devices

Base

Installation Instructions

CZM-1

—

315-090725-8

CZM-1B6

—

315-095355-2

DB-11, DB-X11RS DB-3S + DB-ADPT DB-X3RS + DB-ADPT ADBI-60 + DB-ADPT

315-095921-4 315-095921-4 315-095921-4 315-095921-4

FP-11*

FP-11*(d)†

AD-11P/11XPR

315-095659-2

DB-11, DB-X11RS DB-3S + DB-ADPT DB-X3RS + DB-ADPT ADBI-60 + DB-ADPT

315-095921-4 315-095921-4 315-095921-4 315-095921-4

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-090287-2

AD-3I AD-3XRI

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

ILI-1/1H/1A/1AH

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-095387-1

ILP-1

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-092594-5

AD-3ILP AD-3XRILP

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

ILPT-1

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

ILP-2**

FPT-11*

ID-60I/IH/IA/IAH

"-'/0))0/.,"-'/2*1/.,-'

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

) OLAE A@?

#0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /#A' A@? #0C SRQHPMFKFJ ;=1†B /T8A' A@?

B>&#K &*-.1.70) L.(

ID-60IB/IBH

&%$#"! &,+*)('

CERBERUS PYROTRONICS™ Model MXL-IQ

5 ) ( 1 / 2 . 1 0 ) 40 / . - 3 ' ;:) ) 20/. -3' 02( 7(2 9,-(8 7(2 ) ,,78 ,2 7(2 1. 21*. /6

ILP-1 (d)

ILP-2**(d)† ILT-1

For Proprietary Burglary Application (1076) use a TSW-2 tamper switch to monitor the main enclosure. Monitor each TRI-60/60R/60D or TRI-B6/B6R/B6D related to this application (1076) for 24 hours by a listed motion detector to prevent tampering.

C ompatible D etectors for C ZM -4 Detector

Base

C ompatible D etectors for C ZM -1/ -1B 6*

Installation Instructions

DI-3/3H*

DB-3S

315-081943-15

315-092594-5

DI-A3/A3H*

DB-3S

315-081943-15

DI-3/3H

DB-3S

315-081943-15

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-095028-3

DI-B3/B3H*

DB-3S

315-081943-15

315-093234-4 315-093235-4

315-093234-4 315-086591-7

DI-A3/A3H

AD-3ILP AD-3XRILP

AD-3I/3ILP AD-3RI/3RP

DT-11*

DB-11 DB-3S + DB-ADPT

315-095429-1 315-095429-1

DI-B3/B3H

AD-3I/3ILP AD-3RI/3RP

315-093234-4 315-086591-7

PBA-1191**

PBB-1191

315-095424-2

DB-11 DB-3S + DB-ADPT

315-095429-1 315-095429-1

PE-3/3T*

DB-3S AD-3ILP AD-3RP

315-090875-6 315-093234-4 315-086591-7

PE-3/3T

DB-3S AD-3ILP AD-3RP

315-090875-6 315-093234-4 315-086591-7

DB-11 DB-3S + DB-ADPT AD-11P/11PR

315-094198-6 315-094198-6 315-095659-2

PE-11/11T

DB-11 DB-3S + DB-ADPT AD-11P

315-094198-6 315-094198-6 315-095659-2

DB-3S, DB-X3RS

315-093336-1

MSI-10/-20

—

315-090903-3

MSI-10B/-20B

—

315-093329-3

MSI-B6F

—

315-095302-1

MSI-MB6

—

315-093613-1

TRI-B6/B6D/B6R

—

315-093315-3

TRI-B6M

—

315-094547-1

TRI-S/D/R

—

315-096242-1

*The FP-11 is only com pat ible w it h M XL-I Q R ev. 6. 0 or great er f irm w are. **The I LP-2 i s onl y com pat i bl e wi t h M XL-I Q Rev. 3. 0 or great er f i rm ware. †When t he CSG-M i s conf i gured, t he DUCT appl i cat i on m ust be sel ect ed when t he devi ce i s used i n an ai r duct housi ng or i n a spot duct appl i cat i on.

PE-11/11T*

*M ay use up t o 30 det ect ors of any t ype. **Onl y one PBA-1191, and no addi t i onal devi ces, can be connect ed t o a CZM -4 i ni t i at i ng zone.

Detector

DT-11

Base

Installation Instructions

M a y u s e u p t o 1 5 d e t e c t o rs o f a n y t y p e . *D o n o t u s e A D - 1 1 P R o r d e t e c t o r - o p e r a t e d a c c e s s o r i e s w i t h t h e C Z M -1 / -1 B 6 .

Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 8 Fernwood Road Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd. 50 East Pearce Street Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 1B7 CN

P/N 575-293638CD-9